Pauli's Principle
Pauli's Principle
Mechanics
Made
Simple:
Lecture
Notes
Weng
Cho
CHEW1
October
5,
2012
1The
author
is
with
U
of
Illinois,
Urbana-Champaign.
He
works
part
time
at
Hong
Kong
U
this
summer.
Contents
Preface
vii
Acknowledgements
vii
1
Introduction
1
1.1
Introduction.....................................
1
1.2
QuantumMechanicsisBizarre
..........................
2
1.3
The
Wave
Nature
of
a
Particle{Wave
Particle
Duality
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
2
Classical
Mechanics
7
2.1
Introduction.....................................
7
2.2
LagrangianFormulation
..............................
8
2.3
HamiltonianFormulation
.............................
10
2.4
MoreonHamiltonian................................
12
2.5
PoissonBracket...................................
12
3
Quantum
Mechanics|Some
Preliminaries
15
3.1
Introduction.....................................
15
3.2
Probabilistic
Interpretation
of
the
wavefunction
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
3.3
Simple
Examples
of
Time
Independent
Schrodinger
Equation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
3.3.1
Particleina1DBox
............................
19
3.3.2
ParticleScatteringbyaBarrier
......................
21
3.3.3
ParticleinaPotentialWell
........................
21
3.4
TheQuantumHarmonicOscillator
........................
23
4
Time-Dependent
Schrodinger
Equation
27
4.1
Introduction.....................................
27
4.2
QuantumStatesintheTimeDomain.......................
27
4.3
CoherentState
...................................
28
4.4
Measurement
Hypothesis
and
Expectation
Value
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
4.4.1
Time
Evolution
of
the
Hamiltonian
Operator
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
4.4.2
UncertaintyPrinciple
...........................
32
4.4.3
ParticleCurrent
..............................
32
i
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
5
Mathematical
Preliminaries
35
5.1
AFunctionisaVector
...............................
35
5.2
Operators
......................................
38
5.2.1
MatrixRepresentationofanOperator
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
38
5.2.2
BilinearExpansionofanOperator
....................
39
5.2.3
TraceofanOperator............................
39
5.2.4
UnitaryOperators
.............................
41
5.2.5
HermitianOperators
............................
42
5.3
IdentityOperatorinaContinuumSpace
.....................
44
5.4
ChangingBetweenRepresentations
........................
47
5.4.1
TheCoordinateBasisFunction
......................
48
5.5
CommutationofOperators
............................
49
5.6
Expectation
Value
and
Eigenvalue
of
Operators
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
49
5.7
GeneralizedUncertaintyPrinciple.........................
51
5.8
Time
Evolution
of
the
Expectation
Value
of
an
Operator
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
53
5.9
PeriodicBoundaryCondition
...........................
54
6
Approximate
Methods
in
Quantum
Mechanics
57
6.1
Introduction.....................................
57
6.2
UseofanApproximateSubspace
.........................
57
6.3
TimeIndependentPerturbationTheory
.....................
59
6.4
TightBindingModel
................................
64
6.4.1
VariationalMethod
............................
66
6.4.2
TimeDependentPerturbationTheory
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
67
7
Quantum
Mechanics
in
Crystals
71
7.1
Introduction.....................................
71
7.2
Bloch-FloquetWaves
................................
72
7.3
Bloch-FloquetTheoremfor3D
..........................
74
7.4
E#ectiveMassSchrodingerEquation
.......................
78
7.5
DensityofStates(DOS)
..............................
79
7.6
DOSinaQuantumWell..............................
81
8
Angular
Momentum
85
8.1
Introduction.....................................
85
8.1.1
ElectronTrappedinaPillBox
......................
86
8.1.2
ElectronTrappedinaSphericalBox
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
88
8.2
MathematicsofAngularMomentum
.......................
91
8.3
L^2
Operator.....................................
92
Contents
iii
9
Spin
95
9.1
Introduction.....................................
95
9.2
SpinOperators
...................................
95
9.3
TheBlochSphere..................................
97
9.4
Spinor........................................
98
9.5
PauliEquation
...................................
99
10
Identical
Particles
101
10.1Introduction.....................................
101
10.2PauliExclusionPrinciple
.............................
102
10.3ExchangeEnergy
..................................
102
10.4
ExtensiontoMoreThanTwoParticles.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
104
10.5CountingtheNumberofBasisstates
.......................
105
10.6Examples
......................................
106
10.7ThermalDistributionFunctions..........................
107
11
Density
Matrix
111
11.1PureandMixedStates...............................
111
11.2DensityOperator
..................................
112
11.3
Time
Evolution
of
the
Matrix
Element
of
an
Operator
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
114
11.4
Interaction
of
Light
with
Two-Level
Atomic
System
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
115
12
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
123
12.1Introduction.....................................
123
12.2
The
Quantum
Harmonic
Oscillator
Revisited
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
124
12.2.1
EigenfunctionbytheLadderApproach
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
126
12.3
Quantization
of
Waves
on
a
Linear
Atomic
Chain{Phonons
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
127
12.4
Schrodinger
Picture
versus
Heisenberg
Picture
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
132
12.5TheContinuumLimit
...............................
133
12.6
QuantizationofElectromagneticField
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
136
12.6.1
Hamiltonian.................................
137
12.6.2
FieldOperators...............................
138
12.6.3
MultimodeCaseandFockState
.....................
139
12.6.4
One-PhotonState
.............................
140
12.6.5
CoherentStateRevisited
.........................
141
13
Schrodinger
Wave
Fields
145
13.1Introduction.....................................
145
13.2FockSpaceforFermions
..............................
145
13.3FieldOperators
...................................
147
13.4SimilarityTransform
................................
149
13.5AdditiveOne-ParticleOperator
..........................
150
13.5.1
Three-ParticleCase
............................
151
13.6AdditiveTwo-ParticleOperator..........................
153
13.7MoreonFieldOperators..............................
155
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
13.8BosonWaveField
.................................
157
13.9BosonFieldOperators
...............................
158
13.10AdditiveOne-ParticleOperator
..........................
159
13.11The
Di#erence
between
Boson
Field
and
Photon
Field
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
160
14
Interaction
of
Di#erent
Particles
161
14.1Introduction.....................................
161
14.2InteractionofParticles
...............................
161
14.3Time-DependentPerturbationTheory
......................
162
14.3.1
Absorption
.................................
163
14.4SpontaneousEmission
...............................
165
14.5StimulatedEmission
................................
165
14.6Multi-photonCase
.................................
167
14.7TotalSpontaneousEmissionRate.........................
167
15
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
169
15.1Introduction.....................................
169
15.2QuantumCryptography
..............................
169
15.2.1
No-cloningTheorem
............................
169
15.2.2EntangledStates
..............................
170
15.2.3
A
Simple
Quantum
Encryption
Algorithm
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
172
15.3QuantumComputing................................
174
15.3.1
QuantumBits(Qubits)
..........................
174
15.3.2
QuantumGates...............................
175
15.3.3
QuantumComputingAlgorithms
.....................
176
15.4QuantumTeleportation
..............................
178
15.5InterpretationofQuantumMechanics
......................
180
15.6EPRParadox
....................................
181
15.7Bell'sTheorem
...................................
182
15.7.1
PredictionbyQuantumMechanics
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
183
15.7.2
PredictionbyHiddenVariableTheory
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
184
15.8AFinalWordonQuantumParallelism......................
187
A
Generators
of
Translator
and
Rotation
191
A.1
In
nitesimalTranslation
..............................
191
A.2
In
nitesimalRotation
...............................
192
A.3
DerivationofCommutationRelations
......................
193
B
Quantum
Statistical
Mechanics
195
B.1
Introduction.....................................
195
B.1.1
DistinguishableParticles..........................
195
B.1.2
IdenticalFermions
.............................
197
B.1.3
IdenticalBosons
..............................
197
B.2
MostProbableCon
guration
...........................
197
B.2.1
DistinguishableParticles..........................
198
Contents
v
B.2.2
IdenticalFermions
.............................
198
B.2.3
IdenticalBosons
..............................
199
B.3
The
Meaning
of
a
and
�
..............................
200
C
Gaussian
Wave
Packet
203
C.1
Introduction.....................................
203
C.2
DerivationfromtheWaveEquation
.......................
204
C.3
PhysicalInterpretation...............................
205
C.4
StabilityofthePlaneWaveSolution
.......................
207
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Preface
This
set
of
supplementary
lecture
notes
is
the
outgrowth
of
a
course
I
taught,
ECE
487,
Quantum
Electronics,
at
ECE
Department,
University
of
Illinois
at
Urbana-Champaign.
It
was
intended
to
teach
quantum
mechanics
to
undergraduate
students
as
well
as
graduate
students.
The
primary
text
book
for
this
course
is
Quantum
Mechanics
for
Scientists
and
Engineers
by
D.A.B.
Miller.
I
have
learned
a
great
deal
by
poring
over
Miller's
book.
But
where
I
feel
the
book
to
be
incomplete,
I
supplement
them
with
my
lecture
notes.
I
try
to
reach
into
rst
principles
as
much
as
I
could
with
these
lecture
notes.
The
only
background
needed
for
reading
these
notes
is
a
background
in
undergraduate
wave
physics,
and
linear
algebra.
I
would
still
recommend
using
Miller's
book
as
the
primary
text
book
for
such
a
course,
and
use
these
notes
as
supplementary
to
teach
this
topic
to
undergraduates.
Weng
Cho
CHEW
October
5,
2012
Acknowledgements
I
like
to
thank
Erhan
Kudeki
who
encouraged
me
to
teach
this
course,
and
for
having
many
interesting
discussions
during
its
teaching.
I
acknowledge
interesting
discussions
with
Fuchun
ZHANG,
Guanhua
CHEN,
Jian
WANG,
and
Hong
GUO
(McGill
U)
at
Hong
Kong
U.
I
also
like
to
thank
many
of
my
students
and
researchers
who
have
helped
type
the
notes
and
proofread
them.
They
are
Phil
Atkins,
Fatih
Erden,
Tian
XIA,
Palash
Sarker,
Jun
HUANG,
Qi
DAI,
Zuhui
MA,
Yumao
WU,
Min
TANG,
Yat-Hei
LO,
Bo
ZHU,
and
Sheng
SUN.
vii
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Chapter
1
Introduction
1.1
Introduction
Quantum
mechanics
is
an
important
intellectual
achievement
of
the
20th
century.
It
is
one
of
the
more
sophisticated
eld
in
physics
that
has
a#ected
our
understanding
of
nano-meter
length
scale
systems
important
for
chemistry,
materials,
optics,
and
electronics.
The
existence
of
orbitals
and
energy
levels
in
atoms
can
only
be
explained
by
quantum
mechanics.
Quantum
mechanics
can
explain
the
behaviors
of
insulators,
conductors,
semi-conductors,
and
giant
magneto-resistance.
It
can
explain
the
quantization
of
light
and
its
particle
nature
in
addition
to
its
wave
nature.
Quantum
mechanics
can
also
explain
the
radiation
of
hot
body,
and
its
change
of
color
with
respect
to
temperature.
It
explains
the
presence
of
holes
and
the
transport
of
holes
and
electrons
in
electronic
devices.
Quantum
mechanics
has
played
an
important
role
in
photonics,
quantum
electronics,
and
micro-electronics.
But
many
more
emerging
technologies
require
the
understanding
of
quantum
mechanics;
and
hence,
it
is
important
that
scientists
and
engineers
understand
quantum
mechanics
better.
One
area
is
nano-technologies
due
to
the
recent
advent
of
nanofabrication
techniques.
Consequently,
nano-meter
size
systems
are
more
common
place.
In
electronics,
as
transistor
devices
become
smaller,
how
the
electrons
move
through
the
device
is
quite
di#erent
from
when
the
devices
are
bigger:
nano-electronic
transport
is
quite
di#erent
from
micro-electronic
transport.
The
quantization
of
electromagnetic
eld
is
important
in
the
area
of
nano-optics
and
quantum
optics.
It
explains
how
photons
interact
with
atomic
systems
or
materials.
It
also
allows
the
use
of
electromagnetic
or
optical
eld
to
carry
quantum
information.
Moreover,
quantum
mechanics
is
also
needed
to
understand
the
interaction
of
photons
with
materials
in
solar
cells,
as
well
as
many
topics
in
material
science.
When
two
objects
are
placed
close
together,
they
experience
a
force
called
the
Casimir
force
that
can
only
be
explained
by
quantum
mechanics.
This
is
important
for
the
understanding
of
micro/nano-electromechanical
sensor
systems
(M/NEMS).
Moreover,
the
understanding
of
spins
is
important
in
spintronics,
another
emerging
technology
where
giant
magneto-resistance,
tunneling
magneto-resistance,
and
spin
transfer
torque
are
being
used.
Quantum
mechanics
is
also
giving
rise
to
the
areas
of
quantum
information,
quantum
1
2
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
communication,
quantum
cryptography,
and
quantum
computing.
It
is
seen
that
the
richness
of
quantum
physics
will
greatly
a#ect
the
future
generation
technologies
in
many
aspects.
1.2
Quantum
Mechanics
is
Bizarre
The
development
of
quantum
mechanicsis
a
great
intellectual
achievement,
but
at
the
same
time,
it
is
bizarre.
The
reason
is
that
quantum
mechanics
is
quite
di#erent
from
classical
physics.
The
development
of
quantum
mechanics
is
likened
to
watching
two
players
having
a
game
of
chess,
but
the
watchers
have
not
a
clue
as
to
what
the
rules
of
the
game
are.
By
observations,
and
conjectures,
nally
the
rules
of
the
game
are
outlined.
Often,
equations
are
conjectured
like
conjurors
pulling
tricks
out
of
a
hat
to
match
experimental
observations.
It
is
the
interpretations
of
these
equations
that
can
be
quite
bizarre.
Quantum
mechanics
equations
were
postulated
to
explain
experimental
observations,
but
the
deeper
meanings
of
the
equations
often
confused
even
the
most
gifted.
Even
though
Einstein
received
the
Nobel
prize
for
his
work
on
the
photo-electric
e#ect
that
con
rmed
that
light
energy
is
quantized,
he
himself
was
not
totally
at
ease
with
the
development
of
quantum
mechanicsas
charted
by
the
younger
physicists.
He
was
never
comfortable
with
the
probabilistic
interpretation
of
quantum
mechanics
by
Born
and
the
Heisenberg
uncertainty
principle:
\God
doesn't
play
dice,�
was
his
statement
assailing
the
probabilistic
interpretation.
He
proposed
\hidden
variables�
to
explain
the
random
nature
of
many
experimental
observations.
He
was
thought
of
as
the
\old
fool�
by
the
younger
physicists
during
his
time.
Schrodinger
came
up
with
the
bizarre
\Schrodinger
cat
paradox�
that
showed
the
struggle
that
physicists
had
with
quantum
mechanics's
interpretation.
But
with
today's
understanding
of
quantum
mechanics,
the
paradox
is
a
thing
of
yesteryear.
The
latest
twist
to
the
interpretation
in
quantum
mechanics
is
the
parallel
universe
view
that
explains
the
multitude
of
outcomes
of
the
prediction
of
quantum
mechanics.
All
outcomes
are
possible,
but
with
each
outcome
occurring
in
di#erent
universes
that
exist
in
parallel
with
respect
to
each
other.
1.3
The
Wave
Nature
of
a
Particle{Wave
Particle
Duality
The
quantized
nature
of
the
energy
of
light
was
rst
proposed
by
Planck
in
1900
to
successfully
explain
the
black
body
radiation.
Einstein's
explanation
of
the
photoelectric
e#ect
further
asserts
the
quantized
nature
of
light,
or
light
as
a
photon.1
However,
it
is
well
known
that
light
is
a
wave
since
it
can
be
shown
to
interfere
as
waves
in
the
Newton
ring
experiment
as
far
back
as
1717.
The
wave
nature
of
an
electron
is
revealed
by
the
fact
that
when
electrons
pass
through
a
crystal,
they
produce
a
di#raction
pattern.
That
can
only
be
explained
by
the
wave
nature
1In
the
photoelectric
e#ect,
it
was
observed
that
electrons
can
be
knocked
off
a
piece
of
metal
only
if
the
light
exceeded
a
certain
frequency.
Above
that
frequency,
the
electron
gained
some
kinetic
energy
proportional
to
the
excess
frequency.
Einstein
then
concluded
that
a
packet
of
energy
was
associated
with
a
photon
that
is
proportional
to
its
frequency.
Introduction
of
an
electron.
This
experiment
was
done
by
Davisson
and
Germer
in
1927.
De
Broglie
hypothesized
that
the
wavelength
of
an
electron,
when
it
behaves
like
a
wave,
is
.
=
(1.3.1)
p
where
h
is
the
Planck's
constant,
p
is
the
electron
momentum,2
and
h
�
6:626
�
10..34Joule
�
second
(1.3.2)
When
an
electron
manifests
as
a
wave,
it
is
described
by
(z)
.
exp(ikz)
(1.3.3)
where
k
=2#=#.
Such
a
wave
is
a
solution
to3
@2
.
=
..k2.
(1.3.4)
@z2
A
generalization
of
this
to
three
dimensions
yields
r2 (r)=
..k2 (r)
(1.3.5)
We
can
de
ne
p
=
~k
(1.3.6)
where
.
=
h=(2#).4
Consequently,
we
arrive
at
an
equation
2
~2
p
..r2 (r)=
(r)
(1.3.7)
2m0
2m0
where
m0
�
9:11
�
10..31kg
(1.3.8)
The
expression
p2=(2m0)
is
the
kinetic
energy
of
an
electron.
Hence,
the
above
can
be
considered
an
energy
conservation
equation.
The
Schrodinger
equation
is
motivated
by
further
energy
balance
that
total
energy
is
equal
to
the
sum
of
potential
energy
and
kinetic
energy.
De
ning
the
potential
energy
to
be
V
(r),
the
energy
balance
equation
becomes
~2
r2
2m0
-
+
V
(r)
(r)=
E (r)
(1.3.9)
2Typical
electron
wavelengths
are
of
the
order
of
nanometers.
Compared
to
400
nm
of
wavelength
of
blue
light,
they
are
much
smaller.
Energetic
electrons
can
have
even
smaller
wavelengths.
Hence,
electron
waves
can
be
used
to
make
electron
microscope
whose
resolution
is
much
higher
than
optical
microscope.
3The
wavefunction
can
be
thought
of
as
a
\halo�
that
an
electron
carries
that
determine
its
underlying
physical
properties
and
how
it
interact
with
other
systems.
4This
is
also
called
Dirac
constant
sometimes.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
where
E
is
the
total
energy
of
the
system.
The
above
is
the
time-independent
Schrodinger
equation.
The
ad
hoc
manner
at
which
the
above
equation
is
arrived
at
usually
bothers
a
beginner
in
the
eld.
However,
it
predicts
many
experimental
outcomes,
as
well
as
predicting
the
existence
of
electron
orbitals
inside
an
atom,
and
how
electron
would
interact
with
other
particles.
One
can
further
modify
the
above
equation
in
an
ad
hoc
manner
by
noticing
that
other
experimental
nding
shows
that
the
energy
of
a
photon
is
E
=
~!.
Hence,
if
we
let
i.
@t
(r,
t)
=
E (r,
t)
(1.3.10)
then
(r,
t)
=
e
..i!t (r,
t)
(1.3.11)
Then
we
arrive
at
the
time-dependent
Schrodinger
equation:
~2
.
..r2
+
V
(r)
(r;t)=
i.
(r;t)
(1.3.12)
2m0
@t
Another
disquieting
fact
about
the
above
equation
is
that
it
is
written
in
complex
functions
and
numbers.
In
our
prior
experience
with
classical
laws,
they
can
all
be
written
in
real
functions
and
numbers.
We
will
later
learn
the
reason
for
this.
Mind
you,
in
the
above,
the
frequency
is
not
unique.
We
know
that
in
classical
physics,
the
potential
V
is
not
unique,
and
we
can
add
a
constant
to
it,
and
yet,
the
physics
of
the
problem
does
not
change.
So,
we
can
add
a
constant
to
both
sides
of
the
time-independent
Schrodinger
equation
(1.3.10),
and
yet,
the
physics
should
not
change.
Then
the
total
E
on
the
right-hand
side
would
change,
and
that
would
change
the
frequency
we
have
arrived
at
in
the
time-dependent
Schrodinger
equation.
We
will
explain
how
to
resolve
this
dilemma
later
on.
Just
like
potentials,
in
quantum
mechanics,
it
is
the
di#erence
of
frequencies
that
matters
in
the
nal
comparison
with
experiments,
not
the
absolute
frequencies.
The
setting
during
which
Schrodinger
equation
was
postulated
was
replete
with
knowledge
of
classical
mechanics.
It
will
be
prudent
to
review
some
classical
mechanics
knowledge
next.
Introduction
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Chapter
2
Classical
Mechanics
2.1
Introduction
Quantum
mechanics
cannot
be
derived
from
classical
mechanics,
but
classical
mechanics
can
inspire
quantum
mechanics.
Quantum
mechanics
is
richer
and
more
sophisticated
than
classical
mechanics.
Quantum
mechanics
was
developed
during
the
period
when
physicists
had
rich
knowledge
of
classical
mechanics.
In
order
to
better
understand
how
quantum
mechanics
was
developed
in
this
environment,
it
is
better
to
understand
some
fundamental
concepts
in
classical
mechanics.
Classical
mechanics
can
be
considered
as
a
special
case
of
quantum
mechanics.
We
will
review
some
classical
mechanics
concepts
here.
In
classical
mechanics,
a
particle
moving
in
the
presence
of
potential1
V
(q)
will
experience
a
force
given
by
dV
(q)
F
(q)=
-
(2.1.1)
dq
where
q
represents
the
coordinate
or
the
position
of
the
particle.
Hence,
the
particle
can
be
described
by
the
equations
of
motion
dp
dV
(q)dq
=
F
(q)=
-
,
=
p=m
(2.1.2)
dt
dq
dt
For
example,
when
a
particle
is
attached
to
a
spring
and
moves
along
a
frictionless
surface,
the
force
the
particle
experiences
is
F
(q)=
..kq
where
k
is
the
spring
constant.
Then
the
equations
of
motion
of
this
particle
are
dp
dq
=
p_=
..kq,
=
q_=
p=m
(2.1.3)
dt
dt
Given
p
and
q
at
some
initial
time
t0,
one
can
integrate
(2.1.2)
or
(2.1.3)
to
obtain
p
and
q
for
all
later
time.
A
numerical
analysist
can
think
of
that
(2.1.2)
or
(2.1.3)
can
be
solved
by
the
1The
potential
here
refers
to
potential
energy.
7
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
qV(q)
q
Figure
2.1:
The
left
side
shows
a
potential
well
in
which
a
particle
can
be
trapped.
The
right
side
shows
a
particle
attached
to
a
spring.
The
particle
is
subject
to
the
force
due
to
the
spring,
but
it
can
also
be
described
by
the
force
due
to
a
potential
well.
nite
di#erence
method,
where
time-stepping
can
be
used
to
nd
p
and
q
for
all
later
time.
For
instance,
we
can
write
the
equations
of
motion
more
compactly
as
dV
=
F(V)
(2.1.4)
dt
where
V
=[p,
q]t,
and
F
is
a
general
vector
function
of
V.
It
can
be
nonlinear
or
linear;
in
the
event
if
it
is
linear,
then
F(V)=
A
�
V.
Using
nite
di#erence
approximation,
we
can
rewrite
the
above
as
V(t
+#t)
-
V(t)=#tF(V(t)),
V(t
+#t)=#tF(V(t))
+
V(t)
(2.1.5)
The
above
can
be
used
for
time
marching
to
derive
the
future
values
of
V
from
past
values.
The
above
equations
of
motion
are
essentially
derived
using
Newton's
law.
However,
there
exist
other
methods
of
deriving
these
equations
of
motion.
Notice
that
only
two
variables
p
and
q
are
su#cient
to
describe
the
state
of
a
particle.
2.2
Lagrangian
Formulation
Another
way
to
derive
the
equations
of
motion
for
classical
mechanics
is
via
the
use
of
the
Lagrangian
and
the
principle
of
least
action.
A
Lagrangian
is
usually
de
ned
as
the
di#erence
between
the
kinetic
energy
and
the
potential
energy,
i.e.,
L(_q,
q)=
T
-
V
(2.2.1)
where
q.
is
the
velocity.
For
a
xed
t,
q
and
q.
are
independent
variables,
since
q.
cannot
be
derived
from
q
if
it
is
only
known
at
one
given
t.
The
equations
of
motion
is
derived
from
the
principle
of
least
action
which
says
that
q(t)
that
satis
es
the
equations
of
motion
between
two
times
t1
and
t2
should
minimize
the
action
integral
.
t2
S
=
L(_q(t);q(t))dt
(2.2.2)
t1
Classical
Mechanics
Assuming
that
q(t1)
and
q(t2)
are
xed,
then
the
function
q(t)
between
t1
and
t2
should
minimize
S,
the
action.
In
other
words,
a
rst
order
perturbation
in
q
from
the
optimal
answer
that
minimizes
S
should
give
rise
to
second
order
error
in
S.
Hence,
taking
the
rst
variation
of
(2.2.2),
we
have
.
.
Z##
t2
t2
t2
@L
@L
#S
=
#L(_q,
q)dt
=
#L(_q,
q)dt
=
#q_+
#q
dt
=
0
(2.2.3)
@q.
@q
t1
t1
t1
In
order
to
take
the
variation
into
the
integrand,
we
have
to
assume
that
#L(_q,
q)
is
taken
with
constant
time.
At
constant
time,
_q
and
q
are
independent
variables;
hence,
the
partial
derivatives
in
the
next
equality
above
follow.
Using
integration
by
parts
on
the
rst
term,
we
have
t2
.
t2
.
t2
@L
d
@L
@L
#S
=
#q
-
#q
dt
+
#q
dt
=
0
(2.2.4)
@q_dt
@q.
@q
t1
t1
t1
The
rst
term
vanishes
because
#q(t1)=
#q(t2)
=
0
because
q(t1)
and
q(t2)
are
xed.
Since
#q(t)
is
arbitrary
between
t1
and
t2,
we
have
d
@L
@L
-
=
0
(2.2.5)
dt
@q.
@q
The
above
is
called
the
Lagrange
equation,
from
which
the
equation
of
motion
of
a
particle
can
be
derived.
The
derivative
of
the
Lagrangian
with
respect
to
the
velocity
_q
is
the
momentum
@L
p
=
(2.2.6)
@q.
The
derivative
of
the
Lagrangian
with
respect
to
the
coordinate
q
is
the
force.
Hence
@L
F
=
(2.2.7)
@q
The
above
equation
of
motion
is
then
p_=
F
(2.2.8)
Equation
(2.2.6)
can
be
inverted
to
express
_q
as
a
function
of
p
and
q,
namely
q_=
f(p,
q)
(2.2.9)
The
above
two
equations
can
be
solved
in
tandem
to
nd
the
time
evolution
of
p
and
q.
For
example,
the
kinetic
energy
T
of
a
particle
is
given
by
T
=
mq_(2.2.10)
2
Then
from
(2.2.1),
and
the
fact
that
V
is
independent
of
_q,
@L
@T
p
===
mq.
(2.2.11)
@q.
@q.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
or
q.
=
(2.2.12)
Also,
from
(2.2.1),
(2.2.7),
and
(2.2.8),
we
have
@V
p_=
-
(2.2.13)
@q
The
above
pair,
(2.2.12)
and
(2.2.13),
form
the
equations
of
motion
for
this
problem.
The
above
can
be
generalized
to
multidimensional
problems.
For
example,
for
a
one
particle
system
in
three
dimensions,
qi
has
three
degrees
of
freedom,
and
i
=1,
2,
3.
(The
qi
can
represent
x,
y,
z
in
Cartesian
coordinates,
but
r,
#,
f
in
spherical
coordinates.)
But
for
N
particles
in
three
dimensions,
there
are
3N
degrees
of
freedom,
and
i
=1;:::,
3N.
The
formulation
can
also
be
applied
to
particles
constraint
in
motion.
For
instance,
for
N
particles
in
three
dimensions,
qi
may
run
from
i
=1;:::,
3N
-
k,
representing
k
constraints
on
the
motion
of
the
particles.
This
can
happen,
for
example,
if
the
particles
are
constraint
to
move
in
a
manifold
(surface),
or
a
line
(ring)
embedded
in
a
three
dimensional
space.
Going
through
similar
derivation,
we
arrive
at
the
equation
of
motion
d
@L
@L
-
=
0
(2.2.14)
dt
@q_i
@qi
In
general,
qi
may
not
have
a
dimension
of
length,
and
it
is
called
the
generalized
coordinate
(also
called
conjugate
coordinate).
Also,
q_i
may
not
have
a
dimension
of
velocity,
and
it
is
called
the
generalized
velocity.
The
derivative
of
the
Lagrangian
with
respect
to
the
generalized
velocity
is
the
generalized
momentum
(also
called
conjugate
momentum),
namely,
@L
pi
=
(2.2.15)
@q_i
The
generalized
momentum
may
not
have
a
dimension
of
momentum.
Hence,
the
equation
of
motion
(2.2.14)
can
be
written
as
@L
p_i
=
(2.2.16)
@qi
Equation
(2.2.15)
can
be
inverted
to
yield
an
equation
for
q_i
as
a
function
of
the
other
variables.
This
equation
can
be
used
in
tandem
(2.2.16)
as
time-marching
equations
of
motion.
2.3
Hamiltonian
Formulation
For
a
multi-dimensional
system,
or
a
many
particle
system
in
multi-dimensions,
the
total
time
derivative
of
L
is
dL
@L
@L
=
q_i
+
qi
(2.3.1)
dt
@qi
@q_i
i
Classical
Mechanics
Since
@L=@qi
=
d
dt
(@L=@q_i)
from
the
Lagrange
equation,
we
have
dL
.
.
d
.
@L
.
@L
.
d
.
.
@L
.
dt
=
i
dt
@q_i
q_i
+
@q_i
qi
=
dt
i
@q_i
q_i
(2.3.2)
or
.
.
d
@L
q_i
-
L
=
0
(2.3.3)
dt
@q_i
The
quantity
@L
H
=
q_i
-
L
(2.3.4)
@q_i
is
known
as
the
Hamiltonian
of
the
system,
and
is
a
constant
of
motion,
namely,
dH=dt
=
0.
As
shall
be
shown,
the
Hamiltonian
represents
the
total
energy
of
a
system.
It
is
a
constant
of
motion
because
of
the
conservation
of
energy.
The
Hamiltonian
of
the
system,
(2.3.4),
can
also
be
written,
after
using
(2.2.15),
as
H
=
q_ipi
-
L
(2.3.5)
i
where
pi
=
@L=@q_i
is
the
generalized
momentum.
The
rst
term
has
a
dimension
of
energy,
and
in
Cartesian
coordinates,
for
a
simple
particle
motion,
it
is
easily
seen
that
it
is
twice
the
kinetic
energy.
Hence,
the
above
indicates
that
the
Hamiltonian
H
=
T
+
V
(2.3.6)
The
total
variation
of
the
Hamiltonian
is
#H
=
#piq_i
-
#L
i
@L
@L
=
(_qi#pi
+
pi#q_i)
-
#qi
+
#q_i
(2.3.7)
@qi
@q_i
ii
Using
(2.2.15)
and
(2.2.16),
we
have
#H
=
(_qi#pi
+
pi#q_i)
-
(_pi#qi
+
pi#q_i)
ii
=
(_qi#pi
-
p_i#qi)
(2.3.8)
i
From
the
above,
we
gather
that
the
Hamiltonian
is
a
function
of
pi
and
qi.
Taking
the
rst
variation
of
the
Hamiltonian
with
respect
to
these
variables,
we
have
@H
@H
#H
=
#pi
+
#qi
(2.3.9)
@pi
@qi
i
12
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Comparing
the
above
with
(2.3.8),
we
gather
that
@H
q_i
=
(2.3.10)
@pi
@H
p_i
=
-
(2.3.11)
@qi
These
are
the
equations
of
motion
known
as
the
Hamiltonian
equations.
The
(2.3.4)
is
also
known
as
the
Legendre
transformation.
The
original
function
L
is
a
function
of
_qi,
qi.
Hence,
#L
depends
on
both
#q_i
and
#qi.
After
the
Legendre
transformation,
#H
depends
on
the
di#erential
#pi
and
#qi
as
indicated
by
(2.3.8).
This
implies
that
H
is
a
function
of
pi
and
qi.
The
equations
of
motion
then
can
be
written
as
in
(2.3.10)
and
(2.3.11).
2.4
More
on
Hamiltonian
The
Hamiltonian
of
a
particle
in
classical
mechanics
is
given
by
(2.3.6),
and
it
is
a
function
of
pi
and
qi.
For
a
non-relativistic
particle
in
three
dimensions,
the
kinetic
energy
p
�
p
T
=
(2.4.1)
2m
and
the
potential
energy
V
is
a
function
of
q.
Hence,
the
Hamiltonian
can
be
expressed
as
p
�
p
H
=+
V
(q)
(2.4.2)
2m
in
three
dimensions.
When
an
electromagnetic
eld
is
present,
the
Hamiltonian
for
an
electron
can
be
derived
by
letting
the
generalized
momentum
pi
=
mq_i
+
eAi
(2.4.3)
where
e
is
the
electron
charge
and
Ai
is
component
of
the
vector
potential
A.
Consequently,
the
Hamiltonian
of
an
electron
in
the
presence
of
an
electromagnetic
eld
is
(p
-
eA)
�
(p
-
eA)
H
=+
e#(q)
(2.4.4)
2m
The
equation
of
motion
of
an
electron
in
an
electromagnetic
eld
is
governed
by
the
Lorentz
force
law,
which
can
be
derived
from
the
above
Hamiltonian
using
the
equations
of
motion
provided
by
(2.3.10)
and
(2.3.11).
2.5
Poisson
Bracket
Yet
another
way
of
expressing
equations
of
motion
in
classical
mechanics
is
via
the
use
of
Poisson
bracket.
This
is
interesting
because
Poisson
bracket
has
a
close
quantum
mechanics
analogue.
A
Poisson
bracket
of
two
scalar
variables
u
and
v
that
are
functions
of
q
and
p
is
de
ned
as
@u
@v
@v
@u
fu,
v}
=
-
(2.5.1)
@q
@p
@q
@p
Classical
Mechanics
In
this
notation,
using
(2.3.10)
and
(2.3.11),
du
@u
dq
@u
dp
@u
@H
@u
@H
=+=
-
dt
@q
dt
@p
dt
@q
@p
@p
@q
=
fu,
H}
(2.5.2)
which
is
valid
for
any
variable
u
that
is
a
function
of
p
and
q.
Hence,
we
have
the
equations
of
motion
as
q_=
fq,
Hg;p_=
fp,
H}
(2.5.3)
in
the
Poisson
bracket
notation.
As
we
shall
see
later,
similar
equations
will
appear
in
quantum
mechanics.
The
algebraic
properties
of
Poisson
bracket
are
fu,
v}
=
..fv,
u}
(2.5.4)
fu
+
v,
w}
=
fu,
w}
+
fv,
w}
(2.5.5)
fuv,
w}
=
fu,
wgv
+
ufv,
w}
(2.5.6)
fu,
vw}
=
fu,
vgw
+
vfu,
w}
(2.5.7)
ffu,
vg;w}
+
ffv,
wg;u}
+
ffw,
ug;v}
=
0
(2.5.8)
These
properties
are
antisymmetry,
distributivity,
associativity
and
Jacobi's
identity.
If
we
de
ne
a
commutator
operation
between
two
noncommuting
operator
^u
and
^v
as
[^u,
^u^v^(2.5.9)
v]=
^v
-
^u,
it
can
be
shown
that
the
above
commutator
have
the
same
algebraic
properties
as
the
Poisson
bracket.
An
operator
in
quantum
mechanics
can
be
a
matrix
operator
or
a
di#erential
operator.
In
general,
operators
do
not
commute
unless
under
very
special
circumstances.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Chapter
3
Quantum
Mechanics|Some
Preliminaries
3.1
Introduction
With
some
background
in
classical
mechanics,
we
may
motivate
the
Schrodinger
equation
in
a
more
sanguine
fashion.
Experimental
evidence
indicated
that
small
particles
such
as
electrons
behave
quite
strangely
and
cannot
be
described
by
classical
mechanics
alone.
In
classical
mechanics,
once
we
know
p
and
q
and
their
time
derivatives
(or
_p,
q_)
of
a
particle
at
time
t0,
one
can
integrate
the
equations
of
motion
p_=
F,
q_=
p=m
(3.1.1)
or
use
the
nite
di#erence
method
to
nd
p
and
q
at
t0
+#t,
and
at
all
subsequent
times.
In
quantum
mechanics,
the
use
of
two
variables
p
and
q
and
their
derivatives
is
insu#cient
to
describe
the
state
of
a
particle
and
derive
its
future
states.
The
state
of
a
particle
has
to
be
more
richly
endowed
and
described
by
a
wavefunction
or
state
function
(q,
t).
The
state
function
(also
known
as
a
state
vector)
is
a
vector
in
the
in
nite
dimensional
space.
At
this
juncture,
the
state
function
or
vector
is
analogous
to
when
we
study
the
control
theory
of
a
highly
complex
system.
In
the
state
variable
approach,
the
state
of
a
control
system
is
described
by
the
state
vector,
whose
elements
are
variables
that
we
think
are
important
to
capture
the
state
of
the
system.
For
example,
the
state
vector
V,
describing
the
state
of
the
factory,
can
contain
variables
that
represent
the
number
of
people
in
a
factory,
the
number
of
machines,
the
temperature
of
the
rooms,
the
inventory
in
each
room,
etc.
The
state
equation
of
this
factory
can
then
be
written
as
V(t)=
A
�
V(t)
(3.1.2)
dt
It
describes
the
time
evolution
of
the
factory.
The
matrix
A
causes
the
coupling
between
state
variables
as
they
evolve.
It
bears
strong
similarity
to
the
time-dependent
Schrodinger
15
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
3.1:
The
state
of
a
particle
in
quantum
mechanics
is
described
by
a
state
function,
which
has
in
nitely
many
degrees
of
freedom.
equation,
which
is
used
to
describe
the
time-evolution
of
the
state
function
or
the
wavefunction
of
an
electron.
In
the
wavefunction,
a
complex
number
is
assigned
to
each
location
in
space.
In
the
Schrodinger
equation,
the
wavefunction
(q,
t)
is
a
continuous
function
of
of
the
position
variable
q
at
any
time
instant
t;
hence,
it
is
described
by
in
nitely
many
numbers,
and
has
in
nite
degrees
of
freedom.
The
time
evolution
of
the
wavefunction
(q,
t)
is
governed
by
the
Schrodinger
equation.
It
was
motivated
by
experimental
evidence
and
the
works
of
many
others
such
as
Planck,
Einstein,
and
de
Broglie,
who
were
aware
of
the
wave
nature
of
a
particle
and
the
dual
wave-particle
nature
of
light.
3.2
Probabilistic
Interpretation
of
the
wavefunction
The
wavefunction
of
the
Schrodinger
equation
has
de
ed
an
acceptable
interpretation
for
many
years
even
though
the
Schrodinger
equation
was
known
to
predict
experimental
outcomes.
Some
thought
that
it
represented
an
electron
cloud,
and
that
perhaps,
an
electron,
at
the
atomistic
level,
behaved
like
a
charge
cloud,
and
hence
not
a
particle.
The
nal,
most
accepted
interpretation
of
this
wavefunction
(one
that
also
agrees
with
experiments)
is
that
its
magnitude
squared
corresponds
to
the
probabilistic
density
function.
In
other
words,
the
probability
of
nding
an
electron
in
an
interval
[x,
x
+#x]
is
equal
to
j (x,
t)j2#x
(3.2.1)
For
the
3D
case,
the
probability
of
nding
an
electron
in
a
small
volume
#V
in
the
vicinity
of
the
point
r
is
given
by
j (r;t)j2#V
(3.2.2)
Since
the
magnitude
squared
of
the
wavefunction
represents
a
probability
density
function,
it
must
satisfy
the
normalization
condition
of
a
probability
density
function,
viz.,
dV
j (r;t)j2
=
1
(3.2.3)
Quantum
Mechanics|Some
Preliminaries
with
its
counterparts
in
1D
and
2D.
The
magnitude
squared
of
this
wavefunction
is
like
some
kind
of
\energy�
that
cannot
be
destroyed.
Electrons
cannot
be
destroyed
and
hence,
charge
conservation
is
upheld
by
the
Schrodinger
equation.
Motivated
by
the
conservation
of
the
\energy�
of
the
wavefunction,
we
shall
consider
an
\energy�
conserving
system
where
the
classical
Hamiltonian
will
be
a
constant
of
motion.
In
this
case,
there
is
no
\energy�
loss
from
the
system.
The
Schrodinger
equation
that
governs
the
time
evolution
of
the
wavefunction
.
is
H.
=
i~(3.2.4)
dt
where
H^
is
the
Hamiltonian
operator.1
One
can
solve
(3.2.4)
formally
to
obtain
..i
(t)=
e
.
^t (t
=
0)
(3.2.5)
Since
the
above
is
a
function
of
an
operator,
it
has
meaning
only
if
this
function
acts
on
the
^
eigenvectors
of
the
operator
H.
It
can
be
shown
easily
that
if
A
�
Vi
=
#iVi,
exp(A)
�
Vi
=
exp(#i)Vi
(3.2.6)
If
H
is
a
Hermitian
operator,
then
there
exists
eigenfunctions,
or
special
wavefunctions,
n,
such
that
^
H n
=
En n
(3.2.7)
where
En
is
purely
real.
In
this
case,
the
time
evolution
of
n
from
(3.2.5)
is
..i
En
..i!nt n
n(t)=
e
.
t n(t
=
0)
=
e
(t
=
0)
(3.2.8)
In
the
above,
En
=
~!n,
or
the
energy
En
is
related
to
frequency
!n
via
the
reduced
Planck
constant
~.
The
reduced
Planck
constant
is
related
to
the
Planck
constant
by
.
=
h=(2#)
and
h
=6:626068
�
10..34
J
s.
Scalar
variables
that
are
measurable
in
classical
mechanics,
such
as
p
and
q,
are
known
as
observables
in
quantum
mechanics.
They
are
elevated
from
scalar
variables
to
operators
in
quantum
mechanics,
denoted
by
a
\^�
symbol
here.
In
classical
mechanics,
for
a
one
particle
system,
the
Hamiltonian
is
given
by
H
=
T
+
V
=+
V
(3.2.9)
2m
The
Hamiltonian
contains
the
information
from
which
the
equations
of
motion
for
the
particle
can
be
derived.
But
in
quantum
mechanics,
this
is
not
su#cient,
and
H
becomes
an
operator
p^
^+^
H
=
V
(3.2.10)
2m
1Rightfully,
one
should
use
the
bra
and
ket
notation
to
write
this
equation
as
H^
j .
=
i.
j i.
In
the
less
dt
rigorous
notation
in
(3.2.4),
we
will
assume
that
H
is
in
the
representation
in
which
the
state
vector
.
is
in.
That
is
if
.
is
in
coordinate
space
representation,
H
is
also
in
coordinates
space
representation.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
This
operator
works
in
tandem
with
a
wavefunction
.
to
describe
the
state
of
the
particle.
The
operator
acts
on
a
wavefunction
(t),
where
in
the
coordinate
q
representation,
is
(q,
t).
When
(q,
t)
is
an
eigenfunction
with
energy
En,
it
can
be
expressed
as
..i!nt
n(q,
t)=
n(q)e
(3.2.11)
where
En
=
~!n.
The
Schrodinger
equation
for
n(q)
then
becomes2
p^
H n(q)=
+
V^ n(q)=
En n(q)
(3.2.12)
2m
For
simplicity,
we
consider
an
electron
moving
in
free
space
where
it
has
only
a
constant
kinetic
energy
but
not
inuenced
by
any
potential
energy.
In
other
words,
there
is
no
force
acting
on
the
electron.
In
this
case,
V^=
0,
and
this
equation
becomes
p^
n(q)=
En n(q)
(3.2.13)
2m
It
has
been
observed
by
de
Broglie
that
the
momentum
of
a
particle,
such
as
an
electron
which
behaves
like
a
wave,
has
a
momentum
p
=
~k
(3.2.14)
where
k
=2#=.
is
the
wavenumber
of
the
wavefunction.
This
motivates
that
the
operator
^p
can
be
expressed
by
p^=
..i.
(3.2.15)
dq
in
the
coordinate
space
representation.
This
is
chosen
so
that
if
an
electron
is
described
by
a
state
function
(q)=
c1eikq,
then
^p (q)=
~k (q).
The
above
motivation
for
the
form
of
the
operator
^p
is
highly
heuristic.
We
will
see
other
reasons
for
the
form
of
^p
when
we
study
the
correspondence
principle
and
the
Heisenberg
picture.
Equation
(3.2.13)
for
a
free
particle
is
then
~2
d2
-
n(q)=
En n(q)
(3.2.16)
2m
dq2
Since
this
is
a
constant
coe#cient
ordinary
di#erential
equation,
the
solution
is
of
the
form
n(q)
=
e
#ikq
(3.2.17)
which
when
used
in
(3.2.16),
yields
~2k2
2m
=
En
(3.2.18)
Namely,
the
kinetic
energy
T
of
the
particle
is
given
by
~2k2
T
=
2m
(3.2.19)
2Forn
the
Schrodinger
equation
in
coordinate
space,
^V
turns
out
to
be
a
scalar
operator.
Quantum
Mechanics|Some
Preliminaries
where
p
=
~k
is
in
agreement
with
de
Broglie's
nding.
In
many
problems,
the
operator
V^is
a
scalar
operator
in
coordinate
space
representation
which
is
a
scalar
function
of
position
V
(q).
This
potential
traps
the
particle
within
it
acting
as
a
potential
well.
In
general,
the
Schrodinger
equation
for
a
particle
becomes
~2
@2
.
-
+
V
(q)
(q,
t)=
i.
(q,
t)
(3.2.20)
2m
@q2
@t
For
a
particular
eigenstate
with
energy
En
as
indicated
by
(3.2.11),
it
becomes
~2
d2
-
+
V
(q)
n(q)=
En n(q)
(3.2.21)
2m
dq2
The
above
is
an
eigenvalue
problem
with
eigenvalue
En
and
eigenfunction
n(q).
These
eigenstates
are
also
known
as
stationary
states,
because
they
have
a
time
dependence
indicated
by
(3.2.11).
Hence,
their
probability
density
functions
j n(q,
t)j2
are
time
independent.
These
eigenfunctions
correspond
to
trapped
modes
in
the
potential
well
de
ned
by
V
(q)
very
much
like
trapped
guided
modes
in
a
dielectric
waveguide.
These
modes
are
usually
countable
and
they
can
be
indexed
by
the
index
n.
In
the
special
case
of
a
particle
in
free
space,
or
the
absence
of
the
potential
well,
the
particle
or
electron
is
not
trapped
and
it
is
free
to
assume
any
energy
or
momentum
indexed
by
the
continuous
variable
k.
In
(3.2.18),
the
index
for
the
energy
should
rightfully
be
k
and
the
eigenfunctions
are
uncountably
in
nite.
Moreover,
the
above
can
be
generalized
to
two
and
three
dimensional
cases.
3.3
Simple
Examples
of
Time
Independent
Schrodinger
Equation
At
this
juncture,
we
have
enough
knowledge
to
study
some
simple
solutions
of
time-independent
Schrodinger
equation
such
as
a
particle
in
a
box,
a
particle
impinging
on
a
potential
barrier,
and
a
particle
in
a
nite
potential
well.
3.3.1
Particle
in
a
1D
Box
Consider
the
Schrodinger
equation
for
the
1D
case
where
the
potential
V
(x)
is
de
ned
to
be
a
function
with
zero
value
for
0
<x<a
(inside
the
box)
and
in
nite
value
outside
this
range.
The
Schrodinger
equation
is
given
by
~2
d2
-
+
V
(x)
(x)=
E (x)
(3.3.1)
2m
dx2
where
we
have
replaced
q
with
x.
Since
V
(x)
is
in
nite
outside
the
box,
(x)
has
to
be
zero.
Inside
the
well,
V
(x)
=
0
and
the
above
equation
has
a
general
solution
of
the
form
(x)=
A
sin(kx)+
B
cos(kx)
(3.3.2)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
The
boundary
conditions
are
that
(x
=0)=0
and
(x
=
a)
=
0.
For
this
reason,
a
viable
solution
for
(x)
is
(x)=
A
sin(kx)
(3.3.3)
where
k
=
n#=a,
n
=1;:::,
1.
There
are
in
nitely
many
eigensolutions
for
this
problem.
For
each
chosen
n,
the
corresponding
energy
of
the
solution
is
(~n#=a)2
En
=
(3.3.4)
2m
These
energy
values
are
the
eigenvalues
of
the
problem,
with
the
corresponding
eigenfunctions
given
by
(3.3.3)
with
the
appropriate
k.
It
is
seen
that
the
more
energetic
the
electron
is
(high
En
values),
the
larger
the
number
of
oscillations
the
wavefunction
has
inside
the
box.
The
solutions
that
are
highly
oscillatory
have
higher
k
values,
and
hence,
higher
momentum
or
higher
kinetic
energy.
The
solutions
which
are
even
about
the
center
of
the
box
are
said
to
have
even
parity,
while
those
that
are
odd
have
odd
parity.
One
other
thing
to
be
noted
is
that
the
magnitude
squared
of
the
wavefunction
above
represents
the
probability
density
function.
Hence,
it
has
to
be
normalized.
The
normalized
version
of
the
wavefunction
is
(x)=
2=a
sin(n#x=a)
(3.3.5)
Moreover,
these
eigenfunctions
are
orthonormal
to
each
other,
viz.,
a
dx.
*
(x) m(x)=
#nm
(3.3.6)
n
The
orthogonality
is
the
generalization
of
the
fact
that
for
a
Hermitian
matrix
system,
where
the
eigenvectors
are
given
by
H
�
Vi
=
#iVi
(3.3.7)
then
it
can
be
proven
easily
that
V�
j
�
Vi
=
Cj
#ij
(3.3.8)
Moreover,
the
eigenvalues
are
real.
Figure
3.2:
The
wavefunctions
of
an
electron
trapped
in
a
1D
box
(from
DAB
Miller).
Quantum
Mechanics|Some
Preliminaries
3.3.2
Particle
Scattering
by
a
Barrier
In
the
previous
example,
it
is
manifestly
an
eigenvalue
problem
since
the
solution
can
be
found
only
at
discrete
values
of
En.
The
electron
is
trapped
inside
the
box.
However,
in
an
open
region
problem
where
the
electron
is
free
to
roam,
the
energy
of
the
electron
E
can
be
arbitrary.
We
can
assume
that
the
potential
pro
le
is
such
that
V
(x)=0
for
x<
0
while
V
(x)=
V0
for
x>
0.
The
energy
of
the
electron
is
such
that
0
<E<V0.
On
the
left
side,
we
assume
an
electron
coming
in
from
..8
with
the
wavefunction
described
by
A
exp(ik1x).
When
this
wavefunction
hits
the
potential
barrier,
a
reected
wave
will
be
present,
and
the
general
solution
on
the
left
side
of
the
barrier
is
given
by
ik1x
..ik1x
1(x)=
A1e
+
B1e
(3.3.9)
where
(~k1)2=(2m)=
E
is
the
kinetic
energy
of
the
incident
electron.
On
the
right
side,
however,
the
Schrodinger
equation
to
be
satis
ed
is
~2
d2
2(x)=(E
-
V0) 2(x)
(3.3.10)
2m
dx2
The
solution
of
the
transmitted
wave
on
the
right
is
2(x)=
A2e
ik2x
(3.3.11)
where
k2
=2m(E
-
V0)=.
(3.3.12)
Given
the
known
incident
wave
amplitude
A1,
we
can
match
the
boundary
conditions
at
x
=0
to
nd
the
reected
wave
amplitude
B1
and
the
transmitted
wave
amplitude
A2.
By
eyeballing
the
Schrodinger
equation
(3.3.1),
we
can
arrive
at
the
requisite
boundary
conditions
are
that
.
and
@ =@x
are
continuous
at
x
=
0.
Since
E<V0,
k2
is
pure
imaginary,
and
the
wave
is
evanescent
and
decays
when
x
!1.
This
e#ect
is
known
as
tunneling.
The
electron
as
a
nonzero
probability
of
being
found
inside
the
barrier,
albeit
with
decreasing
probability
into
the
barrier.
The
larger
V0
is
compared
to
E,
the
more
rapidly
decaying
is
the
wavefunction
into
the
barrier.
However,
if
the
electron
is
energetic
enough
so
that
E>V0,
k2
becomes
real,
and
then
the
wavefunction
is
no
more
evanescent.
It
penetrates
into
the
barrier;
it
can
be
found
even
a
long
way
from
the
boundary.
It
is
to
be
noted
that
the
wavefunction
in
this
case
cannot
be
normalized
as
the
above
represents
a
ctitious
situation
of
an
electron
roaming
over
in
nite
space.
The
above
example
illustrates
the
wave
physics
at
the
barrier.
3.3.3
Particle
in
a
Potential
Well
If
the
potential
pro
le
is
such
that
V
(x)=
.
>.
>.
V1
if
x<
..a=2,
region
1
V2
=0
if
jx|
<
a=2,
region
2
(3.3.13)
V3
if
x
>
a=2,
region
3
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
3.3:
Scattering
of
the
electron
wavefunction
by
a
1D
barrier
(from
DAB
Miller).
then
there
can
be
trapped
modes
(or
states)
inside
the
well
represented
by
standing
waves,
whereas
outside
the
well,
the
waves
are
evanescent
for
eigenmodes
for
which
E<V1
and
E<V3.
The
wavefunction
for
jx|
<
a=2
can
be
expressed
as
2(x)=
A2
sin(k2x)+
B2
cos(k2x)
(3.3.14)
where
k2
=2mE=~.
In
region
1
to
the
left,
the
wavefunction
is
1(x)=
A1e
#1x
(3.3.15)
where
#1
=2m(V1
-
E)=~.
The
wave
has
to
decay
in
the
left
direction.
Similar,
in
region
3
to
the
right,
the
wavefunction
is
3(x)=
B3e
..#3x
(3.3.16)
where
#3
=2m(V3
-
E)=~.
It
has
to
decay
in
the
right
direction.
Four
boundary
conditions
can
be
imposed
at
x
=
#a=2
to
eliminate
the
four
unknowns
A1,
A2,
B2,
and
B3.
However,
non-trivial
eigensolutions
can
only
exist
at
selected
values
of
E
which
are
the
eigenvalues
of
the
Schrodinger
equation.
The
eigenequation
from
which
the
eigenvalues
can
be
derived
is
a
transcendental
equation.
To
illustrate
this
point,
we
impose
that
.
is
continuous
at
x
=
#a=2
to
arrive
at
the
following
two
equations:
..#1a=2
A1e
=
..A2
sin(k2a=2)
+
B2
cos(k2a=2)
(3.3.17)
..#3a=2
A3e
=
A2
sin(k2a=2)
+
B2
cos(k2a=2)
(3.3.18)
We
further
impose
that
@ =@x
is
continuous
at
x
=
#a
to
arrive
at
the
following
two
equations:
..#1a=2
#1A1e
=
k2A2
cos(k2a=2)
+
k2B2
sin(k2a=2)
(3.3.19)
..#3a=2
..#3A3e
=
k2A2
cos(k2a=2)
-
k2B2
sin(k2a=2)
(3.3.20)
Quantum
Mechanics|Some
Preliminaries
23
The
above
four
equations
form
a
matrix
equation
M
�
V
=
0
(3.3.21)
where
V
=[A1;A2;B2;B3]t,
and
the
elements
of
M,
which
depend
on
E,
can
be
gleaned
off
the
above
equations.
Non-trivial
solutions
exists
for
V
only
if
det(M(E))
=
jM(E)|
=
0
(3.3.22)
The
above
is
the
transcendental
eigenequation
from
which
the
eigenvalues
E
can
be
derived.
The
nontrivial
solutions
for
V
are
in
the
null
space
of
M.
Having
known
V
=[A1;A2;B2;B3]t
,
the
eigenfunctions
of
the
Schrodinger
equation
can
be
constructed.
Notice
that
V
is
known
to
an
arbitrary
multiplicative
constant.
The
normalization
of
the
eigenfunction
will
pin
down
the
value
of
this
constant.
When
the
potential
well
is
symmetric
such
that
V1
=
V3
=
V0,
then
the
solutions
can
be
decomposed
into
odd
and
even
solutions
about
x
=
0.
In
this
case,
either
A2
=
0
for
even
modes,
or
B2
=
0
for
odd
modes.
Furthermore,
A1
=
#B3
for
these
modes.
The
problem
then
has
two
unknowns,
and
two
boundary
conditions
at
one
of
the
interfaces
su#ce
to
deduce
the
eigenequation.
The
above
problem
is
analogous
to
the
1D
dielectric
waveguide
problem
in
classical
electromagnetics.
The
plot
of
the
eigenmodes
and
their
energy
levels
are
shown
in
Figure
3.4.
It
is
an
interesting
example
showing
that
a
trapped
electron
exists
with
di#erent
energy
levels.
The
more
energetic
the
electron
is,
the
higher
the
energy
level.
For
the
case
when
E>V0,
the
wavefunction
is
not
evanescent
outside
the
well,
and
the
electron
is
free
to
roam
outside
the
well.
Modern
technology
has
allowed
the
engineering
of
nano-structures
so
small
that
a
quantum
well
can
be
fabricated.
Quantum
well
technology
is
one
of
the
emerging
nano-technologies.
The
energy
level
of
a
quantum
well
can
also
be
engineered
so
that
laser
technology
of
di#erent
wavelengths
can
be
fabricated.
In
the
case
of
a
hydrogen
atom,
the
Coulomb
potential
around
the
proton
at
the
nucleus
yields
a
potential
well
described
by
..q2=(#4#r).
This
well
can
trap
an
electron
into
various
eigenstates,
yielding
di#erent
electronic
orbitals.
The
Schrodinger
equation
has
predicted
the
energy
levels
of
a
hydrogen
atom
with
great
success.
3.4
The
Quantum
Harmonic
Oscillator
The
pendulum,
a
particle
attached
to
a
spring,
or
many
vibrations
in
atoms
and
molecules
can
be
described
as
a
harmonic
oscillator.
Hence,
the
harmonic
oscillator
is
one
of
the
most
important
examples
in
quantum
mechanics.
Its
quantum
mechanical
version
can
be
described
by
the
1D
Schrodinger
equation.
The
classical
equation
for
a
harmonic
oscillator
is
given
by
dd2
t2
=
..!2
z
(3.4.1)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
3.4:
Trapped
modes
representing
the
electron
wavefunctions
inside
a
1D
potential
well
(from
DAB
Miller).
where
.
=
K=m
where
K
is
the
spring
constant,
and
m
is
the
mass
of
the
particle.
The
potential
energy
of
a
particle
attached
to
a
spring
is
given
by
2
V
(z)=
1
m!2
z
(3.4.2)
Consequently,
the
above
potential
energy
can
be
used
in
the
Schrodinger
equation
to
describe
the
trapping
of
wave
modes.
The
kinetic
energy
of
the
particle
is
described
by
a
term
proportional
to
the
square
of
the
momentum
operator.
Hence,
the
corresponding
1D
Schrodinger
equation
is
~2
d2
-
+
1
m!2
z n(z)=
En n(z)
(3.4.3)
2m
dz2
2
with
a
parabolic
potential
well.
It
turns
out
that
this
equation
has
closed-form
solutions,
yielding
the
wavefunction
for
an
eigenstate
given
by
1
m.
-
m.
m.
n(z)=
e
2.
z
Hn
z
(3.4.4)
2nn!
#~.
where
Hn(x)
is
a
Hermite
polynomial,
and
the
wavefunction
is
Gaussian
tapered.
The
energy
of
the
eigenstate
is
given
by
En
=
n
+
~.
(3.4.5)
The
energy
levels
are
equally
spaced
~.
apart.
Even
the
lowest
energy
state,
the
ground
state,
has
a
nonzero
energy
of
~!=2.
The
higher
energy
states
correspond
to
larger
amplitudes
of
oscillation,
and
vice
versa
for
the
lower
energy
states.
In
order
to
kick
the
quantum
harmonic
oscillator
from
the
low
energy
state
to
a
level
above,
it
needs
a
packet
of
energy
of
~!,
the
quantization
energy
of
a
photon.
The
physics
of
quantized
electromagnetic
oscillations
(photons)
and
quantized
mechanical
oscillations
(phonons)
is
intimately
related
to
the
quantum
harmonic
oscillator.
Quantum
Mechanics|Some
Preliminaries
Figure
3.5:
Sketch
of
the
eigenstates,
energy
levels,
and
the
potential
well
of
a
quantum
harmonic
oscillator
(picture
from
DAB
Miller).
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Chapter
4
Time-Dependent
Schrodinger
Equation
4.1
Introduction
Each
eigenstate
of
Schrodinger
equation
has
its
own
time
dependence
of
exp(..i!nt).
When
we
consider
one
eigenstate
alone,
its
time
dependence
is
unimportant,
as
the
time
dependence
disappears
when
we
convert
the
wavefunction
into
a
probability
density
function
by
taking
its
amplitude
square.
Moreover,
the
absolute
frequency
of
an
eigenstate
is
arbitrary.
Hence,
the
probability
density
function
is
quite
uninteresting.
This
is
an
antithesis
to
the
classical
harmonic
oscillator
where
the
position
of
the
particle
moves
with
respect
to
time.
However,
when
a
quantum
state
is
described
by
a
wavefunction
which
is
a
linear
superposition
of
two
eigenstates,
it
is
important
that
we
take
into
account
their
individual
frequency
value
and
time
dependence.
The
two
eigenstates
will
\beat�
with
each
other
to
produce
a
di#erence
in
frequencies
when
we
take
the
amplitude
square
of
the
wavefunction.
4.2
Quantum
States
in
the
Time
Domain
Consider
a
quantum
state
which
is
a
linear
superposition
of
two
eigenstates
(r;t)=
cae
(r)+
cbe
(4.2.1)
where
ca
and
cb
are
properly
chosen
to
normalize
the
corresponding
probability
density
function.
Then
the
probability
function
is
#..i(!a..!b)t
j (r;t)j2
=
jcaj2j a(r)j2
+
jcbj2j b(r)j2
+2<ecacb
a(r) b
*
(r)e
(4.2.2)
It
is
clearly
time
varying.
We
are
seeing
the
motion
of
the
particle
through
the
potential
well.
27
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
4.1:
The
time
evolution
of
the
linear
superposition
of
the
rst
two
eigenstates
of
the
simple
quantum
harmonic
oscillator.
(i)
Beginning
of
a
period
(solid
line).
(ii)
One
quarter
and
three
quarters
way
through
the
period
(dotted
line).
(iii)
Half
way
through
the
period
(picture
from
DAB
Miller).
4.3
Coherent
State
The
eigenstates
of
a
quantum
harmonic
oscillator
do
not
resemble
its
classical
state.
In
order
to
see
the
classical
state
emerging
from
the
quantum
harmonic
oscillator
eigenstates,
we
need
to
take
a
judicious
linear
superposition
of
them.
Such
a
state
is
called
the
coherent
state.1
The
coherent
state
is
given
by
..i(n+1=2)!t n
N
(#,
t)=
cNne
(#)
(4.3.1)
n=0
where
.
=
m!=~z,
and
cNn
=
Nne..N
=n!.2
It
forms
a
wave
packet
that
emulates
the
motion
of
the
classical
harmonic
oscillators
such
as
a
pendulum.
The
total
energy
of
this
wave
packet
is
given
by
(N
+1=2)~!.
The
larger
N
is,
the
more
energy
the
particle
has,
and
the
closer
is
the
coherent
state
to
a
classical
state.
When
a
particle
is
traveling
in
vacuum,
it
should
be
described
by
a
localized
wavefunction,
such
as
a
Gaussian
wave
packet.
The
study
of
the
Gaussian
wave
packet
is
given
in
Appendix
C.
It
can
be
seen
that
the
classical
limit
emerges
when
the
momentum
of
the
particle
becomes
very
large.
1The
state
was
derived
by
R.
Glauber
who
won
the
Nobel
Prize
in
2005
for
his
contribution.
..j#j2=2
#n
2The
coe#cient
is
also
written
as
ev
where
N
=
j#j2
.
n!
Time-Dependent
Schr
odinger
Equation
Figure
4.2:
Coherent
state
for
di#erent
values
of
N
(picture
from
DAB
Miller).
4.4
Measurement
Hypothesis
and
Expectation
Value
The
wavefunction
of
a
quantum
system
can
be
written
as
a
linear
superposition
of
the
stationary
states
(r;t)=
cn(t) n(r)
(4.4.1)
n
The
amplitude
square
of
this
wavefunction
should
integrate
to
one
due
to
its
probabilistic
interpretation.
In
other
words,
j (r;t)j2dr
=
cn(t) n(r)
cn.
(t) n*
.
(r)
=
1
(4.4.2)
V
Vnn.
Exchanging
the
order
of
integration
and
summations,
we
arrive
at
j (r;t)j2dr
=
cn(t)cn.
(t)
n(r) n*
.
(r)
(4.4.3)
V
.
V
nn
Using
the
orthonormality
of
the
eigenstates,
viz.,
n(r) n*
.
(r)=
#nn.
,
we
arrive
at
the
fact
that
jcn(t)j2
=
1
(4.4.4)
n
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Since
the
amplitude
squares
add
up
to
one,
they
can
be
assigned
probabilistic
interpretation
as
well.
Hence,
Pn
=
jcn(t)j2
represents
the
probability
of
nding
the
electron
in
eigenstate
n.
The
quantum
measurement
hypothesis
states
that
before
the
measurement,
the
electron
lives
as
a
linear
superposition
of
di#erent
eigenstates.
After
the
measurement,
the
electron
collapses
into
one
of
the
eigenstates,
say
the
n
eigenstate,
with
probability
proportional
to
jcn(t)j2
.
The
above
can
go
further
by
saying
that
an
electron
is
described
by
a
wavefunction
where
its
position
is
indeterminate:
it
can
be
found
any
place
where
the
wavefunction
is
nonzero.
Its
probability
of
being
found
is
proportional
to
the
amplitude
square
of
the
wavefunction.
However,
once
the
measurement
is
made
to
determine
the
location
of
the
electron,
the
electron's
position
collapses
to
one
location
as
is
discovered
by
the
experiment.
Its
position
is
determinate
after
the
measurement.
Due
to
this
probabilistic
interpretation,
the
expected
energy
of
the
quantum
system
is
given
by
hE.
=
EnPn
=
Enjcn(t)j2
(4.4.5)
nn
..i!nt
The
above
is
the
expectation
value
of
E.
Notice
that
for
the
eigenstate
cn(t)
.
eand
hence,
jcn(t)j2
is
time
independent.
The
above
expectation
of
the
energy
is
a
constant.
This
means
that
the
quantum
system
is
energy
conserving,
namely,
it
cannot
lose
energy,
for
instance,
due
to
radiation.
This
is
because
this
is
an
isolated
quantum
system.
In
order
for
this
system
to
lose
energy,
it
has
to
be
coupled
with
other
quantum
systems,
which
is
a
subject
of
later
study.
For
the
coherent
state,
the
expectation
value
of
E
is
.
..N
Nn
hE.
=
En
(4.4.6)
n!
n=0
.
..N
Nn
=
~!n
+
(4.4.7)
1e~.
n!2
n=0
1
=
N
+
~.
(4.4.8)
Hence,
the
energy
of
the
coherent
state
is
that
of
N
photons.
The
larger
N
is,
the
closer
it
is
to
a
classical
state.
The
above
expected
energy
value
can
also
be
found
by
taking
the
expectation
of
the
Hamiltonian
operator,
viz.,
dr.
*
(r)^
hE.
=
H (r)
(4.4.9)
The
above
equality
can
be
easily
shown
by
substituting
(4.4.1)
into
the
right-hand
side
and
making
use
of
the
fact
that
n(r)
is
the
eigenfunction
of
the
Hamiltonian
operator
~2
^r2
H
=
-
+
V
(r)
(4.4.10)
2m
Time-Dependent
Schr
odinger
Equation
In
general,
a
quantity
that
is
measurable,
like
the
energy
E,
is
replaced
by
an
operator
H
in
quantum
mechanics.
Such
operators
are
called
observables,
such
as
momentum,
position,
etc.
The
relation
between
the
classical
value
of
an
observable
and
its
quantum
mechanical
counterpart,
the
operator,
is
via
the
expectation
relation,
viz.,
^dr.
*
(r)^
A
=
A (r)
(4.4.11)
The
above
reduces
to
a
scalar
number.
It
is
also
the
bridge
between
classical
quantities
and
quantum
mechanical
entities.
4.4.1
Time
Evolution
of
the
Hamiltonian
Operator
The
Schrodinger
equation
can
be
written
as
d (r,
t)
dt
=
-
i
^H
.
(r,
t)
(4.4.12)
Assuming
that
^H
is
a
constant
(which
is
not),
we
can
integrate
the
above
to
yield
(r,
t)
=
e
-
i
^H
.
(r,
t
=
0)
(4.4.13)
The
above
is
a
function
of
an
operator
which
is
also
an
operator.
A
function
of
an
operator
has
meaning
only
when
it
acts
on
the
eigenvectors
of
the
operator.
For
example,
we
have
a
polynomial
function
23
f(x)=
a0
+
a1x
+
a2x
+
a3x
+
##�
(4.4.14)
If
A
is
an
operator,
say
a
matrix
operator,
then
the
function
of
an
operator
is
de
ned
to
be
23
f(A)=
a0I
+
a1A
+
a2A
+
a3A
+
##�
(4.4.15)
which
is
itself
an
operator
as
is
obvious
from
the
above
de
nition.
When
the
above
acts
on
an
eigenvector
of
A
such
that
A
�
vi
=
#ivi,
then
f(A)
�
vi
=
a0vi
+
a1A
�
vi
+
a2A
�
vi
+
a3A3
�
vi
+
##�
(4.4.16)
=
a0
+
a1#i
+
a2#i
2
+
a3#3
i
+
##�
�
vi
(4.4.17)
=
f(#i)vi
(4.4.18)
The
idea
can
be
extended
to
operators
of
in
nite
dimensions
if
we
know
the
eigenfunctions
of
^
the
operator.
If
the
eigenfunction
n(r;t)
is
such
that
H n(r;t)=
En n(r;t)
then
(4.4.13)
becomes
-
i
^-
iEn
n(r;t)=
e
.
t n(r;t
=
0)
=
e
.
t n(r;t
=
0)
(4.4.19)
The
above
is
a
solution
to
(4.4.12).
When
we
write
(r;t
=
0)
=
cn n(r;t
=
0)
(4.4.20)
n
32
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
H
-
iEn
-
i
^
(r;t)=
e
.
t (r;t
=
0)
=
cne
t n(r;t
=
0)
(4.4.21)
It
can
be
easily
shown
that
the
above,
which
is
derived
from
(4.4.13)
is
a
solution
to
(4.4.12).
Hence,
(4.4.13)
is
the
formal
solution
to
(4.4.12).
4.4.2
Uncertainty
Principle
The
uncertainty
principle
is
asserted
by
the
fact
that
Fourier
transform
of
a
Gaussian
function
is
another
Gaussian
function.
For
instance,
if
we
have
a
wave
packet
that
is
formed
by
superposing
waves
with
di#erent
k
or
momentum,
we
can
express
it
as
.
8
~ikzdk
(z)=
(k)e
(4.4.22)
..8
where
~2#k
)2
(k)=
Ce..(
k..k0
(4.4.23)
The
above
represents
a
Gaussian-tapered
function
with
a
spread
of
wavenumbers
centered
around
k
=
k0.
It
can
be
Fourier
transformed
in
closed
form
yielding
that3
(z)=
De..(#k)22
(4.4.24)
The
probability
density
functions
are
proportional
to
the
amplitude
square
of
the
above.
The
rst
pulse
has
a
standard
deviation
of
#k
while
the
standard
deviation
of
the
second
pulse
is
#z
=1=(2#k).
The
product
of
these
two
standard
deviations
yields
#k#z
=
(4.4.25)
2
or
#p#z
=
(4.4.26)
4.4.3
Particle
Current
It
turns
out
that
even
though
the
state
of
an
electron
is
de
ned
by
a
wavefunction,
other
equations
do
not
see
this
wavefunction.
For
instance,
Maxwell's
equations,
will
produce
electric
eld
from
sources,
but
they
will
only
produce
the
electric
eld
from
the
charge
cloud
and
the
current
produced
by
the
charge
cloud.
We
see
that
for
stationary
states
of
a
trapped
electron
in
a
potential
well,
the
charge
cloud
is
static.
Hence,
it
will
not
radiate
according
to
electromagnetic
theory.
This
resolves
the
conict
in
early
days
as
to
why
the
electron,
supposedly
\orbiting�
around
the
nucleus
of
an
atom,
does
not
radiate.
3The
Fourier
transform
of
a
Gaussian
is
a
Gaussian:
it
can
be
proved
by
using
the
identity
that
.
8
2
v
.
8
2
.
8
2
I
=
dxe..x
=
#.
This
can
be
proved
by
noticing
that
I2
=
dxe..x
dye..y
=
..8
..1..1
R.
8
2+y
.
1
dxdye..(x
2)
=2p
#d#e..#2
=
#.
The
last
integral
can
be
integrated
in
closed
form.
..8
0
Time-Dependent
Schr
odinger
Equation
However,
when
an
electron
is
in
more
than
one
stationary
state,
the
charge
cloud
is
time
varying,
and
can
potentially
couple
to
an
external
electric
eld
and
radiate.4
For
conservation
of
charge,
we
have
the
relation
that
@#p
=
...
�
Jp
(4.4.27)
@t
where
#p
is
the
particle
density,
and
Jp
is
the
particle
current
density.
The
particle
density
#p(r;t)=
j (r;t)j2
.
We
can
take
the
time
derivative
of
#p
to
yield
.
@ #(r;t)
@ (r;t)
[.
*
(r;t) (r;t)]
=
(r;t)+
.
*
(r;t)
(4.4.28)
@t
@t
@t
We
can
use
Schrodinger
equation
to
replace
the
time
derivatives
on
the
right-hand
side
to
get
.
*
^H
*
.
#
.
[.
*
(r;t) (r;t)]
=
-
i
H.
-
.
^(4.4.29)
@t
.
Substituting
in
for
the
de
nition
of
the
Hamiltonian
operator,
we
have
further
that
@i.
...
[.
*
(r;t) (r;t)]
=
.
*
r2.
-
r2.
#(4.4.30)
@t
2m
.
[.
*
(r;t) (r;t)]
=
-
i.
r�
( r.
*
-
.
*
r )
(4.4.31)
@t
2m
Hence,
we
can
de
ne
the
particle
current
as
Jp
=
i.
( r.
*
-
.
*
r )
(4.4.32)
2m
When
a
stationary
eigenstate
is
substituted
into
the
above,
due
to
the
product
of
the
function
and
its
complex
conjugate
above,
the
particle
current
becomes
time
independent.
Hence,
stationary
states
can
only
give
rise
to
non-time-varying
current
(static
or
DC
current),
and
such
current
does
not
radiate
according
to
electromagnetic
theory.
4We
will
learn
how
to
treat
such
coupling
later
on.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Chapter
5
Mathematical
Preliminaries
5.1
A
Function
is
a
Vector
A
function
is
actually
an
equivalence
of
a
vector.
In
linear
algebra,
we
denote
a
vector
as
v
=[v1;v2;v3;:::vN
]t
.
A
short-hand
notation
for
this
vector
is
vj
where
j
=1;:::;N.
But
for
a
function
f(x),
the
countably
nite
index
j
in
vj
is
now
replaced
by
an
uncountably
in
nite
(nondenumerable)
set
of
indices
denoted
by
x.
Hence,
we
can
think
of
f(x)
as
a
vector
in
an
in
nite
dimensional
vector
space.
An
inner
product
in
linear
algebra
is
written
as
V�
�
U
=
Vj
*
Uj
(5.1.1)
j=1
The
analogue
of
the
above
for
functions
is
.
8
hfjg.
=
dxf(x)
*
g(x)
(5.1.2)
..8
The
above
is
the
inner
product
between
two
functions
which
are
actually
vectors.1
The
left-
hand
side
is
the
compact
notation
for
the
inner
product
between
two
state
vectors
known
as
Dirac's
bra-ket
notation.
The
hf|
is
the
\bra�
while
jg.
is
the
\ket".
The
\bra�
can
be
thought
of
as
the
conjugate
transpose
of
a
vector,
while
the
\ket�
is
analogous
to
an
ordinary
vector.
The
set
of
functions,
just
as
a
set
of
vectors,
can
then
span
a
vector
space.2
A
vector
space
for
which
an
inner
product
is
de
ned
as
above
is
known
as
an
inner
product
space.
Moreover,
an
inner
product
space
which
is
complete
is
a
Hilbert
space.
Hilbert
spaces
can
be
in
nite
dimensional.
The
above
inner
product
facilitates
the
de
nition
of
a
norm
since
hfjf.
1In
the
mathematics
literature,
the
inner
product
is
often
denoted
as
hf,
g.
or
(f,
g).
2When
any
vector
in
the
space
can
be
represented
as
a
linear
superposition
of
the
set
of
independent
vectors,
the
set
of
vectors
are
said
to
span
the
vector
space.
They
also
form
the
basis
set
for
spanning
the
space.
35
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
is
a
positive
de
nite
number.
Hence,
the
norm
of
a
vector
can
be
de
ned
to
be
kf.
=(hfjfi)1=2
(5.1.3)
It
is
the
measure
of
the
length
of
the
vector.
We
can
use
this
norm
to
de
ne
the
distance
between
two
vectors
to
be
d(f,
g)=
kf
-
g.
(5.1.4)
In
general,
if
we
have
a
set
of
orthonormal
eigenfunctions,
f n(x);n
=1;::.
1g,
that
spans
a
linear
vector
space,
we
can
expand
an
arbitrary
function
in
the
same
space
as
g(x)=
dn n(x)
(5.1.5)
n
The
set
f n(x);n
=1;::.
1}
also
forms
the
orthonormal
basis
or
the
orthonormal
basis
set
for
spanning
the
vector
space.
A
member
of
the
set
is
known
as
a
basis
function
or
a
basis
vector.3
Eigenfunctions
of
an
operator
can
be
used
as
basis
functions.
The
above
can
be
written
using
Dirac's
notation
as
jg.
=
dnj n.
(5.1.6)
n
Inner
product
the
above
with
h m|
from
the
left,
we
arrive
at
that
h mjg.
=
dnh mj n.
(5.1.7)
Using
the
orthonormality
of
the
eigenfunction
such
that
h mj n.
=
#nm,
the
above
yields
that
dm
=
h mjg.
(5.1.8)
Consequently,
we
have
.
jg.
=
n
j nih njg.
(5.1.9)
We
can
identify
the
operator
I
=
j nih n|
(5.1.10)
as
an
identity
operator
since
when
it
operates
on
a
vector,
it
returns
the
same
vector.
We
can
often
construct
an
identity
operator
of
a
vector
space
once
we
have
identify
the
set
of
orthonormal
vectors
that
span
the
space.
The
product
j nih#n|
in
Dirac's
notation,
is
analogous
to
outer
product
between
two
vectors
U
�
V�
in
linear
algebraic
notation.
This
3We
will
use
\function�
and
\vector�
interchangeably
since
they
are
the
same.
Mathematical
Preliminaries
outer
product
produces
a
matrix,
and
in
the
case
of
in
nite
dimensional
linear
vector
space,
produces
an
operator.
For
instance,
if
we
are
in
a
3-space
(the
short
for
3D
vector
space),
the
unit
vectors
that
span
the
3-space
are
fa^1;a^2;a^3g.
They
are
complete
and
orthonormal.
Hence,
the
identity
operator
in
a
3-space
is4
I
=
a^ia^i
(5.1.11)
i=1
To
be
strictly
correct,
the
above
is
an
outer
product
between
two
vectors,
and
a
transpose
sign
should
be
attached
to
one
of
the
unit
vectors.
But
it
is
customary
in
the
physics
literature
to
ignore
this
transpose
sign.
Written
in
terms
of
x,
y,
z
notation,
the
identity
operator
becomes
I
=
x^x^+^yy^+
^zz^(5.1.12)
One
can
easily
be
convinced
that
I
�
A
=
A,
con
rming
the
above.5
In
an
N
dimensional
vector
space
spanned
by
a
set
of
orthonormal
vectors
fUn;n
=
1;:::;Ng,
the
identity
operator
is
formed
by
their
outer
products;
namely,
�
U
n=1
One
can
easily
show
that
when
I
operates
on
a
member
of
the
vector
space,
it
returns
the
same
member.
Namely,
I
=
Un
(5.1.13)
N
I
�
V
=
Un
�
U
�
V
=
Un
�
V
=
V
(5.1.14)
n=1
n=1
The
last
equality
follows
because
the
second
last
term
is
just
an
orthonormal
eigenvector
expansion
of
the
vector
V.
A
vector
space
is
also
de
ned
by
a
set
of
axioms.
For
u,
v,
w
that
belong
to
a
vector
space,
the
following
axioms
hold:
Associativity
of
addition
u
+(v
+
w)=(u
+
v)+
w
(5.1.15)
Commutativity
of
addition
u
+
v
=
v
+
u
(5.1.16)
Identity
element
of
addition
v
+
0
=
v
(5.1.17)
Inverse
elements
of
addition
v
+(..v)=
0
(5.1.18)
Distributivity
of
scalar
multiplication
over
vectors
a(u
+
v)=
au
+
av
(5.1.19)
Distributivity
of
scalar
multiplication
by
a
vector
(a
+
b)v
=
av
+
bv
(5.1.20)
Compatibility
of
scalar
multiplication
a(bv)=(ab)v
(5.1.21)
Identity
element
of
scalar
multiplication
1v
=
v
(5.1.22)
4Throughout
these
lecture
notes,
the
hat
(\^")
symbol
is
used
to
denote
an
operator,
but
here,
it
denotes
a
unit
vector.
5It
is
to
be
noted
that
an
outer
product
in
matrix
notation
is
U
�
Vy,
while
in
physics
notation
for
3
space,
it
is
often
just
written
as
EB.
In
Dirac
notation,
an
outer
product
is
j ih#j.
38
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
5.2
Operators
An
operator
maps
vectors
from
one
space
to
vectors
in
another
space.
It
is
denoted
mathe^^
matically
as
A
:
V
.
W
where
A
is
the
operator,
while
V
and
W
are
two
di#erent
vector
spaces:
V
is
the
domain
space,
while
W
is
the
range
space.
In
linear
algebra,
the
operator
is
a
matrix
operator.
In
Hilbert
spaces,
it
can
be
a
di#erential
operator
such
as
g(x)=
f(x)
(5.2.1)
dx
It
can
be
an
integral
operator
such
as
a
Fourier
transform
operator
.
8
g(k)=
dxeikxf(x)
(5.2.2)
..8
In
Dirac
notation,
jg.
=
Ajf.
(5.2.3)
Linear
operators
are
de
ned
such
that
^^^
L(c1jg1.
+
c2jg2i)=
c1Ljg1.
+
c2Ljg2.
(5.2.4)
It
is
quite
clear
that
matrix
operators
satisfy
the
above,
and
hence,
they
are
linear.
They
are
also
known
as
linear
maps.
In
general,
like
matrix
operators,
linear
operators
are
not
commutative;
namely
A^^B^
^
B
6A
=
(5.2.5)
5.2.1
Matrix
Representation
of
an
Operator
An
operator
equation
can
be
written
as6
jg.
=
Ajf.
(5.2.6)
We
can
convert
the
above
into
a
matrix
equation
by
inserting
an
identity
operator
on
the
right-hand
side
to
give
jg.
=
Aj nih njf.
(5.2.7)
Furthermore,
we
can
multiply
the
above
from
the
left
by
the
basis
vector
h mj;m
=1;:::,
8
to
yield7
h mjg.
=
h mjA^j nih njfi;m
=1;:::,
8
(5.2.8)
�
7This
process
is
called
testing
or
weighting,
and
m
is
called
the
testing
or
weighting
function.
6In
the
mathematics
literature,
this
is
often
just
denoted
as
Af
=
g.
Mathematical
Preliminaries
The
above
is
an
in
nite
dimensional
matrix
equation
which
can
be
written
as
g
=
A
�
f
(5.2.9)
where
.
A
.
mn
=
h m|
^Aj n.
(5.2.10)
[g]m
=
h mjg.
[f]n
=
h njf.
(5.2.11)
(5.2.12)
The
matrix
equation
can
be
solved
approximately
by
truncating
its
size
to
N
�
N,
or
without
truncation,
it
can
be
solved
iteratively.
The
matrix
denoted
by
Amn
=
h mjA^j n.
(5.2.13)
is
the
matrix
representation
of
the
operator
A.
By
the
same
token,
h mjg.
and
h njf.
are
the
vector
representations
of
the
functions
g
and
f
respectively.
In
the
above,
we
have
assumed
that
the
range
space
and
the
domain
space
of
the
operator
are
the
same,
and
hence,
they
can
be
spanned
by
the
same
basis
set.
For
a
Hermitian
operator,
this
is
usually
the
case.
However,
for
some
operators
where
the
range
space
and
the
domain
space
are
di#erent,
we
may
choose
to
test
(5.2.7)
with
a
di#erent
set
of
basis
functions.
5.2.2
Bilinear
Expansion
of
an
Operator
We
have
seen
how
the
use
of
the
identity
operator
allows
us
to
expand
a
function
in
terms
of
a
set
of
basis
functions
as
in
(5.1.9).
The
same
can
be
done
with
an
operator.
Pre-and
post-multiply
an
operator
with
the
identity
operator
as
given
by
(5.1.10),
we
have
A^=
j nih njA^j mih m|
(5.2.14)
nm
The
above
can
be
rewritten
as
A
=
j niAnmh m|
=
Anmj nih m|
(5.2.15)
nm
nm
where
Anm
is
the
matrix
representation
of
the
operator
A^.
The
above
is
the
bilinear
expansion
of
the
operator
in
terms
of
orthonormal
functions.
Notice
that
the
expansion
of
an
identity
operator
given
by
(5.1.10)
is
a
bilinear
expansion.
5.2.3
Trace
of
an
Operator
The
trace
of
a
matrix
operator
is
de
ned
to
be
the
sum
of
its
diagonal
elements;
namely,
tr
M
=
Mii
(5.2.16)
i=1
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
^^
If
an
operator
A
has
matrix
representation
given
by
h ijA^j ji,
the
trace
of
the
operator
A
is
de
ned
to
be
tr
A
=
h ijA^j i.
(5.2.17)
It
can
be
shown
that
the
trace
of
an
operator
is
independent
of
the
basis
used
for
its
representation.
To
this
end,
we
insert
the
identity
operator
I
=
j#mih#m|
(5.2.18)
into
(5.2.17)
to
get
tr
A
=
h ij#mih#mjA^j i.
(5.2.19)
im
Exchanging
the
order
of
summation
above,
and
the
order
of
the
two
scalar
numbers
in
the
summand,
we
have
tr
A
=
h#mjA^j iih ij#m.
(5.2.20)
mi
The
inner
summation
reduces
to
an
identity
operator
which
can
be
removed,
and
the
above
becomes
tr
A^=
h#mjA^j#m.
(5.2.21)
This
is
the
trace
of
A
using
another
basis
set
that
is
complete
and
orthonormal.
Hence,
the
trace
of
an
operator
is
invariant
to
the
choice
of
basis.
^^
If
we
choose
a
basis
function
that
is
the
eigenfunction
of
A
such
that
Aj n.
=
#nj ni,
then
(5.2.19)
becomes
tr
A
=
#ih ij#mih#mj i.
=
#i
(5.2.22)
im
i
Hence,
the
trace
of
an
operator
is
also
the
sum
of
its
eigenvalues.
It
can
also
be
shown
that
tr
A^B^
=
tr(
B^
A^)
(5.2.23)
This
is
quite
easy
to
show
for
matrix
operators
since
.
#X.
X.
tr
A
�
B
=
AijBji
=
BjiAij
(5.2.24)
ij
ji
Trace
is
usually
used
in
quantum
mechanics
as
an
alternative
way
to
write
the
expectation
value
of
an
operator.
As
mentioned
before,
for
a
quantum
system
in
a
state
de
ned
by
the
state
function
j i,
the
expectation
value
of
a
quantum
operator
in
such
a
state
is
h jA^j .
(5.2.25)
Mathematical
Preliminaries
For
denumerable
indices,
the
above
is
analogous
to
XXX.
...
U�
�
A
�
U
=
Un*
AnmUm
=
AnmUmUn
*
=
tr
A
�
U
�
Uy(5.2.26)
nm
nm
where
UmU
is
the
outer
product
of
two
vectors
Um
and
Un.
Converting
the
above
to
Dirac
notation,
we
have
h jA^j .
=
trfA^j ih j}
(5.2.27)
The
operator
#^=
j ih |
(5.2.28)
is
known
as
the
density
operator.
It
is
used
in
quantum
mechanics
to
denote
the
state
of
a
quantum
system
as
an
alternative
to
the
state
vector.
5.2.4
Unitary
Operators
Unitary
operators
satisfy
the
property
that
U
�
U
=
I
(5.2.29)
Unitary
operators
are
operators
that
when
acted
on
a
vector
does
not
change
its
length.
In
matrix
notation,
a
unitary
transform
is
U
�
V
=
V.
(5.2.30)
The
length
square
of
the
new
vector
V.
is
de
ned
to
be
V�
�
V
=
V0�
�
U
�
U
�
V.
(5.2.31)
Making
use
of
(5.2.29),
the
above
implies
that
�
V
=
V0y
V�
�
V.
(5.2.32)
y..1
or
that
the
length
of
the
vector
has
not
changed.
For
unitary
matrix,
it
is
clear
that
U
=
U
.
The
above
can
be
rewritten
using
Dirac
notation.
Since
in
quantum
mechanics,
h j .
=
1,
the
length
of
the
vector
is
1.
The
time
evolution
operator
by
integrating
Schrodinger
equation
given
below
-
i
Ht
#^=
e
.
(5.2.33)
where
H
is
the
Hamiltonian
operator,
is
a
unitary
operator,
since
the
state
vector
it
acts
on
cannot
change
its
length.
Since
many
basis
set
comprises
orthonormal
basis
vectors,
a
unitary
matrix
is
needed
for
the
change
of
basis
from
one
set
to
another.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
5.2.5
Hermitian
Operators
Hermitian
operators
appear
frequently
in
quantum
mechanics
since
they
have
real
eigenvalues.
As
such,
the
expectation
value
of
such
operators
are
real
valued,
so
that
it
can
be
connected
to
measurable
or
observable
quantities
in
the
real
world.
A
Hermitian
matrix
is
one
where
its
conjugate
transpose
(also
called
Hermitian
transpose
or
Hermitian
conjugate)
is
itself.
For
operators,
the
term
\adjoint�
is
often
used.
A
Hermitian
operator
is
also
called
a
self-adjoint
operator.
The
notation
for
this
is
^M
�
=
^M
(5.2.34)
For
matrix
operator
with
denumerable
indices,
the
above
is
the
same
as
M
*
ij
=
Mji
(5.2.35)
For
operators
with
nondenumerable
indices,
it
is
better
to
de
ne
the
adjoint
of
the
operator
via
inner
products.
Using
the
rule
for
conjugate
transpose,
we
have
hfjM^
jg.
*
=
hfjM^
jgi�
=
hgjM^
yjf.
(5.2.36)
The
rst
equality
follows
because
the
above
are
scalar
quantities:
hence,
the
conjugate
transpose
of
a
scalar
is
the
same
as
its
conjugation.
To
obtain
the
second
equality,
we
have
used
the
rule
that
..#t
ttt
A
�
B
�
C
=
C
�
B
�
A
(5.2.37)
in
linear
algebra,
where
the
matrices
need
not
be
square.
Hence,
A
and
C
can
be
1
�
N
and
N
�
1
respectively
representing
vectors.
This
identity
immediately
implies
that
A
�
B
�
C
=
C
�
B
�
A
(5.2.38)
These
rules
can
easily
be
shown
to
apply
to
inner
product
of
operators
and
vectors
under
the
Dirac
notation.
Hence,
(5.2.36)
de
nes
the
adjoint
of
the
operator
M^
�
when
f
and
g
are
arbitrary.
It
does
so
by
using
just
inner
products.
A
Hermitian
operator
has
real
eigenvalues
and
their
eigenvectors
are
orthogonal.
The
proof
is
analogous
to
the
proof
for
matrix
operators,
for
which
we
will
provide
next.
Given
M
�
vi
=
#ivi
(5.2.39)
M
�
vj
=
#jvj
(5.2.40)
Dot-multiply
the
rst
equation
by
v
�
from
the
left,
and
likewise
for
the
second
equation
with
v
y,
we
have
v
�
�
M
�
vi
=
#iv
�
�
vi
(5.2.41)
jj
y�
v
�
M
�
vj
=
#jv
�
vj
(5.2.42)
ii
Mathematical
Preliminaries
We
can
take
the
conjugate
transpose
of
the
rst
equation,
using
the
rule
in
(5.2.38),
the
left-
hand
side
becomes
the
same
as
that
for
the
second
equation
after
making
use
of
the
Hermitian
property
of
the
matrix
M.
On
subtracting
the
two
equations,
the
following
equation
ensues:
0=(.
*
i
-
#j)v
�
vj
(5.2.43)
If
i
=
j,
on
the
right-hand
side,
we
have
v
�
vi
=
jvij2
which
is
a
positive
de
nite
number.
The
above
can
be
zero
only
if
#*
=
#i
or
that
#i
is
real.
On
the
other
hand,
if
#i
=6#j,
it
is
necessary
that
v
�
vj
=
0.
In
other
words,
v
�
vj
=
Cn#ij
(5.2.44)
The
above
proof
can
be
repeated
using
Dirac
notation,
and
the
conclusion
will
be
the
same.
The
eigenvectors
of
a
Hermitian
operator
are
also
complete
in
the
space
that
the
operator
acts
on.
It
is
obvious
in
the
nite
dimensional
case,
but
not
so
obvious
in
the
in
nite
dimensional
space.
We
can
use
the
rule
expressed
in
(5.2.36)
to
see
if
an
operator
is
Hermitian.
For
instance,
the
momentum
operator
is
^p.
Using
(5.2.36),
we
have
hfjp^jg.
*
=
hgjp^yjf.
(5.2.45)
The
above
de
nes
the
adjoint
of
the
operator
p^.
Writing
the
above
explicitly
in
1D
space
using
coordinate
space
representation,8
we
have
on
the
left-hand
side
.
8
.
8
#.
dxf(x)i.
d
g
*
(x)=
dxg
*
(x)
..i.
d
f(x)
(5.2.46)
dx
dx
..8
..8
We
have
arrived
at
the
form
of
the
right-hand
side
by
using
integration
by
parts,
and
assuming
that
the
functions
are
vanishing
at
in
nity.
By
comparing
the
above,
we
identify
that
p^=
..i.
(5.2.47)
dx
We
see
that
(^p)�
=
p^implying
that
it
is
Hermitian.
The
eigenfunction
of
the
momentum
ikx
operator
is
fk(x)
.
e.
It
is
quite
clear
that
^pfk(x)=
~kfk(x),
and
hence,
its
eigenvalues
are
also
real,
as
is
required
of
a
Hermitian
operator.
The
above
can
be
generalized
to
3D.
It
can
also
be
shown
that
the
kinetic
energy
operator
~r^
2
T^=
p^2=2m
=
-
(5.2.48)
2m
is
Hermitian.
In
3D,
^pis
proportional
to
the
Laplacian
operator
r2
in
coordinate
space
representation.
We
can
use
integration
by
parts
in
3D
to
show
that
the
above
operator
is
also
Hermitian.
Using
the
fact
that
r�
[f(r)rg
*
(r)]
=
f(r)r2
g
*
(r)+
rf(r)rg
*
(r)
(5.2.49)
8A
note
is
in
order
here
regarding
the
term
\coordinate
space",
since
there
is
only
one
Hilbert
space.
It
is
understood
that
when
the
term
\coordinate
space
representation�
is
used,
it
means
that
the
Hilbert
space
is
represented
in
the
space
where
the
basis
is
the
coordinate
space
basis.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
we
have
in
coordinate
space
representation
drf(r)r2
g
*
(r)=
dr
[r�
(f(r)rg
*
(r))
..rf(r)rg
*
(r)]
=
-
drrf(r)rg
*
(r)
V
V
V
(5.2.50)
The
last
form
is
symmetric
between
f
and
g,
and
hence,
we
can
easily
show
that
.
V
drg
*
(r)r2f(r)
=
-
.
V
drrg
*
(r)rf(r)
(5.2.51)
Consequently,
we
can
show
that
#.
#*
hfjr^
2jg.
*
=
drf
*
(r)r2
g(r)
=
drg
*
(r)r2f(r)
=
hgjr^
2jf.
(5.2.52)
indicating
the
Hermitian
property
of
the
Laplacian
operator.
Consequently,
the
T
operator
is
also
Hermitian
or
self-adjoint.
If
we
have
chosen
f
=
g
in
the
above,
(5.2.51)
is
always
negative,
implying
that
the
Laplacian
operator
is
a
negative
de
nite
operator.
5.3
Identity
Operator
in
a
Continuum
Space
We
have
seen
the
derivation
of
the
identity
operator
when
the
basis
functions
are
indexed
by
integers,
such
as
the
eigenfunctions
of
an
in
nite
potential
well,
or
those
of
a
harmonic
oscillator
in
a
parabolic
potential
well.
In
many
situations,
we
are
required
to
work
with
indices
that
are
a
continuum
(nondenumerable)
like
the
coordinate
space
indices
x,
y,
z.
When
an
electron
is
freely
roaming,
its
energy
values
are
also
a
continuum.
We
have
seen
how
we
have
used
denumerable
eigenfunctions,
such
as
n
to
project
a
function
into
its
vector
representation.
Namely,
fn
=
h njf.
(5.3.1)
Very
often,
a
denumerable
basis
function
is
just
written
as
hnj,
and
the
above
becomes
fn
=
hnjf.
(5.3.2)
Similar,
we
can
think
of
a
coordinate
(or
position)
basis
function
hpx|
whose
property
is
that
its
inner
product
with
jf.
yields
the
value
of
the
function
f
at
position
x;
namely,
f(x)=
hpxjf.
(5.3.3)
The
above
is
often
abbreviated
as
f(x)=
hxjf.
(5.3.4)
Mathematical
Preliminaries
Assuming
that
this
basis
jx.
is
complete
and
orthogonal
in
0
<x<a,
then
we
can
de
ne
an
identity
operator
such
that
a
I
=
0
dx0jx
0ihx
0|
(5.3.5)
so
that
aa
jf.
=
dx0jx
0ihx
0jf.
=
dx0jx
0if(x
0)
(5.3.6)
00
Notice
that
the
above
is
quite
di#erent
from
the
identity
operator
when
the
basis
functions
are
denumerable,
which
is
1
I
=
jfnihfn|
(5.3.7)
n=1
Taking
the
product
of
(5.3.6)
with
hxj,
we
have
hxjf.
=
f(x)=
dx0hxjx
0if(x
0)
(5.3.8)
Hence,
in
order
for
(5.3.5)
to
be
an
identity
operator,
the
basis
function
must
satisfy
hxjx
0.
=
#(x
-
x
0)
(5.3.9)
Notice
that
in
the
denumerable
case,
the
orthonormal
relation
of
the
basis
function
is
expressed
in
terms
of
Kronecker
delta
function
#ij
,
but
in
the
continuum
case,
the
equivalent
relationship
is
expressed
in
terms
of
the
Dirac
delta
function
#(x
-
x0).
We
note
that
jx.
is
not
orthonormal
in
the
strict
sense
that
(5.3.9)
is
in
nite
when
x
=
x.
The
identity
operator
(5.3.5)
is
di#erent
from
(5.3.7)
because
of
the
extra
weight
dx
in
the
v
integral
summation.
One
may
think
that
jx.
dx.
as
analogous
to
the
orthonormal
vector
of
the
countable
case.
The
inner
product
between
two
vectors
is
written
as
Za
Za
hfjg.
=
dxhfjxihxjg.
=
dxf
*
(x)g(x)
(5.3.10)
00
where
we
have
inserted
the
identity
operator
(5.3.5)
in
the
rst
expression
above
to
get
the
second
expression,
and
making
use
of
(5.3.4)
to
get
the
third
expression.
Furthermore,
we
note
that
hfjx.
is
the
complex
conjugate
of
hxjfi,
since
hf|
and
jx.
are
conjugate
transpose
of
jf.
and
hxj,
respectively.
A
vector
jf.
can
have
other
representations.
For
example,
we
can
de
ne
a
set
of
\orthonormal�
vectors
hk|
such
that
hkjf.
=
f(k),
(5.3.11)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
where
f(k)
is
the
Fourier
transform
of
f(x)
via
the
relationship
1.
f(x)
=
1
v
2p
dkeikxf(k)
(5.3.12)
..8
The
above
can
be
written
as
1.
f(x)
=
hxjf.
=
dkhxjkihkjf.
(5.3.13)
..8
where
we
have
de
ned
the
identity
operator
1.
I
=
dkjkihk|
(5.3.14)
..8
Comparing
(5.3.11),
(5.3.12)
and
(5.3.13),
we
deduce
that
ikx
hxjk.
=
v
e
(5.3.15)
2p
In
other
words,
the
coordinate
space
representation
of
the
vector
jk.
is
given
by
(5.3.15).
Since
~k
in
quantum
mechanics
is
related
to
the
momentum
of
a
particle,
f(k)=
hkjf.
is
also
called
the
momentum
representation
of
the
vector
jfi,
while
f(x)=
hxjf.
is
the
coordinate
space
representation
of
the
vector
jfi.
From
the
above,
we
can
derive
Parseval's
theorem
aa
hfjg.
=
dxhfjxihxjg.
=
dxf#(x)g(x)
00
11(5.3.16)
=
dkhfjkihkjg.
=
dkf#(k)g(k)
..8
..8
Parseval's
theorem
is
the
statement
that
the
inner
product
between
two
vectors
is
invariant
with
respect
to
the
basis
that
represent
it.
The
above
can
be
generalized
to
3-space
where
a
position
basis
function
is
hrj,
with
the
property
that
f(r)=
hrjf.
(5.3.17)
The
identity
operator
can
then
be
expressed
as
I
=
V
dr
0jr
0ihr
0|
(5.3.18)
And
the
\orthonormality�
relationship
is
hrjr
0.
=
#(r
-
r
0)
(5.3.19)
Similar
basis
can
be
de
ned
for
the
3D
k
space.
Mathematical
Preliminaries
47
5.4
Changing
Between
Representations
If
we
have
an
operator
equation
such
as
p^j .
=
jg.
(5.4.1)
The
above
equation
is
analogous
to
the
equation
P
�
f
=
g
in
matrix
algebra.
The
explicit
forms
and
the
representations
of
the
matrix
operator
P
and
the
vector
f
are
not
given.
In
order
to
express
the
above
explicitly,
we
rst
insert
the
identity
operator
to
transform
(5.4.1)
to
dxp^jxihxj .
=
jg.
(5.4.2)
Then
multiply
the
above
from
the
left
by
hx0j,
we
have
dxhx
0jp^jxihxj .
=
hx
0jg.
(5.4.3)
dxp(x
;x) (x)=
g(x
0)
(5.4.4)
The
above
is
the
coordinate
space
representation
of
(5.4.1).
It
is
valid
for
any
operator
in
a
1D
space.
But
if
^p
is
the
momentum
operator,
we
know
that
the
above
equation
in
coordinate
space
representation
should
be
..i.
d
dx
(x)
=
g(x
0)
(5.4.5)
Hence
we
conclude
that
p(x
;x)=
..i~#(x
.
-
x)
d
(x)
(5.4.6)
dx
Therefore,
a
di#erential
operator
is
a
highly
localized
operator,
or
a
quasi-diagonal
operator.
Next,
we
will
study
the
action
of
the
momentum
operator
^p
on
a
momentum
eigenstate
jki;
namely,
p^jk.
(5.4.7)
Transforming
the
above
to
coordinate
space
representation
similar
to
what
have
been
done
above,
we
have
.
#.
#.
dd
dx#(x
.
-
x)
..i.
hxjk.
=
..i.
hxjk.
(5.4.8)
dx
dx
The
expression
for
hxjk.
is
given
in
equation
(5.3.15).
Hence,
the
above
becomes
~khxjk.
(5.4.9)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Therefore,
we
see
that
jk.
is
an
eigenvector
of
the
momentum
operator
^p.
In
other
words,
^pjk.
=
~kjk.
(5.4.10)
In
fact,
any
function
of
^p,
when
operating
on
a
momentum
eigenstate
gives
f(^p)jk.
=
f(~k)jk.
(5.4.11)
We
can
repeat
(5.4.2)
and
(5.4.3)
using
the
basis
jk.
to
arrive
at
dkhk0jp^jkihkj .
=
hk0jg.
(5.4.12)
Since
jk.
is
an
eigenvector
of
^p,
the
above
becomes
dk~khk0jkihkj .
=
dk~k#(k.
-
k)hkj .
=
~k0hk0j .
=
hk0jg.
(5.4.13)
which
is
just
a
scalar
equation.
5.4.1
The
Coordinate
Basis
Function
Using
the
coordinate
basis
function
jri,
we
can
write
many
of
our
previously
derived
identities
in
coordinate
space
representation.
Say
if
the
functions
de
ned
in
(5.1.9)
and
(5.1.10)
are
functions
of
3-space,
indexed
by
r,
then
multiplying
(5.1.9)
from
the
left
by
hrj,
hrjg.
=
g(r)=
hrj nih njg.
=
n(r)h njg.
(5.4.14)
nn
We
can
pre-and
post-multiply
the
identity
operator
de
ned
in
(5.1.10)
by
hr|
and
jr0.
respectively,
we
can
identify
the
operator
=
hrjr
0.
=
#(r
-
r
0)=
hrj nih njr
0.
=(r).
*
(r
0)
nn
(5.4.15)
n
where
we
have
noted
that
h njr0.
=
hr0j ni*
since
they
are
conjugate
transpose
of
each
other.
The
above
is
the
bilinear
eigenfunction
expansion
of
the
Dirac
delta
function.
We
can
also
apply
the
above
to
the
bilinear
expansion
of
an
operator
given
by
(5.2.15).
Going
through
similar
operations,
we
have
nm
We
have
let
A(r,
r0)
be
the
coordinate
space
representation
of
the
operator
A^.
The
above
is
just
the
bilinear
expansion
in
coordinate
space
representation.
We
can
also
choose
the
momentum
basis
set
jk.
(or
any
other
basis
sets)
and
project
the
previously
obtained
identities
in
momentum
representation
(or
any
other
representations).
(r).
#0)
=
A(r,
r
0)=
Anm nm(r
(5.4.16)
r
r
Mathematical
Preliminaries
49
5.5
Commutation
of
Operators
Operators,
like
matrices,
are
non-commuting
for
most
parts.
In
other
words,
^A
^B
6
=
^B
^A
The
commutator
is
de
ned
to
be
(5.5.1)
^^
A,
B^
=
AB^
-
B^
A^(5.5.2)
^^
If
A
and
B
are
commuting,
then
A,
B^
=
0
(5.5.3)
But
for
most
parts,
A,
B^
=
iC^(5.5.4)
^^^
It
can
be
shown
easily
that
C
is
a
Hermitian
operator
if
A
and
B
are
Hermitian.
^^
If
A
and
B
are
commuting,
they
share
the
same
set
of
eigenfunctions,
but
not
the
same
^
eigenvalues.
Say
if
j n.
is
an
eigenfunction
of
B,
with
eigenvalue
Bn,
then
B^
^A^^^^
Aj n.
=
Bj n.
=
ABnj n.
=
BnAj n.
(5.5.5)
^^
From
the
above,
it
is
clear
that
Aj n.
is
also
eigenfunction
of
B
with
the
same
eigenvalue
^^
Bn.
Therefore,
Aj n.
is
proportional
to
j ni,
or
that
Aj n.
=
Fnj ni.
In
other
words,
j n.
^
is
also
an
eigenfunction
of
A,
but
with
a
di#erent
eigenvalue.
5.6
Expectation
Value
and
Eigenvalue
of
Operators
The
expectation
value
of
a
random
variable
is
a
concept
from
probability.
In
quantum
mechanics,
a
measurable
quantity
or
an
observable
in
the
real
world
is
a
random
variable.
For
each
observable
in
the
real
world,
there
is
a
corresponding
operator
in
the
quantum
world.
The
expectation
value
of
an
operator
for
a
quantum
system
in
state
jf.
is
de
ned
to
be
^
f
(5.6.1)
It
is
prudent
to
understand
this
expectation
value
in
terms
of
the
eigenstates
and
eigenvalues
^
of
A.
Letting
jf.
=
j nifn
(5.6.2)
then
(5.6.1)
can
be
rewritten
as
^
f
*
fm
(5.6.3)
nm
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
When
m
is
the
eigenstate
of
A
with
eigenvalue
Am,
the
above
can
be
written
as
A^=
Amh nj mif
*
fm
=
Anjfnj2
(5.6.4)
n
nm
n
where
jfnj2
is
the
probability
of
nding
the
state
in
eigenstate
n.
Hence,
the
above
is
the
statistical
average
or
the
expectation
value
of
the
eigenvalue
An.
The
eigenvalue
An
can
be
thought
of
as
a
random
variable.
Hence,
the
expectation
value
of
an
operator
is
the
average
value
of
its
eigenvalue
when
the
quantum
state
is
in
state
f.
Therefore,
it
is
customary
is
denote
=
hA.
=
A#
(5.6.5)
=
A,
which
is
a
random
variable,
while
where
the
scalar
variable
A
denotes
the
eigenvalue
of
the
angular
brackets
on
the
left-hand
side
hAi,
indicate
statistical
average.
An
overbar
in
the
last
equality
above
is
often
used
as
a
short-hand
for
angular
brackets
to
denote
an
average
of
a
random
variable.
The
above
indicates
that
if
we
prepare
a
quantum
state
that
is
exactly
the
eigenstate
of
^
the
quantum
operator
A,
then
its
expectation
value
in
this
quantum
eigenstate
is
just
the
eigenvalue
of
the
eigenstate.
In
a
sense,
we
can
\measure�
the
eigenvalue
of
the
quantum
operator
through
such
an
experiment.
Namely,
n
=
An
(5.6.6)
where
An
is
the
eigenvalue
of
the
eigenstate.
We
see
in
the
previous
section
that
when
two
operators
commute,
they
share
the
same
eigenfunctions
but
with
di#erent
eigenvalues.
Therefore,
if
we
prepare
an
eigenstate
shared
by
these
two
operators,
their
respective
eigenvalues
can
be
\measured�
exactly.
In
other
words,
n
=
An
(5.6.7)
=
n
n
=
Bn
(5.6.8)
On
the
other
hand,
if
the
two
operators
do
not
commute,
they
do
not
share
the
same
set
^
of
eigenstates.
If
we
prepare
an
eigenstate
n
that
is
the
eigenstate
of
A,
but
it
is
not
the
eigenstate
of
B^
.
However,
we
can
expand
the
eigenstate
n
in
terms
of
the
eigenstates
of
the
^
operator
B;
namely,
j n.
=
aij#i.
(5.6.9)
^^
where
j#i.
are
the
eigenstates
of
B.
We
now
see
that
the
expectation
value
of
B
due
to
the
eigenstate
j n.
is
i
aj
h#ijB^
j#j.
=
jaij2Bi
(5.6.10)
=
a
ij
i
Mathematical
Preliminaries
51
^^
The
expectation
value
of
B
is
due
to
a
range
of
eigenvalues
of
B,
and
not
just
due
to
one
single
eigenvalue
like
before.
This
is
the
gist
of
the
uncertainty
principle.
When
two
operators
do
not
commute,
the
precise
measurement
of
the
eigenvalue
of
one
operator
implies
that
the
measurement
of
the
second
operator
will
involve
a
range
of
eigenvalues.
5.7
Generalized
Uncertainty
Principle
We
have
seen
the
Heisenberg
uncertainty
principle
expressed
for
uncertainty
in
momentum
#p
and
position
#x
as
#p#x
=
~=2.
In
this
case,
p
and
x
are
both
observables
in
the
real
world.
In
quantum
mechanics,
all
observables
are
replaced
by
operators.
To
connect
the
operators
to
real
world
observables,
we
take
the
expectation
values
of
the
operators.
That
is
A
=
hA.
=
hfjA^jf.
(5.7.1)
where
A
is
a
scalar
variable
representing
the
eigenvalue
of
A
and
f
is
a
state
vector
that
de
nes
that
state
the
quantum
system
is
in.
The
expectation
value
of
an
operator
also
gives
the
statistical
mean
of
the
observable
expressed
as
the
mean
of
the
eigenvalue
of
the
corresponding
operator.
We
can
de
ne
the
deviation
from
its
mean
by
the
operator
#^^#
A
=
A
-
A
(5.7.2)
On
the
right-hand
side,
the
rst
term
is
an
operator
while
the
second
term
is
the
mean.9
The
above
operator
has
zero
expectation
value
or
zero
mean.
##2
We
can
study
the
variance
of
the
operator
#A^which
has
nonzero
expectation
value.
Namely,
fj(#A^)2jf
=
fj(A^-
A)2jf
=(A
-
A#)2
A2
-
2A#^A#2
=
A
+
A2A#2
=
-
2A#hA.
+
=
A2-
A#2
=
(#A)2=
(#A)2
=
#2
(5.7.3)
The
above
is
just
the
de
nition
of
variance
of
random
variable
A
as
in
statistics.
The
standard
deviation
is
obtained
by
taking
the
square
root
of
the
variance
to
get10
#A
=
(#A)2
(5.7.4)
We
can
derive
a
similar
expression
for
#B,
the
standard
deviation
for
B.
9To
be
strictly
correct,
we
should
multiply
the
second
term
by
the
identity
operator,
but
this
is
usually
understood.
10It
is
tempting
to
denote
the
standard
deviation
as
#A
but
this
could
be
confusing
in
view
of
(5.7.2).
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
The
generalized
uncertainty
principle
is
obtained
by
using
the
Schwartz
inequality:
f
*
gdx
##Z
2
#.
#jfj2dx
jgj2dx
(5.7.5)
We
can
rewrite
the
above
using
Dirac
notation
to
get
jhfjgij2
=
hfjfihgjg.
(5.7.6)
The
above
is
the
generalization
of
the
cosine
inequality
we
have
for
3-vectors11
jA
�
Bj2
=
jAj2jBj2|
cos
#j2
=
jAj2jBj2
(5.7.7)
It
can
be
generalized
to
N-vectors
or
vectors
in
N
dimensional
space,
and
then
to
vectors
in
in
nite
dimensional
space
if
the
integrals
converge.
If
we
de
ne,
for
a
quantum
system
in
state
,
jf.
=
jg.
=
A
-
.
^
B
-
A#
(5.7.8)
.
ji.
=^
aj .
#^
Bbj i
j .
=
(5.7.9)
^#^#
where
^a
=
A
-
A
and
^b
=
B
-
B.
Then
#2
a^
.
=
.
^#
A
-
A
=
(#A)2
hfjf.
=
(5.7.10)
^b
2
#2
^#
B
-
B
=
(#B)2
hgjg.
=
.
=
.
(5.7.11)
Using
the
inequality
in
(5.7.6),
we
have
(#A)2
(#B)2
=
jh j^a^b
j ij2
(5.7.12)
It
can
be
shown
easily
that
[^a,
^b
]
=
i
^C
(5.7.13)
Furthermore,
^a^b
=
^a^b
+
^b
^a
2
+
^a^b
-
^b
^a
2
=
^a^b
+
^b
^a
2
+
i
^C
2
(5.7.14)
Taking
the
expectation
value
of
the
above,
we
have
a^b
+^b
a^i
^.
^
ha^b.
=+
C.
(5.7.15)
22
11The
integral
for
the
inner
products
above
can
be
generalized
to
3D
space.
Mathematical
Preliminaries
Since
^a
and
^b
are
Hermitian,
the
rst
term
on
the
right-hand
side
is
also
Hermitian.
Hence,
its
expectation
value
is
purely
real,
while
the
second
term
is
purely
imaginary.
Therefore,
the
amplitude
square
of
the
above
is
jha^bij2
a^b
+^b
a^
11
jhC^ij2
=
jhC^ij2
(5.7.16)
4
Using
the
above
in
(5.7.12),
we
have
#.
jhC^ij2
(#A)2
(#B)2
=
(5.7.17)
The
above
is
the
generalized
uncertainty
principle
for
two
observables
A
and
B.
We
can
take
the
square
root
of
the
above
to
get
#A#B
=
jhC^i|
(5.7.18)
5.8
Time
Evolution
of
the
Expectation
Value
of
an
Operator
The
expectation
value
of
an
operator
is
given
by
.
^A.
=
h (t)|
^Aj (t).
Taking
the
time
derivative
of
the
above
yields
(5.8.1)
Assuming
that
@t.
^A.
=
h@t (t)|
^Aj (t).
+
h (t)|
^Aj@t (t).
^A
is
time
independent,
and
using
the
fact
that
(5.8.2)
we
have
i~@tj (t).
=
i~j@t (t).
=
^H
j (t).
(5.8.3)
@thA^.
=
H (t)
jA^j (t)
A|
^
h (t)|
^H (t)i
ii
=
h (t)jH^
A^j (t)i-
h (t)jA^H^
j (t).
=
h (t)jH^
A^-
A^H^
j (t).
(5.8.4)
or
AH^
-
H^
^^
i~@thA^.
=
.
^A.
=
A,
H^
(5.8.5)
^^
In
other
words,
if
A
commutes
with
H,
its
expectation
value
is
time
independent,
or
it
is
^
a
constant
of
motion.
The
operator
A
in
this
case
represents
an
observable
that
is
conserved,
such
as
linear
momentum
or
angular
momentum.
If
such
an
operator
commutes
with
54
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
the
Hamiltonian
of
the
quantum
system,
the
observable
that
corresponds
to
the
operator
is
conserved.
Furthermore,
it
can
be
shown
that
if
A
is
time
dependent,
we
need
only
to
augment
the
above
equation
as
^^
i~@thA^.
=
A,
H^
+
i~h@tA.
(5.8.6)
5.9
Periodic
Boundary
Condition
One
technique
often
used
to
create
countably
in
nite
modes
is
to
use
periodic
boundary
condition.
In
this
method,
we
require
that
the
wavefunction
satis
es
the
boundary
condition
that
(x
=
0)
=
(x
=
L).
This
can
be
satis
ed
easily
by
a
traveling
wave
(x)=
Ceikx
(5.9.1)
The
periodic
boundary
condition
implies
that
e
ikL
=
1
(5.9.2)
or
that
2np
k
=
kn
=
(5.9.3)
where
we
have
indexed
k
with
subscript
n,
and
n
is
all
integer
values
on
the
real
line
from
v
..8
to
1.
Furthermore,
we
can
pick
C
=1=L
to
normalize
the
above
function.
It
is
quite
easy
to
show
that
with
i2n#x=L
n(x)=
e
(5.9.4)
then
h nj m.
=
#nm
(5.9.5)
Hence,
given
any
function
f(x)
de
ned
between
0
<x<L,
we
can
expand
11
i2n#x=L
f(x)=
fn n(x)=
fn
e
(5.9.6)
n=..8
n=..8
The
above
is
just
a
Fourier
series
expansion
of
the
function
f(x).
The
Fourier
coe#cient
fn
can
be
found
by
using
the
orthonormality
of
n,
to
get
.
L1
dxe..i2n#x=Lf(x)
fn
=
h njf.
=
(5.9.7)
In
the
above,
since
n(x)
is
a
periodic
function
with
period
L,
f(x)
is
also
a
periodic
function
with
period
L.
Mathematical
Preliminaries
Fourier
transform
can
be
derived
from
Fourier
series
expansion.
To
this
end,
we
look
at
(5.9.3),
and
note
that
the
kn
values
are
equally
spaced
by
2#=L
on
the
real
k
line.
The
spacing
becomes
increasingly
small
as
L
!1.
We
can
de
ne
the
spacing
to
be
#k
=2#=L.
Consequently,
in
view
of
changing
a
summation
to
an
integral,
we
can
rewrite
(5.9.6)
more
suggestively
as
11
L
11
i2n#x=L
iknx
f(x)=
#kfn
e
=#kf~(kn)e
(5.9.8)
2#L
2p
n=..8
n=..8
where
we
have
de
ned
f~(kn)=
fn
L.
From
(5.9.7),
we
have
.
L
f~(kn)=
Lfn
=
dxe..iknxf(x)
(5.9.9)
In
the
limit
when
L
tends
to
in
nity,
#k
.
0,
the
sum
in
(5.9.8)
becomes
an
integral;
namely
.
8
ikx
f(x)=
1
dkf~(k)e
(5.9.10)
2p
..8
The
above
is
just
a
Fourier
inverse
transform
integral
with
f~(k)
from
(5.9.9)
.
8
f~(k)=
dxe..ikxf(x)
(5.9.11)
0
which
is
a
Fourier
transform.
Here,
f(x)
is
originally
a
periodic
function,
but
now
the
period
L
is
in
nite.
Also,
if
f(x)
.
0
when
x
!1,
then
by
its
in
nite
periodicity,
f(x)
.
0
when
x
.
..1.
We
can
replace
the
semi-in
nite
integral
above
with
an
in
nite
integral:
.
8
f~(k)=
dxe..ikxf(x)
(5.9.12)
..8
The
above,
(5.9.10)
and
(5.9.12),
form
a
Fourier
transform
pair.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Chapter
6
Approximate
Methods
in
Quantum
Mechanics
6.1
Introduction
There
are
many
problems
in
quantum
mechanics
where
closed
form
or
simple
solutions
cannot
be
found.
What
we
have
shown
as
examples
are
usually
problems
that
have
simple
solutions,
such
a
in
nite
potential
well,
harmonic
oscillator,
or
a
nite
potential
well.
Even
the
case
of
nite
potential
well
requires
the
solution
of
a
transcendental
equation.
Nevertheless,
these
are
called
textbook
problems,
because
they
are
wonderful
examples
in
textbooks
to
teach
beginning
students
on
the
subject
matter.
But
in
general,
most
quantum
mechanics
problems
do
not
have
closed
form
solution.
We
have
to
resort
to
approximate
or
numerical
methods
to
solve
such
problems.
6.2
Use
of
an
Approximate
Subspace
We
have
seen
that
in
general,
a
Schrodinger
equation
problem
can
be
cast
into
a
matrix
equation
by
projecting
it
into
a
space
spanned
by
countably
in
nite
orthonormal
basis
functions.
With
such
a
basis,
we
de
ne
an
identity
operator
I
=
j nih n|
(6.2.1)
n=1
Given
a
general
time
independent
Schrodinger
equation,
which
is
^
Hj .
=
Ej .
(6.2.2)
we
can
rst
insert
an
identity
operator
between
H
and
j i.
Then
the
above
becomes
Hj nih nj .
=
Ej .
(6.2.3)
n=1
57
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Testing
the
above
by
multiplying
it
from
the
left
with
h mj,
m
=1;:::,
1,
we
have1
h mjH^
j nih nj .
=
Eh mj i;m
=1;:::,
8
(6.2.4)
n=1
The
above
is
a
matrix
equation
of
the
form
Hmnfn
=
Efm;m
=1;:::,
8
(6.2.5)
n=1
It
corresponds
to
an
in
nite
dimension
matrix,
but
it
can
be
truncated
to
form
a
nite
matrix
system
H
�
f
=
Ef
(6.2.6)
The
above
is
a
matrix
eigenvalue
problem
that
can
be
solved
numerically.
If
H
is
N
#N,
it
will
have
N
eigenvalues
and
N
eigenvectors.
If
we
choose
our
basis
functions
appropriately,
and
are
only
interested
in
certain
eigenvalues,
which
represent
the
energy
levels
of
the
stationary
states,
we
need
only
to
pick
a
small
set
of
basis
functions.
Therefore,
N
can
be
a
small
number.
This
is
important
because
the
number
of
computer
operations
needed
to
nd
the
eigenvectors
and
eigenvalues
of
the
above
problem
is
proportional
to
N3
.
In
solving
the
above,
we
will
have
to
form
the
matrix
elements
Hmn.
For
an
in
nite
potential
well,
whose
well
bottom
has
been
distorted,
we
can
use
the
eigenfunctions
of
the
at-bottom
well
as
our
basis
functions.
Then,
the
matrix
elements
Hmn
are
explicitly
given
as
.
L
#.
.
d2
Hmn
=
dx.
*
(x)
-
+
V
(x)
n(x)
(6.2.7)
dx2
0
2mo
We
can
use
integration
by
parts
to
convert
the
term
that
involves
second
derivative
to
a
form
that
involves
only
rst
derivatives.
That
is
.
L
#.
.
dd
Hmn
=
dx
.
*
(x)
n(x)+
.
*
(x)V
(x) n(x)
(6.2.8)
mm
dx
dx
0
2mo
which
is
a
more
symmetric
form.
In
the
above,
we
have
used
the
boundary
condition
of
the
eigenfunctions
to
remove
the
extraneous
term
resulting
from
integration
by
parts.
Modern
numerical
methods
have
allowed
us
to
use
exible
basis
set
to
expand
our
unknown
functions.
For
example,
we
can
let
j .
=
anjfn.
(6.2.9)
n=1
where
fn(x)
need
not
be
orthogonal
or
complete
in
Hilbert
space,
but
they
can
approximate
the
unknown
function
(x)
well.
Also,
fn(x);n
=1;:::;N
spans
an
N
dimensional
vector
1This
procedure
is
called
testing
or
weighting
in
the
mathematics
literature,
h m|
is
called
the
testing
or
weighting
function.
Approximate
Methods
in
Quantum
Mechanics
space
that
is
the
subspace
of
the
Hilbert
space.
We
assume
that
the
solution
in
the
subspace
is
a
good
approximation
of
the
solution
in
the
original
in
nite
dimensional
Hilbert
space.
Examples
of
such
nite
basis
set
are
triangle
functions
shown
in
Figure
6.1.
Using
(6.2.9)
in
(6.2.2),
we
have
N.
n=1
^H
jfnian
=
E
N.
n=1
anjfn.
(6.2.10)
Multiplying
the
above
from
hfm|
from
the
left,
we
have
N.
n=1
hfm|
^H
jfnian
=
E
N.
n=1
hfmjfnian
(6.2.11)
The
above
is
a
matrix
system
of
the
form
~H
�
a
=
EB
�
a
(6.2.12)
In
the
above,
=
hfmjH^
jfn.
mn
=
hfm
mn
jfn.
[a]=
an
(6.2.13)
The
equation
(6.2.12)
above
is
a
generalized
eigenvalue
problem
with
eigenvalue
E
and
eigenvector
a.
The
di#erence
of
it
from
(6.2.6)
is
that
a
matrix
B
is
on
the
right-hand
side.
But
numerical
software
to
seek
the
eigenvalues
and
eigenvectors
for
such
generalized
eigenvalue
problems
are
widely
available.
The
approximate
subspace
method
is
varyingly
known
as
the
subspace
projection
method,
Galerkin's
method,
Petrov-Galerkin
method,
weighted-residual
method,
and
the
method
of
moments.
The
nite
element
method
falls
under
the
same
category.
6.3
Time
Independent
Perturbation
Theory
Let
us
assume
that
we
can
solve
a
problem
when
it
is
unperturbed,
such
as
the
in
nite
potential
well
problem.
We
like
to
solve
the
problem
when,
say
there
is
a
small
electric
eld
in
the
well
indicated
by
a
potential
with
a
gradient,
or
that
the
well
is
imperfect
due
to
some
impurities
indicated
by
a
small
bump
(see
Figure
6.2).
The
Schrodinger
equation
for
the
perturbed
system
can
be
written
as
(H^
0
+
H^
p)j#.
=
Ej#.
(6.3.1)
where
H0
is
the
Hamiltonian
of
the
unperturbed
system
whose
solution
is
known,
and
H^
p
^
is
due
to
the
small
perturbation
where
.
is
a
small
parameter.
Here,
H0
can
be
the
Hamiltonian
of
the
in
nite
potential
well,
for
instance.
In
the
above
equation,
j#.
and
E
are
both
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
6.1:
The
triangle
functions
for
a
piecewise
linear
approximation
of
a
function.
This
is
a
basis
that
is
not
orthogonal
but
yet
can
be
used
to
seek
approximate
solutions
to
(6.2.12).
Figure
6.2:
The
in
nite
potential
well
on
the
left
represents
the
unperturbed
problem.
The
middle
gure
represents
a
perturbation
due
to
a
tiny
electric
eld.
The
right
gure
represents
a
perturbation
due
to
imperfection
in
fabrication
or
impurities.
unknowns,
but
we
can
write
them
in
a
perturbation
series
or
expansion,
namely
j#.
=
j#(0).
+
j#(1).
+
2j#(2).
+
::.
(6.3.2)
E
=
E(0)
+
E(1)
+
2E(2)
+
::.
(6.3.3)
Upon
substituting
the
above
series
into
(6.3.1),
we
obtain
^
H0
+
H^
p
j#(0).
+
j#(1).
+
2j#(2).
+
::.
##.
.
E(0)
+
E(1)
+
2E(2)
=+
::.
j#(0).
+
j#(1).
+
2j#(2).
+
::.
(6.3.4)
The
left-hand
side
of
(6.3.4)
can
be
expanded
and
rewritten
on
a
power
series
in
.
a0
+
a1.
+
a22
+
::.
(6.3.5)
while
the
right-hand
side
is
similarly
written
as
b0
+
b1.
+
b22
+
::.
(6.3.6)
Approximate
Methods
in
Quantum
Mechanics
These
two
power
series
in
.
are
equal
only
if
ai
=
bi,
i
=0,
1,
:::,
1.
Equating
the
coe#cients
of
the
power
series
on
both
sides
of
(6:3:4)
we
have
the
following
equations:
Zeroth
Order:
H^
0j#(0).
=
E(0)j#(0).
(6.3.7)
First
Order:
H^
0j#(1).
+^j#(0).
=
E(0)j#(1).
+
E(1)j#(0)i
Hp(6.3.8)
Second
Order:
H^
0j#(2).
+
H^
pj#(1).
=
E(0)j#(2).
+
E(1)j#(1).
+
E(2)j#(0).
(6.3.9)
We
assume
that
the
zeroth
order
equation
is
known
in
terms
of
an
eigenstate
j m.
with
energy
Em.
In
other
words
j#(0).
=
j mE(0)
i,
=
Em
(6.3.10)
We
will
use
this
knowledge
to
solve
the
rst
order
equation
(6:3:8)
above.
Before
we
proceed
further,
a
note
is
in
order
regarding
the
uniqueness
of
the
eigenvalue
problem
(6.3.1).
An
eigenvector
is
known
only
within
a
multiplicative
factor.
Hence,
its
length
is
indeterminate.
This
non-uniqueness
in
its
length
manifests
in
the
non-uniqueness
of
the
value
of
the
perturbation
series
(6.3.2)
as
we
shall
see
later.
To
achieve
uniqueness,
it
is
best
to
pin
down
the
length
of
the
total
eigenvector
given
by
(6.3.2).
We
x
the
length
of
the
eigenvector
j#.
by
requiring
that
h mj#.
=
1
(6.3.11)
j#(0)i
With
this
requirement,
we
substitute
(6.3.2)
into
the
above.
Since
h m=
1,
because
j#(0).
=
j mi,
it
is
easy
to
show
that
h mj#(i).
=
0,
i>
0.
As
a
consequence,
j#(i).
is
orthogonal
to
j mi.
The
perturbation
series
is
not
necessarily
normalized,
but
it
can
be
normalized
later
after
the
series
has
been
calculated.
Next,
to
nd
the
rst
order
corrections
to
the
eigenvalue
and
the
eigenvector,
we
move
the
unknowns
j#(1).
to
the
left
of
(6:3:8).
We
then
have
H^
0
-
Em
j#(1).
=
E(1)j mi-
H^
pj m.
(6.3.12)
where
we
have
made
use
of
(6:3:10).
Notice
that
the
above
equation
is
non-unique
since
the
operator
H0
-
Em
has
a
null
space
with
a
null
space
vector
j mi.
Testing
the
above
equation
with
h mj,
we
have
h mjH^
0
-
Emj#(1).
=
E(1)
..h mjH^
pj m.
(6.3.13)
2This
can
be
easily
proved
by
setting
.
=
0,
which
immediately
implies
that
a0
=
b0.
By
di#erentiating
the
power
series
again
and
let
.
=
0,
we
prove
that
ai
=
bi
etc.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
^^
But
h m|
H0
-
Em
=
0
because
H0j m.
=
Emj mi.
Hence,
the
above
gives
E(1)
=
h mjH^
pj m.
(6.3.14)
the
rst
order
correction
to
the
energy
of
the
perturbed
system.
Therefore,
one
of
the
two
unknowns
in
(6.3.12)
is
found.
The
remaining
unknown
j#(1).
can
be
expanded
in
terms
of
the
eigenfunctions
of
the
unperturbed
system,
that
is
j#(1).
=
a(1)j n.
(6.3.15)
n
n
First,
testing
the
equation
(6.3.12)
with
h ij,
we
have
h ijH^
0
-
Emj#(1).
=
E(1)h ij mi..h ijH^
pj m.
(6.3.16)
Upon
substituting
(6.3.15)
into
the
above,
the
left-hand
side
evaluates
to
(1)
(1)
h ijEi
-
Emj#(1).
=(Ei
-
Em)
h ijaj n.
=(Ei
-
Em)a(6.3.17)
ni
n
The
right-hand
side
of
(6.3.16),
for
i
6Hpi.
Hence
=
m,
is
just
..h i|
^j m
(1)
h ijH^
pj m.
a=
;i
6(6.3.18)
=
m
i
Em
-
Ei
When
i
=
m,
(6.3.17)
evaluates
to
zero,
while
the
right
hand
side
of
(6.3.16)
also
evaluates
(1)
(1)
to
zero
because
of
(6.3.14).
Hence
am
is
unde
ned.
We
choose
am
=
0
for
a
number
of
reasons:
It
makes
the
correction
term
unique
since
j (1).
is
orthogonal
to
j (0)i.
It
makes
the
normalization
of
the
eigenvector
j#.
accurate
to
second
order
even
though
the
correction
is
rst
order.
It
will
also
make
the
second
order
corrections
much
simpler
to
nd.
To
nd
the
second
order
corrections,
we
rewrite
(6.3.9)
with
the
unknown
j#(2).
on
the
left
hand
side.
Then
(6.3.9)
becomes
H^
0
-
Em
j#(2).
=
E(1)j#(1).
+
E(2)j mi-
H^
pj#(1).
(6.3.19)
Testing
the
above
with
h mj,
the
left
hand
side
becomes
zero
as
before.3
Since
we
have
made
j#(1).
orthogonal
to
j mi,
on
the
right-hand
side,
only
the
last
two
terms
remain.
Consequently,
0=
E(2)
..h mjH^
pj#(1).
(6.3.20)
or
E(2)
=
h mjH^
pj#(1).
(6.3.21)
3Again,
the
above
is
non-unique
for
the
same
reason
cited
for
(6.3.12).
Approximate
Methods
in
Quantum
Mechanics
63
Letting
j#(2).
=
.
n
a(2)
n
j n.
(6.3.22)
and
substituting
it
into
the
left
side
of
(6.3.19),
testing
with
h ij,
we
have
(Ei
-
Em)a(2)
i
=
E(1)h ij#(1).
+
E(2)#im
-
h i|
^H
pj#(1).
Therefore,
for
i
6
=
m,
(6.3.23)
a(2)
i
=
h i|
^H
pj#(1).
Em
-
Ei
-
E(1)a(1)
i
Em
-
Ei
(6.3.24)
(2)
(2)
When
i
=
m,
both
sides
of
(6.3.23)
vanish,
and
am
is
unde
ned.
Again,
we
pick
am
=0
to
obtain
a
unique
solution.
The
above
procedure
can
be
generalized
to
arbitrary
order.
By
induction,
we
notice
that
the
equivalence
of
(6.3.9)
to
p-th
order
is
H^
0j#(p).
+
H^
pj#(p..1).
=
E(0)j#(p).
+
E(1)j#(p..1).
+
##�
+
E(p)j#(0).
(6.3.25)
The
above
can
be
rewritten
as
H^
0
-
E(0)
j#(p).
=
E(1)j#(p..1).
+
##�
+
E(p)j#(0)i-
H^
pj#(p..1).
(6.3.26)
Testing
the
above
with
h m|
gives
E(p)
=
h mjH^
pj#(p..1).
(6.3.27)
Letting
(p)
j#(p).
=
aj n.
(6.3.28)
n
n
in
(6.3.25),
and
testing
with
h ij,
one
can
easily
show,
for
i
=6m,
and
after
noting
that
E(0)
=
Em,
j#(0).
=
j m
i,
that
(p)
1
(p..1)
-
E(2)(p..2)
(1)
a=
h ijH^
pj#(p..1)i-
E(1)aa+
###-
E(p..1)a(6.3.29)
i
iii
Em
-
Ei
It
is
to
be
noted
that
with
modern
advent
of
computer
technology,
and
given
the
availability
of
numerical
methods,
the
calculation
of
perturbation
theory
to
very
high
order
is
laborious
and
not
necessary.
However,
a
perturbation
correction
can
give
us
insight
on
how
a
small
change
in
the
Hamiltonian
can
change
the
solution.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
6.3:
The
tight
binding
model
can
be
used
to
nd
the
approximate
eigenstates
of
two
quantum
wells
that
are
weakly
coupled
to
each
other.
The
eigenstates
of
the
isolated
quantum
wells
are
known
(Figure
is
from
DAB
Miller).
6.4
Tight
Binding
Model
The
tight
binding
model
is
a
way
to
nd
the
solution
to
two
weakly
coupled
quantum
systems
when
the
solution
to
each
isolated
quantum
system
is
known
(see
Figure
6.3).
To
solve
this
system,
we
can
use
the
subspace
projection
method
of
nonorthogonal
basis
to
derive
the
relevant
matrix
equation.
Given
the
Schrodinger
equation
H
j .
=
E
j .
(6.4.1)
we
let
j .
=
ai
j i.
(6.4.2)
i=1
where
j 1.
is
the
eigenfunction
of
the
ground
state
of
well
1
in
isolation
and
j 2.
is
the
eigenfunction
of
the
ground
state
of
well
2.
Going
through
the
same
procedure
we
have
had
before,
we
arrive
at
22
ai
h j
|
H^
j i.
=
Eai
h j|
i.
(6.4.3)
i=1
i=1
Approximate
Methods
in
Quantum
Mechanics
The
above
is
the
same
as
the
matrix
equation
H
�
a
=
EB
�
a
(6.4.4)
where
.
.
H
ij.
.
=
h i|
^H
j j.
(6.4.5)
B
ij
=
h i|
j
.
(6.4.6)
It
is
easy
to
show
that
H
and
B
are
Hermitian
matrices.4
In
the
above,
we
can
assume
that
j i.
is
quasi-orthonormal,
so
that
h i|
j
.
.
#ij
(6.4.7)
Then
we
can
write
the
system
(6.4.4)
as
.
#.
.
.
#.
.
E1
#Ea1
1#Ba1
=
E
(6.4.8)
#E*
E1
a2
#B*
1
a2
The
off
diagonal
elements
are
conjugate
of
each
other
because
the
matrix
is
Hermitian.
Moreover,
#E
.
E1
and
#B
.
1.
These
terms
are
small
because
the
overlap
between
the
eigenfunctions
1
and
2
is
small.
The
further
apart
the
wells
are,
the
smaller
these
terms
would
be,
as
the
overlap
is
smaller.
When
the
wells
are
in
nite
far
apart,
the
off
diagonal
terms
vanish
and
the
two
quantum
systems
are
uncoupled
from
each
other.
The
two
eigenvalues
are
then
degenerate.
The
eigenvalue
of
(6.4.8)
above
is
obtained
by
solving
E1
-
E
#E
-
E#B
det
=
0
(6.4.9)
#E*
-
E#B*
E1
-
E
or
22
(E1
-
E)..j#E
-
E#Bj=
0
(6.4.10)
Since
the
E#B
on
the
left-hand
side
of
the
above
is
small,
we
do
not
incur
much
error
by
replacing
it
with
E1#B.
Upon
solving
the
above,
we
have
E
#(6.4.11)
=
E1
#j#E1
-
E#Bj
Note
that
the
degenerate
eigenvalues
are
now
split
into
two
non-degenerate
eigenvalues.
The
corresponding
eigenvectors
can
be
found,
and
the
eigenfunctions
are
of
the
form
11
-
=
v
( 1
+
2)
; +
=
v
( 1
-
2)
(6.4.12)
22
The
eigenfunctions
are
due
to
odd
and
even
coupling
between
the
isolated
quantum
states
of
the
two
wells
as
they
are
brought
closer
together.
4It
can
be
easily
shown
that
the
matrix
representation
of
a
Hermitian
operator
remains
Hermitian.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
6.4.1
Variational
Method
Given
an
eigenvalue
problem
denoted
by
^
H
j#.
=
E
j#.
(6.4.13)
we
can
convert
the
above
into
a
matrix
generalized
eigenvalue
problem
H
�
a
=
E
B
�
a
(6.4.14)
We
next
convert
the
above
into
a
functional
by
multiplying
it
with
a#�
to
obtain
�
H
�
a
=
E
a
�
B
�
a
(6.4.15)
By
setting
a
=
a0
+
#a,
E
=
E0
+
#E,
where
a0
and
E0
are
the
exact
solution
to
(6:4:14),
and
then
taking
the
rst
variation
of
(6:4:15)
we
have
#a
�
H
�
a0
+
a0
�
0
�
B
�
a0
+
E0
�
#a
�
H
�
#a
=
#E
a
�
B
�
a0
(6.4.16)
+E0a
�
0
�
B
�
#a
If
a0
and
E0
are
exact
solution
to
(6:4:16),
they
satisfy
H
�
a0
=
E0
B
�
a0
(6.4.17)
�
H
=
E0a
�
B0
(6.4.18)
Then
the
term
multiplied
by
#a�
and
#a
cancel
each
other
on
both
sides
and
we
have,
to
rst
order,
0=
#E
a
�
B
�
a0
(6.4.19)
The
above
implies
that
#E
is
zero.
It
means
that
if
we
were
to
use
(6:4:15)
to
nd
E
by
writing
it
as
�
H
�
a
E
=
(6.4.20)
a�
�
B
�
a
and
if
we
substitute
inexact
or
approximate
value
for
a
=
a0
+
#a,
the
value
we
obtain
for
E
is
second
order
accurate
since
#E
=
0.
The
above
is
known
as
the
Rayleigh
quotient.
To
begin
with,
we
need
an
estimate
of
the
solution
that
is
quite
close
to
the
exact
solution
so
that
#a
is
small.
In
other
words,
it
allows
one
to
substitute
in
approximate
value
of
a
that
is
just
rst-order
accurate,
and
yet
get
an
estimate
of
the
eigenvalue
or
energy
E
that
is
second-order
accurate.
A
more
general
form
of
the
Rayleigh
quotient
is
to
test
(6.4.13)
with
h#|
and
convert
it
into
a
functional.
The
corresponding
Rayleigh
quotient
is
h#jH^
j#.
E
=
(6.4.21)
h#j#.
It
assumes
that
j#.
is
not
normalized.
In
the
above,
it
can
be
proved
by
the
same
token
that
an
approximate,
rst-order
accurate
value
of
j#.
can
yield
a
second-order
accurate
estimate
of
E.
Rayleigh
quotient
is
great
for
estimating
the
eigenvalues
when
only
approximate
eigenfunctions
are
known.
These
eigenfunctions
are
also
called
trial
functions.
A
systematic
way
to
estimate
these
eigenfunctions
is
known
as
the
Rayleigh-Ritz
method.
Approximate
Methods
in
Quantum
Mechanics
6.4.2
Time
Dependent
Perturbation
Theory
Now,
we
assume
that
the
perturbating
Hamiltonian
is
a
function
of
time.
In
other
words,
we
have
a
Schrodinger
equation
where
i.
j .
=
H
j .
(6.4.22)
@t
and
H^
=
H^
0
+
H^
p
(t)
(6.4.23)
where
H^
p
(t)
is
time
varying.5
It
can
come
from
an
external
electric
eld
that
is
time-harmonic,
for
instance.
We
also
assume
that
we
can
solve
the
unperturbed
system
in
terms
of
stationary
states,
namely
H0
j n.
=
En
j n.
(6.4.24)
The
total
time
dependent
wavefunction
can
be
expanded
in
terms
of
the
stationary
states,
namely
..i!n
j .
=
an
(t)
e
t
j n.
(6.4.25)
n
where
~!n
=
En,
and
an
(t)
is
a
function
of
time.
Substituting
the
above
into
(6:4:22),
we
have
.
1
..i!n..i!n
j .
=
(_an
(t)
-
i!n)
e
t
j n.
=
Han
(t)
e
t
j n.
(6.4.26)
@t
i.
nn
1
..i!nt
=
an
(t)
eEn
j n.
+
H^
p(t)
j n.
i.
(6.4.27)
where
_an
(t)=
@an
(t)
=@t.
Since
En
=
~!n,
the
En
term
on
the
right-hand
side
cancels
the
!n
term
on
the
left-hand
side.
Finally
we
have
a_n
(t)
e
..i!nt
j n.
=
an
(t)
e
..i!ntH^
p(t)
j n.
(6.4.28)
i.
nn
To
simplify
the
equation
further,
we
test
it
with
h q|
to
get
..i!qt
..i!n
a_q
(t)
e
=
an
(t)
e
t
h q|
H^
p(t)
j n.
(6.4.29)
i.
The
above
equation
is
exact
as
of
this
point.
To
solve
it
further,
we
expand
(0)
+
a(1)
(2)
an
=
an
+
2
an
##�
(6.4.30)
5To
be
precise,
the
Hamiltonian
of
a
system
has
to
be
a
constant
of
motion,
since
it
represents
the
conservation
of
energy.
But
when
a
quantum
system
is
coupled
to
another
quantum
system
to
which
energy
is
transferred,
the
rst
Hamiltonian
may
not
be
a
constant
anymore.
But
we
can
assume
that
the
perturbing
Hamiltonian
is
small.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Using
the
above
in
(6.4.29),
and
matching
terms
of
like
orders,
we
have
(0)
a_q
(t)
=
0
(6.4.31)
(0)
or
that
aq
is
a
constant.
By
matching
terms
of
the
rst
order,
we
have
(1)
(0)
i!qnth q|
^
a_q
(t)=
ae
Hp(t)j n.
(6.4.32)
i.
where
!qn
=
!q
..!n.
To
make
things
simpler,
we
can
assume
that
the
electron
is
in
the
m-th
stationary
state
before
we
turn
on
the
perturbation
H^
p(t).
Namely,
(0)
..i!m..i!m
j .
=
ae
tj m.
=
e
tj m.
(6.4.33)
(0)
In
the
above,
since
if
only
one
state
exists,
am
=
1
by
normalization.
Then,
(6.4.32)
becomes
a_(1)(t)=
a(0)e
i!qmth qjH^
p(t)j m.
(6.4.34)
q
i~m
We
assume
the
perturbing
Hamiltonian
to
be
of
the
form:
.
>0,
t<
0
^^..i!t
i!t);
Hp(t)=
Hp0(e+
e0
<t<t0
(6.4.35)
>
0,
t>t0
so
that
it
is
turned
on
only
for
a
time
window
0
<t<t0.
Then
for
t>t0,
by
integrating
(6.4.34),
we
have
.
t0
aq
(1)
=
1
h qjH^
p(t0)j mie
i!qmtdt.
(6.4.36)
i.
0
.
t0
##
1
00
i(!qm..!)ti(!qm+!)t
=
h qjH^
p0)j m.
e
+
e
dt.
(6.4.37)
i~0
i(!qm..!)t0
i(!qm+!)t0
-
1
1
e-
1
e
=
..h qjH^
p0)j m.
+
(6.4.38)
i~!qm
-
!!qm
+
.
.
#.
##.
t0
i(!qm..!)t0
(!qm
-
!)t0
i(!qm+!)t0
(!qm
+
!)t0
22
=
..h qjH^
p0)j m.
e
sinc
+
e
sinc
i~22
(6.4.39)
The
probability
of
nding
the
state
in
q-state
is
(1)
P
(q)=
jaj2
(6.4.40)
or
#.
#.
#.
t2
0
(!qm
-
!)t0
(!qm
+
!)t0
P
(q)
�
jh qjH^
p0)j mij2
sinc2
+
sinc2
(6.4.41)
~2
22
Approximate
Methods
in
Quantum
Mechanics
where
we
have
ignored
the
cross
terms
since
the
sinc
functions
in
(6.4.39)
are
highly
peaked
at
.
=
#!qm
when
t0
!1;
and
hence
their
cross
terms
are
small.
The
above
equation
means
that
the
probability
of
transition
from
the
m
to
the
q
eigenstate
is
high
only
if
.
=
#!qm
=
#(!q
-
!m)
(6.4.42)
or
that
~.
=
#(~!q
-
~!m)=
#(Eq
-
Em)
(6.4.43)
The
\+�
sign
corresponds
to
when
the
electron
jumps
from
a
low
energy
Em
to
high
energy
Eq
requiring
the
absorption
of
a
photon
with
energy
~.
=(Eq
-
Em).
The\..�
sign
in
(6.4.43)
corresponds
to
the
electron
dropping
from
a
high
energy
state
Em
to
a
low
energy
state
Eq
emitting
a
photon
with
energy
~.
=(Em
..Eq).
This
is
known
as
the
Fermi's
golden
rule.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Chapter
7
Quantum
Mechanics
in
Crystals
7.1
Introduction
In
a
crystal,
the
atoms
are
located
in
a
periodic
lattice.
Hence,
when
an
electron
wave
propagates
on
a
lattice,
it
is
propagating
in
a
periodic
structure.
However,
the
real
world
is
not
that
simple.
Usually,
there
are
more
than
one
electron
traveling
in
a
lattice.
The
electrons
see
each
other's
electric
eld
or
potentials.
There
will
be
electron-electron
interaction
that
has
to
be
accounted
for.
Moreover,
electrons
are
fermions
meaning
that
they
obey
Pauli's
exclusion
principle.
Two
electrons
cannot
be
in
the
same
state
simultaneously.
There
are
many-body
e#ects,
but
we
will
ignore
them
here.
The
many-body
e#ect
can
be
lumped
approximately
into
an
e#ective
potential.
We
will
assume
that
the
e#ective
potential
is
still
periodic,
even
though
this
may
not
be
true.
Another
e#ect
is
that
as
an
electron
moves
through
a
lattice,
the
attractive
force
between
the
electron
and
a
nucleus
of
the
atoms
distort
the
lattice
locations.
This
gives
rise
to
lattice
vibrations
called
phonons.
We
will
ignore
electron-phonon
coupling
here.
In
a
periodic
lattice,
the
atoms
are
located
at
the
lattice
points
given
by
RL
=
n1a1
+
n2a2
+
n3a3
(7.1.1)
where
a1,
a2,
a3
are
lattice
vectors,
and
n1,
n2,
n3
are
integers.
Every
lattice
point
can
be
related
to
every
other
lattice
point
by
a
proper
choice
of
n1,
n2,
and
n3.
Assuming
that
an
electron
sees
a
periodic
potential
in
a
lattice,
then
VP
(r
+
RL)=
VP
(r)
(7.1.2)
The
single
electron
sees
this
periodic
potential
and
its
wavefunction
satis
es
~2
r2
-
+
VP
(r)
(r)=
E (r)
(7.1.3)
2me
We
will
study
next
the
kind
of
wave
that
can
propagate
in
this
periodic
potential,
known
as
Bloch-Floquet
waves.1
1In
the
subsequent
discussions,
we
will
replace
me
with
m,
with
implicit
understanding
that
this
is
the
e#ective
mass.
71
72
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
7.2
Bloch-Floquet
Waves
Let
us
study
the
case
of
a
wave
propagating
in
a
1-D
periodic
structure,
where
V
(x)
may
look
like
that
of
Figure
7.1.
Figure
7.1:
A
1D
periodic
structure
of
a
potential
pro
le
for
V
(x)
where
a
Bloch-Floquet
wave
can
travel
on
it.
The
periodicity
of
the
potential
is
a.
Let
us
assume
that
the
wave
that
can
exist
on
such
a
structure
is
of
the
form
ikx
(k,
x)=
eup(x)
(7.2.1)
This
wavefunction
must
satisfy
the
1-D
Schrodinger
equation
that
~2
d2
-
+
VP
(x)
(k,
x)=
E (k,
x)
(7.2.2)
2m
dx2
In
order
for
(k,
x)
to
satisfy
the
above,
up(x)
has
to
satisfy
a
certain
condition.
Since
the
above
is
a
periodic
structure,
if
one
translate
the
coordinate
such
that
x
.
x
+
na,
then
VP
(x)
.
VP
(x
+
na)=
VP
(x)
which
remains
unchanged.
Letting
x
.
x
+
na
in
(7.2.1),
we
have
ikx
ikna
(k,
x)
.
(k,
x
+
na)=
ee
up(x
+
na)
(7.2.3)
This
new
wavefunction
must
be
a
solution
of
Schrodinger
equation
as
well.
In
order
for
it
to
satisfy
(7.2.2),
we
require
that
up(x
+
na)=
up(x),
for
all
n.
(7.2.4)
ikna
In
other
words,
up(x)
is
a
periodic
function
of
x.
Since
eis
just
a
constant,
it
is
clear
that
(x
+
na)
satis
es
the
same
equation
as
(7.2.2).
Hence,
the
form
of
(7.2.1)
that
satis
es
(7.2.2)
has
to
be
such
that
up(x)
is
a
periodic
function.
Equation
(7.2.1)
represents
a
traveling
wave
modulated
by
a
periodic
function
up(x).
However,
up(x)
is
more
rapidly
varying
than
ikx
e
.
Such
a
wave
is
a
Bloch
wave
or
a
Bloch-Floquet
wave.
Noting
that
the
second
derivative
of
(7.2.1)
is
given
by
d2
##
ikx
ikx
.
ikx
0.
dx2
eup(x)=
..k2
eup(x)+2ikeikx
up(x)+
eup
(x),
(7.2.5)
Quantum
Mechanics
in
Crystals
substituting
(7.2.1)
into
(7.2.2),
and
using
the
above,
we
have
~2
#.
....k2
up(x)+2iku.
(x)+
u
(x)+
Vp(x)up(x)=
Eup(x)
(7.2.6)
pp
2m
In
the
above,
if
Vp(x)
=
0,
a
simple
solution
to
the
above
is
up(x)
a
constant
with
E
=
(~k)2=(2m).
Then
the
Bloch-Floquet
wave
becomes
a
simple
traveling
wave.
Otherwise,
we
can
rewrite
(7.2.6)
as
~2
d2
d
-
+2ik
-
k2
+
Vp(x)
up(x)=
Eup(x)
(7.2.7)
2m
dx2
dx
with
up(x)
satisfying
the
periodic
boundary
condition
within
period
a.
The
above
is
a
simple
eigenvalue
problem
with
eigenvector
up(x)
and
eigenvalue
E.
We
can
use
matrix
method
to
convert
the
above
into
a
matrix
equation
Hmnan
=
EBmnan
(7.2.8)
nn
by
letting
up(x)=
an#n(x),
and
testing
with
#m(x).
One
also
ensures
that
the
choice
of
n=1
basis
is
such
that
the
periodic
boundary
condition
is
satis
ed.
Here,
#n(x)
are
not
necessarily
orthogonal.
In
the
above,
Hmn
=
h#mjH^
pj#ni;Bmn
=
h#mj#n.
(7.2.9)
where
~2
d2
d
H^
p
=
-
+2ik
-
k2
+
Vp
(x)
(7.2.10)
2m
dx2
dx
Notice
that
H^
p
is
a
function
of
k,
and
so
Hmn
is
a
function
of
k.
Therefore,
(7.2.8)
can
be
written
as
a
generalized
eigenvalue
problem
H(k)
�
a
=
EB
�
a
(7.2.11)
In
the
above,
we
have
explicitly
denoted
that
H(k)
is
a
function
of
k.
Hence,
we
have
to
x
k
in
order
to
solve
the
eigenvalue
problem
(7.2.7),
or
the
generalized
matrix
eigenvalue
problem
(7.2.11).
Therefore,
the
eigenvalue
E
obtained
is
a
function
of
k,
the
wavenumber
in
the
Bloch-Floquet
wave
(7.2.1).
In
general,
a
E(k)
plot
will
look
like
that
in
Figure
7.2.
2p#
For
each
k
value,
there
are
many
possible
values
of
E.
Also,
in
(7.2.1),
if
we
let
k
.
k+,
where
p
is
an
integer
value,
then,
(7.2.1)
becomes
2ip#
ikx
x
ikx
~
.
(k,
x)
.
.
(k
+2p#=a,
x)=
eup
(x)
e
a
=
eup
(x)
(7.2.12)
2ipp
a
Notice
that
e
is
a
periodic
function;
hence,
it
can
be
lumped
with
up
(x)
to
form
a
new
u~p
(x)
periodic
function.
They
satisfy
the
same
equation
(7.2.7)
with
the
same
k
value.
Therefore,
up
(x)
and
~up
(x)
share
the
same
set
of
eigenvalues.
They
are
the
same
eigenfunctions
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
7.2:
The
E-k
diagram
or
band
structure
diagram
of
a
Bloch-Floquet
wave
propagating
in
a
1D
periodic
structure.
within
a
multiplicative
constant.
Consequently,
E
(k)
is
a
periodic
function
in
k
with
period
2p
.
Each
of
this
period
is
called
the
Brillouin
zone.
The
zone
that
is
centered
about
the
origin
is
called
the
rst
Brillouin
zone.
Furthermore,
since
everything
in
the
operator
of
(7.2.2)
is
real,
#(k,
x)
is
also
a
solution
of
it
whenever
(k,
x)
is
a
solution.
But
..ikx
*
.
*
(k,
x)=
eu
(x)
(7.2.13)
is
also
a
Bloch-Floquet
wave
with
..k
wavenumber.
In
fact,
up(x)
satis
es
an
equation
that
is
the
conjugate
of
(7.2.7).
But
since
the
operator
in
(7.2.7)
is
Hermitian,
its
matrix
representation
remains
Hermitian.
Furthermore,
the
eigenvalues
are
real,
and
remain
unchanged
even
when
the
equation
is
conjugated.
Since
up(x)
is
periodic
function
with
period
a,
it
can
be
expanded
as
a
Fourier
series,
namely
1
in#x=(2a)
up(x)=
ane(7.2.14)
n=..8
7.3
Bloch-Floquet
Theorem
for
3D
In
three
dimensions,
the
Bloch-Floquet
wave
looks
like
ik#r
(k,
r)=
eup(r)
(7.3.1)
with
the
property
that
up(r
+
RL)=
up(r)
(7.3.2)
We
can
expand
up(r)
as
a
generalized
Fourier
series
iG#r
up(r)=
aGe
(7.3.3)
G
Quantum
Mechanics
in
Crystals
where
G
represents
points
on
the
reciprocal
lattice
denoted
by
G
=
l1b1
+
l2b2
+
l3b3
(7.3.4)
with
the
property
that
iG#RL
e
=
1
(7.3.5)
where
RL
=
n1a1
+
n2a2
+
n3a3
(7.3.6)
In
the
above,
li
and
ni,
i
=1,
2,
3
are
integers.
The
above
property
indicates
that
up(r)
in
(7.3.3)
is
periodic
as
indicated
by
(7.3.2).
The
summation
in
(7.3.2)
is
over
all
possible
values
of
G
or
l1,
l2,
and
l3.
One
can
solve
for
b1,b2
and
b3
to
yield
a2
�
a3
a3
�
a1
a1
�
a2
b1
=2#,
b2
=2#,
b3
=2p
(7.3.7)
a1
�
(a2
�
a3)
a1
�
(a2
�
a3)
a1
�
(a2
�
a3)
for
this
G.
Then
by
back
substitution,
(7.3.5)
is
satis
ed.
Futhermore,
ik#r
iG#r
(k
+
G,
r)=
ee
up(r)
(7.3.8)
where
iG#(r+RL)
iG#r
e
=
e
(7.3.9)
iG#r
Since
it
is
a
periodic
function
on
the
lattice,
the
eterm
can
be
lumped
with
the
unit
cell
function
up(r);
therefore,
the
new
Bloch-Floquet
wave
is
ik#r
~
(k
+
G,
r)=
eup(r)
(7.3.10)
It
is
of
the
same
form
as
(7.3.1);
and
hence
will
yield
the
same
eigenvalues
as
(k,
r).
Consequently,
the
lattice
points
are
de
ned
by
the
lattice
vector
RL,
and
the
reciprocal
lattice
points
are
de
ned
by
the
reciprocal
lattice
vector
G.
The
Brillouin
zone
is
de
ned
by
the
reciprocal
lattice
points.
The
rst
Brillouin
zone
is
the
rst
unique
zone
centered
around
the
origin.
These
zones
in
3D
can
be
quite
complicated
as
shown
in
Figure
7.3.
The
band
structure
diagram
is
rather
complicated
and
is
usually
plot
with
E
versus
k
vector
along
prescribed
lines
in
the
rst
Brillouin
zone
as
shown
in
Figure
7.4.
We
can
take
yet
another
viewpoint
of
the
existence
of
band
structure
in
a
crystal.
We
have
studied
the
tight-binding
model
of
two
identical
quantum
wells.
This
can
be
extended
to
two
identical
atoms
as
shown
in
Figure
7.5.
The
gure
shows
how
the
energy
of
the
trapped
modes
of
the
atoms
are
split
versus
the
spacing
of
the
atoms
(as
we
have
found
on
our
tight
binding
model
in
the
previous
chapter).
The
closer
the
spacing,
the
stronger
is
the
coupling
between
the
modes,
and
the
larger
is
the
split
in
the
level
of
the
degenerate
modes.
If
we
have
a
system
with
billions
of
atoms,
each
atom
has
its
energy
levels
due
to
trapped
modes
in
the
atom.
If
the
inter-atomic
distance
is
large,
there
is
no
interaction
between
the
atoms,
and
energy
levels
will
be
many
billion
times
degenerate.
However,
when
the
interatomic
spacing
becomes
smaller,
the
wavefunctions
from
one
atom
will
overlap
with
the
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
7.3:
The
rst
Brillouin
zone
of
the
FCC
(face
centered
cubic)
lattice
(from
Wikipedia).
Figure
7.4:
The
band
structure
diagram
of
Silicon
along
prescribed
lines
in
the
rst
Brillouin
zone
(from
Warwich
Physics
Dept.).
Quantum
Mechanics
in
Crystals
Figure
7.5:
The
energy
levels
of
two
atoms
versus
the
atomic
spacing.
(from
Seeger,
Semiconductor
Physics).
Figure
7.6:
The
genesis
of
band
structure
as
the
interatomic
spacing
of
the
atoms
of
the
lattice
becomes
smaller
and
smaller.
(from
Fox,
Quantum
Optics).
78
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
neighboring
atoms
through
tunneling.
The
interatomic
coupling,
like
the
example
of
the
tight-binding
model,
will
split
the
energy
levels
and
make
them
into
a
continuous
band
of
energy.
This
give
rise
to
energy
band
where
energy
states
exist
and
energy
band
where
no
states
exist,
yielding
the
band
structures
we
have
seen.
As
we
have
seen
in
the
simple
case
of
the
tight-binding
model
study
of
two
quantum
wells,
the
degenerate
modes
split
into
even
and
odd
mode
coupling
between
them.
In
one
case,
the
modes
are
in
phase,
and
the
other
case,
the
modes
are
out
of
phase
with
respect
to
each
other.
When
multitude
of
mode
coupling
prevails,
there
could
be
in
nitely
many
possible
phase
relations
between
the
atomic
modes,
giving
rise
to
Bloch-Floquet
wave
with
di#erent
exp(ik
�
r)
across
the
lattice.
The
Bloch-Floquet
wave
establishes
the
phase
relationship
between
di#erent
trapped
modes
of
the
atoms
as
they
couple
to
each
other.
7.4
E#ective
Mass
Schrodinger
Equation
The
bottom
of
many
conduction
band
is
parabolic.
In
the
vicinity
of
k
=
0,
we
can
write
the
E-k
relation
as
~2k2
Ek
=+
V
(7.4.1)
2me
where
me
is
the
e#ective
mass
chosen
to
t
the
curvature
of
the
parabola,
and
V
is
the
energy
at
the
bottom
of
the
conduction
band.
We
can
write
the
Bloch-Floquet
wave
as
a
superposition
of
waves
with
di#erent
energies
or
k
values,
namely
ik#r
..i!kt
(r;t)=
ckuk(r)ee
;k
.
0,
~!k
=
Ek
(7.4.2)
k
When
k
.
0,
we
can
approximate
uk(r)=
u0(r)
(7.4.3)
so
that
ik#r
..i!kt
(r;t)=
u0(r)
ckee
=
u0(r) e(r;t)
(7.4.4)
where
e(r;t)
is
the
envelope
function,
namely
ik#r
..i!kt
e(r;t)=
ckee
(7.4.5)
k
Quantum
Mechanics
in
Crystals
79
We
can
show
that
@ e(r;t)
ik#r..i!kt
i~=
ckEke
@t
.
~2k2
ik#r..i!kt
=
ck
+
Ve
2me
~2r2
.
ik#r..i!kt
=
-
+
Vcke
(7.4.6)
2me
or
@ e(r;t)
~2r2
i~=
-
+
V e(r;t)
(7.4.7)
@t
2me
ik#r
The
above
is
the
e#ective
mass
Schrodinger
equation.
It
is
valid
when
k
is
small,
or
eis
slowly
varying
compared
to
the
lattice
spacing
a.
In
the
above,
we
can
assume
that
V
(r)
is
slowly
varying,
and
that
the
e#ective
mass
me(r)
is
also
a
slowly
varying
function
of
r.
Then
the
above
can
be
correctly
written
as
~2
1
.
..r�
r e(r;t)+
V
(r) e(r;t)=
i.
e(r;t)
(7.4.8)
2
me(r)
@t
The
essence
of
the
above
approximation
is
that
if
the
material
properties
are
slowly
varying
with
respect
to
the
lattice
spacing,
an
electron
\sees�
locally
an
environment
of
an
in
nite
lattice.
Consequently,
if
there
are
two
domains
with
di#erent
V
and
me,
the
above
equation
induces
the
boundary
conditions
at
the
interface
of
the
domains
as
e1(r)=
e2(r),
r
.
S
(7.4.9)
1
.
1
.
e1(r)=
e2(r),
r
.
S
(7.4.10)
me1
@n
me2
@n
where
S
is
the
interface
separating
the
two
domains
and
@=@n
refers
to
normal
derivative.
Even
though
V
(r)
and
me(r)
have
jump
discontinuities
at
such
an
interface,
we
assume
that
the
discontinuities
are
still
slowly
varying
compared
to
the
lattice
spacings.
7.5
Density
of
States
(DOS)
We
can
use
periodic
boundary
condition
to
discretize
the
k
vector
in
the
Bloch-Floquet
wave
so
that
it
is
countable,
or
that
2p
2p
2p
kL
=
l1
a^1
+
l2
a^2
+
l3
a^3
(7.5.1)
L1
L2
L3
In
one
dimension,
it
is
2p
kl
=
l
=
l#k
(7.5.2)
L
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
2#
where
#k
=
.
When
we
count
the
number
of
discrete
modes,
we
have
1
mode
per
#k
on
the
kl
real
line.
Or
the
density
of
states
is
g1D
(k)=1=#k
=
L=2p
(7.5.3)
The
number
of
states
is
proportional
to
the
length
of
L.
In
2D,
the
density
of
states
can
be
easily
derived
to
be
22
g2D
(k)=
L1L2/
(2#)=
A/
(2#)(7.5.4)
In
3D,
it
becomes
33
g3D
(k)=
L1L2L3/
(2#)=
V/
(2#)(7.5.5)
We
can
normalize
the
density
of
states
with
respect
to
length
L,
area
A,
and
volume
V
for
1D,
2D,
and
3D,
respectively.
Then
23
g1D
(k)=1=2#,
g2D
(k)=1/
(2#),
g3D
(k)=1/
(2#)(7.5.6)
E
0 k1 k2 k3 k4
Figure
7.7:
If
every
state
on
the
k
line
corresponds
to
a
state
on
the
E
line,
then
the
density
of
states
per
unit
length
on
the
E
line
is
di#erent
from
that
on
the
k
line.
We
may
want
to
count
the
density
of
states
per
unit
energy
instead
as
shown
by
the
above
E-k
diagram.
Even
though
the
states
are
evenly
spaced
on
the
k
line,
they
are
not
evenly
spread
on
the
E
line,
thereby,
altering
the
density
of
states
per
#E.
In
general,
we
can
write,
in
3D,
g
(E)
dE
=2g
(k)
d3k
=2g
(k)4#k2dk
(7.5.7)
=8#g
(k)
k2
dk
dE
dE
where
we
put
a
factor
of
2
for
two
electron
states
per
energy
state.
Therefore,
the
relation
between
DOS
on
the
E
line
and
the
k
line
is
g(E)=8#g(k)k2
dk
(7.5.8)
dE
Quantum
Mechanics
in
Crystals
81
Since
~2k2
E
=+
V
(7.5.9)
2me
for
a
free
electron,
we
have
2me
k
=
E
-
V
(7.5.10)
dk
me
1
=
v
(7.5.11)
dE
2~2
E
-
V
and
##3
12me
2
g(E)=
(E
-
V
)
(7.5.12)
2#2
~2
The
above
is
the
DOS
in
the
conduction
band
of
a
bulk
material.
7.6
DOS
in
a
Quantum
Well
In
a
1D
quantum
well,
the
potential
varies
as
a
function
of
z,
but
is
independent
of
x
and
y.
Then
the
e#ective
mass
Schrodinger
equation
becomes
~2
1
...
r (r)+
V
(z) (r)=
E (r)
(7.6.1)
2
me(z)
We
can
further
separate
the
z
variation
from
the
x
and
y
variations
to
get
-
~2
2me
r2
s (r)
-
~2
2
.
@z
1
me
.
@z
(r)
+
V
(z) (r)
=
E (r)
(7.6.2)
where
r2
s
=
@2
@x2
+
@2
@y2
.
By
separation
of
variables,
we
let
(r)
=
n(z) s(rs)
(7.6.3)
where
rs
=
^xx
+
^yy.
Then,
we
can
show
that
-
~2
2me
r2
s s(rs)
=
Es s(rs)
(7.6.4)
and
~2
d
1
d
-
2
dz
me(z)
dz
n(z)
+
V
(z) n(z)
=
En n(z)
(7.6.5)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
In
the
above
E
=
Es
+
En
(7.6.6)
Equation
(7.6.5)
can
be
solved
for
the
eigenvalues
En.
For
example,
it
can
be
the
1-D
nite
potential
well
problem,
or
the
in
nite
potential
well
problem.
Alternatively,
it
can
have
a
complicated
V
(z)
and
an
me(z)
that
are
amenable
to
numerical
methods
only.
In
the
x-y
direction,
we
let
iks
#rs
(rs)
.
e
(7.6.7)
where
ks
=
xkx
yky.
Then,
^+^
~2k2
Es
=
(7.6.8)
2me
where
k2
=
k2
+
k2
.
Therefore,
the
total
E-ks
diagram
looks
like
that
shown
in
Figure
7.8
s
xy
Figure
7.8:
The
subband
E-ks
relation
of
a
quantum
well.
In
general,
g2D(ks)
=
,
and
we
have
(2#)2
dks
g2D(Es)dEs
=2g2D(ks)2#ks
dEs
(7.6.9)
dEs
Finally,
we
get
me
g2D(Es)
=
(7.6.10)
#~2
which
is
a
constant
independent
of
Es.
Hence,
if
we
march
along
the
E-line
from
0
upward,
the
DOS
as
a
function
of
total
E
is
shown
in
Figure
7.9.
If
the
1D
quantum
well
is
an
in
nite
potential
well,
the
energy
is
given
by
~2
#np
#2
En
=
2me
L
(7.6.11)
But
density
of
states
for
a
3D
bulk
material
is
.
#3
g3D(E)
=
1
2#2
2me
~2
2
E
1
2
(7.6.12)
Quantum
Mechanics
in
Crystals
Figure
7.9:
The
density
of
states
of
a
2D
quantum
well
compared
to
that
of
a
3D
bulk
material.
If
we
evaluate
this
at
E
=
En,
we
have
me
nn
g3D(En)=
=
g2D
(7.6.13)
#~2
LL
Therefore,
g2D
touches
the
g3D
at
En
values
as
shown
in
Figure
7.9.
When
L
becomes
large,
so
that
the
quantization
level
in
the
quantum
well
becomes
ner,
the
DOS
plot
versus
total
E
is
shown
in
Figure
7.10.
The
DOS
for
a
quantum
well
resembles
that
of
a
bulk
material.
Figure
7.10:
The
density
of
states
of
a
2D
quantum
well
compared
to
that
of
a
3D
bulk
material
when
the
width
of
the
quantum
well
L
is
large.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Chapter
8
Angular
Momentum
8.1
Introduction
In
quantum
mechanics,
we
learn
that
travelling
wave
eikx
carries
a
linear
momentum
proportional
to
~k.
Hence,
the
more
oscillatory
the
wave
is,
the
higher
the
momentum
it
carries.
However,
when
an
electron
is
trapped
inside
the
potential
of
an
atom,
the
wave
is
not
a
linearly
travelling
wave,
but
a
wave
that
swirls
around
the
nucleus
of
the
atom.
Hence,
the
wave
carries
mostly
angular
momentum.
The
magnitude
of
this
angular
momentum,
intuitively,
is
proportional
to
the
angular
variation
of
the
wavefunction.
If
we
take
Schrodinger's
Equation
in
free
space,
it
is
given
by
~2
..r2 (r)=
E (r)
(8.1.1)
2m0
We
can
rewrite
this
as
r2
+
k2
(r)
=
0
(8.1.2)
0
where
k2
=2m0E=~2
.
The
above
is
the
Helmholtz
wave
equation
whose
solution
is
well
known.
In
cylindrical
coordinates,
it
is
1
@.
1
@2
@2
.
+
#2
++
k0
2
(#,
#,
z)
=
0
(8.1.3)
.
@.
@.
@#2
@z2
where
.
=
x2
+
y2
,
f
=
tan..1(y=x).
In
spherical
coordinates,
it
is
1
@.
1
@.
1
@2
r
+
sin
.
++
k2
(r,
#,
#)
=
0
(8.1.4)
r2
@r
@r
r2
sin
#@.
@.
r2
sin
.
@#20
where
r
=
x2
+
y2
+
z2
,
.
=
cos..1(z=r),
f
=
tan..1(#=x).
85
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
8.1.1
Electron
Trapped
in
a
Pill
Box
We
will
rst
solve
the
above
equation
in
cylindrical
coordinates
to
gain
physical
insight
into
the
wave-angular
momentum
relationship.
Hence,
we
study
the
case
of
an
electron
trapped
inside
a
pill
box.
The
solutions
to
Helmholtz
equation
can
be
found
by
the
separation
of
variables.
For
example,
to
solve
(8.1.3),
we
let
(#,
#,
z)=
R(#)#(#)Z(z)
(8.1.5)
Using
(8.1.5)
in
(8.1.3)
yields
1
@.
1
@2
#(#)Z(z)
#R(#)+
R(#)Z(z)
#(#)
#@.
@.
#2
@#2
@2
+
R(#)#(#)
Z(z)+
k0
2R(#)#(#)Z(z)
=
0
(8.1.6)
@z2
To
solve
the
above,
we
propose
two
eigenvalue
problems,
@2
Z(z)=
..k2Z(z)
(8.1.7)
@z2
@2
#(#)=
..n
2#(#)
(8.1.8)
@#2
The
solutions
to
the
above
are
easily
found:
#ikzz
Z(z)=
e
(8.1.9)
#(#)=
e
#inf
(8.1.10)
By
so
doing,
Equation
(8.1.6)
becomes
1
dd
n
#R(#)
-
R(#)+
k#
2R(#)
=
0
(8.1.11)
#d#d.
#2
where
k2
=
k0
2
-
k2
(8.1.12)
#z
Equation
(8.1.11)
is
the
Bessel
equation
where
solutions
are
Bessel
function
Jn(k##)
and
Neumann
function
Yn(k##).
Here,
n
is
the
order
of
these
functions.
So
the
general
solution
(8.1.5)
becomes
#inf
#ikzz
(#,
#,
z)=[AJn(k##)+
BYn(k##)]
ee
(8.1.13)
We
can
now
put
an
electron
in
a
pill
box
whose
wall
is
an
in
nite
potential
as
shown
in
Figure
8.1.
Since
Yn
(k##)
!1,
when
.
.
0,
we
set
B
=
0
to
eliminate
the
Neumann
function.
Also,
(#,
#,
z)
has
to
be
regular
and
nite
inside
the
pill
box.
Matching
boundary
conditions
at
the
two
ends
of
the
pill
box,
we
have
p#
.
(#,
#,
z)=
AJn
(k##)
e
#inf
sin
z
(8.1.14)
L
Angular
Momentum
2a
x
y
z
f
.
z=L
Figure
8.1:
The
geometry
of
a
cylindrical
pill
box
where
an
electron
is
trapped.
Table
8.1:
The
rst
few
zeros
of
Bessel
functions:
m
#0m
#1m
#2m
#3m
#4m
#5m
1
2:4048
3:8317
5:1356
6:3802
7:5883
8:7715
2
5:5201
7:0156
8:4172
9:7610
11:0647
12:3386
3
8:6537
10:1735
11:6198
13:0152
14:3725
15:7002
4
11:7915
13:3237
14:7960
16:2235
17:6160
18:9801
5
14:9309
16:4706
17:9598
19:4094
20:8269
22:2178
where
kz
=
p#=L,
for
all
integer
p.
The
boundary
condition
at
.
=
a
is
that
.
(a,
#,
z)
=
0,
or
that
Jn
(k#a)
=
0
(8.1.15)
The
zeros
of
Bessel
functions
are
tabulated
and
given
by
Jn
(#nm)
=
0
(8.1.16)
The
rst
few
zeros
are
given
in
Table
8.1.
Hence,
we
obtain
that
k.
=
#nm=a
(8.1.17)
So
(8:1:14)
becomes
.
p#
.
(#,
#,
z)=
AJn
#nm
e
#inf
sin
z
(8.1.18)
aL
In
the
above,
we
see
a
standing
wave
sin
(p#z=L)
in
the
z
direction,
a
standing
wave
repre
#
sented
by
Jn
#nm
in
the
.
direction,
and
a
travelling
wave
e#inf
in
the
f
direction.
The
a
88QuantumMechanicsMadeSimple
051015-0.500.51xJn(x)
J0(x)
J1(x)
J2(x)
051015-0.500.51xJn(x)
J0(x)
J1(x)
J2(x)
Figure
8.2:
The
Bessel
function
of
di#erent
order
as
a
function
of
its
argument.
Notice
that
the
higher
the
order,
the
smaller
the
Bessel
function
is
at
the
origin.
larger
n
is,
the
more
rapidly
varying
is
the
travelling
wave
as
a
function
of
#,
and
the
more
angular
momentum
it
carries.
In
fact,
plots
of
Jn
(x)
versus
x
for
di#erent
n
is
shown
in
Figure
8.2.1
We
notice
that
the
larger
n
is,
the
more
rapidly
varying
e#inf
is,
and
the
more
the
Bessel
function
Jn
(x)
is
pulled
away
from
the
origin.
This
is
characteristic
of
a
particle
swirling
around
in
a
circle.
The
centrifugal
force
is
keeping
the
particle
away
from
the
origin.
From
the
fact
that
##2
##2
#nm
pp
2m0E
k2
=
k.
2
+
k2
=
+
=
(8.1.19)
0
z
aL
~2
we
can
derive
that
the
energy
levels
of
the
trapped
electron
are
given
by
#2
##2
~2
#nm
p#
Enmp
=
+
(8.1.20)
2m0
aL
Hence,
the
energy
levels
of
the
trapped
electron
assume
quantized
values.
This
is
the
characteristic
of
the
wave
nature
of
the
electron.
8.1.2
Electron
Trapped
in
a
Spherical
Box
To
obtain
di#erent
physical
insight
with
di#erent
wavefunctions,
next,
we
place
the
electron
in
a
spherical
box
with
in
nite
potential
at
the
wall.
We
also
solve
this
problem
by
separation
of
variables
by
letting
.
(r,
#,
#)=
R
(r)#(#)#(#)
(8.1.21)
1Ways
to
compute
Jn(x)
is
well
documented
and
is
available
in
programming
toolbox
like
Matlab.
Angular
Momentum
Figure
8.3:
Legendre
Polynomial
with
argument
cos
.
plotted
for
l
=
5
and
di#erent
m
values.
Using
(8:1:21)
in
(8:1:4),
we
have
1
.
2
.
1
@
#(#)#(#)
rR
(r)+
R
(r)#(#)
sin
.
.
#(#)
r2
@r
@r
r2
sin
.
@.
@.
(8.1.22)
1
+R
(r)#(#)
@2
#(#)+
k0
2R
(r)#(#)#(#)=0
r2
sin2
.
@#2
We
propose
another
eigenvalue
problem
such
that
@2
#(#)=
..m
2#(#)
(8.1.23)
@#2
Using
the
above
in
(8:1:22),
#(#)
can
be
canceled
in
the
equation.
Then
we
propose
another
eigenvalue
problem
such
that
2
1
@.
m
sin
.
#(#)
-
#(#)=
..l
(l
+
1)#(#)
(8.1.24)
sin
.
@.
@.
sin2
.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
The
solution
to
(8:1:23)
is
e#imf
while
the
solution
to
(8:1:24)
is
in
terms
of
associated
Legendre
polynomials,
P
m
(x),
or
in
terms
of
#,
#(#)=
P
m
(cos
#)
,
..l
.
m
.
l
(8.1.25)
Eventually,
the
equation
for
R
(r)
is
1
dd
l
(l
+
1)
rR
(r)+
k0
2
-
R
(r)
=
0
(8.1.26)
r2
drdr
r2
The
last
equation
is
the
spherical
Bessel
equation
whose
solution
is
(1)
R
(r)=
Ajl
(k0r)+
Bh(k0r)
(8.1.27)
l
In
the
above,
jl
(x)
represents
a
spherical
Bessel
function
of
order
l,
which
is
regular
at
x
=
0,
(1)
while
h(x)
represents
a
spherical
Hankel
function
of
the
rst
kind
of
order
l,
which
is
singular
at
x
=
0.
(1)
When
we
put
this
solution
inside
a
spherical
box,
we
set
B
=
0
since
h(k0r)
is
singular
at
r
=
0.
Then
the
general
solution
to
(8:1:4)
inside
a
box
is
#im#
(r,
#,
#)=
Ajl(k0r)P
m(cos
#)e,
..l
.
m
.
l
(8.1.28)
Assuming
the
radius
of
the
sphere
is
a,
to
satisfy
the
boundary
condition,
we
require
that
jl(k0a)=0,
(8.1.29)
Since
jl(#lp)
=
0,
we
deduce
that
k0
=
#lp=a.
The
rst
few
zeros
of
the
spherical
Bessel
functions
are
given
in
Table
8.2.
Table
8.2:
The
rst
few
zeros
of
the
spherical
Bessel
functions:
p
#0p
#1p
#2p
#3p
#4p
1
2
3
4
3:142
6:283
9:425
12:566
4:493
7:725
10:904
14:066
5:763
9:095
12:323
15:515
6:988
10:417
13:698
16:924
8:183
11:705
15:040
18:301
Therefore,
the
general
solution
becomes
#im#
(r,
#,
#)=
Ajl
#lp
Pl
m(cos
#)e,
..l
.
m
.
l
(8.1.30)
#im#
In
the
above,
erepresents
a
traveling
wave
in
the
f
direction,
P
m(cos
#)
represents
a
standing
wave
in
the
.
direction.
When
l
becomes
large,
P
m(x)
is
a
higher
order
polynomial
l
2The
other
solution
to
(8.1.24)
is
the
associate
Legendre
function
of
the
second
kind,
Qn(cos
#)
but
this
function
is
singular
for
0
.
.
.
#,
and
hence,
is
not
admissible
as
a
solution.
Angular
Momentum
#im#
and
P
m(cos
#)
is
a
rapidly
varying
function
of
#.
In
this
case,
e,
..l
.
m
.
l
could
also
be
a
rapidly
varying
function
of
f
implying
the
presence
of
high
angular
momentum.
From
Figure
8.3,
it
is
seen
that
the
larger
m
is,
the
more
slowly
varying
is
the
associated
Legendre
polynomial.
The
variations
from
P
m(cos
#)
and
e#imf
compensate
each
other
for
a
xed
l
so
as
to
keep
the
\sum�
of
the
angular
momentum
a
constant
when
l
is
xed.
The
function
jl(x)
is
well
known
and
is
plotted
in
Figure
8.4,
showing
that
when
n
is
large,
the
centrifugal
force
of
the
particle
pulls
it
away
from
the
origin
as
in
the
pill-box
case
in
cylindrical
coordinates.
From
the
fact
that
##2#lp
2m0E
k2
=
=
(8.1.31)
0
a
~2
we
deduce
that
the
energy
levels
of
the
trapped
electron
are
##2
~2
#lp
Elp
=
(8.1.32)
2m0
a
This
is
again
quantized
due
to
the
wave
nature
of
the
electron.
The
above
cases
illustrate
the
trapping
of
an
electron
by
a
pill
box
and
a
spherical
box.
In
nature,
the
positive
charge
of
a
nucleus
forms
a
potential
that
can
trap
an
electron.
In
the
case
of
the
hydrogen
atom,
closed
form
solutions
can
be
obtained
for
the
trapping
of
an
electron
by
the
Coulomb
potential
of
the
positive
nucleus.
This
has
been
documented
in
manyquantummechanicsbooks.
8.2MathematicsofAngularMomentum
051015-0.200.20.40.60.81xjn(x)
j0(x)
j1(x)
j2(x)
Figure
8.4:
Spherical
Bessel
function
of
di#erent
order
versus
its
argument.
The
higher
order
functions
are
smaller
around
the
origin.
92
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
We
have
shown
previously
that
an
electron
trapped
inside
a
pill
box
or
a
spherical
box
does
display
angular
momentum.
Next,
we
derive
the
operator
that
is
related
to
angular
momentum.
In
classical
mechanics,
the
angular
momentum
is
given
by
L
=
r
�
p
(8.2.1)
where
p
is
the
linear
momentum.
Notice
that
by
taking
the
cross
product
of
p
with
r,
only
the
circumferential
component
of
the
linear
momentum
is
extracted.
Written
explicitly,
it
is
Lx
=
ypz
-
zpy;Ly
=
zpx
-
xpz;Lz
=
xpy
-
ypx
(8.2.2)
We
raise
these
to
operators,
and
write
them
as,
in
coordinate
space
representation,
@.
@.
@.
L^
x
=
..i.
y
-
z
;L^
y
=
..i.
z
-
x
;L^
z
=
..i.
x
-
y,
(8.2.3)
@z
@y
@x
@z
@y
@x
x,
y,
z
can
be
raised
to
be
operators
as
well,
but
in
coordinate
space
representation,
they
are
just
scalars.
Actually,
we
can
write
(8.2.1)
as
the
operator
L
=^r
�
p^(8.2.4)
The
hat
signs
above
indicate
that
they
are
operators
and
not
unit
vectors.
The
coordinate
space
representation
of
the
^r
operator
is
just
r.
The
coordinate
space
representation
representation
of
the
momentum
operator
p^has
been
derived
before.
Consequently,
the
above
operators
can
be
shown
to
satisfy
the
following
commutation
relations
^^^^^^
Lx;Ly
=
i~L^
z;Ly;Lz
=
i~L^
x;Lz;Lx
=
i~L^
y
(8.2.5)
By
transforming
to
spherical
coordinates,
the
operators
become
@@
Lx
=
i.
sin
f
+
cot
.
cos
f
(8.2.6)
@.
@f
@.
L^
y
=
i.
-
cos
f
+
cot
.
sin
f
(8.2.7)
@.
@f
.
L^
z
=
..i.
(8.2.8)
@f
The
eigenfunction
of
the
L^
z
operator
is
F
=
e#imf
so
that
L^
z#(#)=
m~#(#)
(8.2.9)
L^
2
8.3
Operator
The
L^
2
operator
is
de
ned
as
L^
2
L^
2
+
L^
2
+
L^
2
=
xy
(8.3.1)
z
Angular
Momentum
It
can
be
shown
that
L^
..~2r2
(8.3.2)
#;f
where
.
and
f
mean
only
variation
in
these
variables
is
involved,
and
1
@.
1
@2
r2
=
sin
.
+
(8.3.3)
#;f
sin
.
@.
@.
sin2
.
@#2
The
above
is
just
the
circumferential
variation
of
the
Laplacian
operator
in
(8.1.4).
It
is
quite
easy
to
show
that
the
above
commutes
with
L^
z.
Hence,
L^
2
commutes
with
L^
z.
By
symmetry,
L2
also
commutes
with
L^
x
and
L^
y.
We
can
nd
the
eigenfunction
of
the
L^
2
operator
by
rst
nding
that
of
r2
Traditionally,
this
eigenfunction
and
eigenvalue
problem
is
expressed
as
#;#.
r2
#;#Ylm(#,
#)=
..l(l
+
1)Ylm(#,
#),
..l
.
m
.
l
(8.3.4)
Its
solution
is
similar
to
the
method
of
solving
for
the
solution
of
Helmholtz
wave
equation
in
spherical
coordinates.
By
the
separation
of
variables,
the
solution
is
im#
Ylm(#,
#)=
CP
m(cos
#)e,
..l
.
m
.
l
(8.3.5)
which
can
be
normalized
to
yield
(2l
+
1)(l
-
m)!
P
m
im#
Ylm(#,
#)=(..1)m
(cos
#)e,
..l
.
m
.
l
(8.3.6)
4#(l
+
m)!
In
Hilbert
space,
this
eigenfunction
is
denoted
as
jl,
mi.
We
can
de
ne
another
operator
L^
2
L^
2
-
L^
2
L^
2
+
L^2
=
=
(8.3.7)
s
zxy
It
is
quite
clear
that
L^
z
commutes
with
L^
s
2
and
L^
s
2
commutes
with
L^
2
.
Hence,
L^
z,
L^
s
2
and
L^
2
share
the
same
eigenfunctions
jl,
mi.
Therefore,
L^
2
jl,
m.
=
~2[l(l
+
1)
-
m
2]jl,
m.
(8.3.8)
A
pictorial
illustration
of
this
concept
is
given
in
Figure
8.5.
It
is
to
be
noted
that
^L^
2
this
picture
can
be
drawn
because
Lz
commutes
with
.
Thus
their
eigenvalues
can
be
s
\measured�
uniquely
and
simultaneously.
However,
L^
z
does
not
commute
with
L^
x
or
Ly.
In
fact,
from
the
picture
of
jYlmj2,
the
function
is
completely
indeterminate
in
the
f
direction.
Hence,
the
eigenvalues
of
L^x
or
Ly
are
indeterminate
or
smeared
out
for
a
given
Ylm
with
a
determinate
eigenvalue
of
L^
z.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
8.5:
A
picture
showing
the
angular
momentum
components
for
di#erent
tilt
angles
of
the
total
angular
momentum
L
(from
DAB
Miller).
Chapter
9
Spin
9.1
Introduction
Spin
is
a
special
property
of
atomic
or
subatomic
particles
that
has
no
classical
analogue.
Electron
has
spin.
We
can
think
of
it
as
being
due
to
the
self
spinning
of
the
electron,
but
we
should
not
let
our
imagination
run
further
than
that.
Spin
of
an
electron
gives
it
a
spin
angular
momentum
in
addition
to
the
orbital
angular
momentum
it
possesses.
The
spin
also
endows
an
electron
with
a
magnetic
dipole
moment
that
causes
it
to
interact
with
a
magnetic
eld.
The
spin
of
some
particles
is
found
to
have
binary
values
of
\spin
up�
and
\spin
down�
experimentally
by
the
famous
Stern-Gerlach
experiment.
This
binary
nature,
as
we
shall
see,
ts
nicely
in
the
mathematical
structure
of
angular
momentum
in
quantum
mechanics,
but
it
cannot
be
described
by
a
wavefunction
or
wave
mechanics.
Instead,
it
can
be
represented
by
matrix
mechanics.
9.2
Spin
Operators
We
have
seen
that
the
z
component
of
the
orbital
angular
momentum,
represented
by
the
operator
L^
z,
is
quantized
to
be
m.
where
..l
.
m
.
l,
l
being
an
integer
related
to
the
total
angular
momentum
square
operator
L^2
with
eigenvalue
l
(l
+
1)~2
.
It
can
be
shown
that
the
relationship
between
the
total
angular
momentum
number
l
and
the
z-component
of
the
angular
number
m
is
not
restricted
to
orbital
angular
momenta.
It
can
be
established
for
all
quantum
mechanical
angular
momenta,
as
is
shown
in
Appendix
A.
A
more
general
framework
for
angular
momentum
is
that
for
J^2
=
J^
x
2
+
J^
y
2
+
J^2,
an
operator
z
that
represents
the
square
of
the
total
angular
momentum,
and
J^x,
J^y,
J^z,
operators
that
represent
the
x,
y,
and
z
components
of
angular
momenta,
then
J^2
jL,
M.
=
L
(L
+
1)
~2
jL,
M.
(9.2.1)
Jz
jL,
M.
=
M~2
jL,
M.
,
..L
.
M
.
L
(9.2.2)
95
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
We
have
proved
the
above
results
for
orbital
angular
momentum
by
using
wave
mechanics
and
wavefunctions,
but
they
can
be
proven
for
general
angular
momentum
by
using
rotational
symmetry
of
3D
coordinate
space,
and
mathematics
of
raising
and
lowering
operators.
Spin
angular
momentum
operators
also
t
under
the
framework
of
general
angular
momentum
operator,
and
can
be
thought
of
as
a
special
case
of
the
above
framework.
Hence,
the
above
can
also
be
applied
to
spin
,
..
66M2
angular
momentum
where
L
=
.
The
values
of
M
has
to
be
spaced
by
value
one
apart,
hence,
M
=
#
For
spins,
we
let
S^represent
the
total
angular
momentum
operator,
while
S^z
represents
the
z
component
of
the
spin
angular
momentum.
Applying
(9:2:1)
and
(9:2:2)
to
spinangular
momentum,
we
have
S^2
31
,
#
L
=
=
#
~2
(9.2.3)
,
#
=
2
42
Sz
,
#
(9.2.4)
,
#
=
#
As
a
result,
the
corresponding
z
component
of
the
spin
angular
momentum,
represented
by
the
operator
S^z,
has
only
two
eigenvalues
and
two
eigenstates:
an
up
state
with
angular
.
and
a
down
state
with
angular
momentum
of
..
momentum
of
The
corresponding
x
and
y
components
of
the
spin
angular
momentum
can
be
represented
by
operators
S^x
and
S^y.
Together
with
S^z,
they
satisfy
the
following
commutation
relations,
^^=
i~^^^=
i~^^^=
i~^
Sx;Sy
Sz;Sy;Sz
Sx;Sz;Sx
Sy
(9.2.5)
The
above
is
similar
to
the
commutation
relations
satis
ed
by
L^
x,
Ly,
and
L^
z,
where
they
have
been
motivated
by
wave
mechanics.
However,
as
has
been
shown
in
Appendix
A,
that
if
an
operator
is
to
represent
an
angular
momentum,
then
their
x,
y,
and
z
components
have
to
satisfy
the
above
commutation
relations
by
rotational
symmetry
of
the
3D
coordinate
space.
It
is
expedient
at
this
point
to
de
ne
Pauli
spin
matrices
given
by
222
#^x
=
S^x;#^y
=
S^y;#^z
=
S^z
(9.2.6)
with
the
commutation
relation
[^#x;#^y]=2i#^z,
[^#y;#^z]=2i#^x,
[^#z;#^x]=2i#^y
(9.2.7)
Since
there
are
only
two
spin
states,
they
can
be
represented
by
a
two
dimensional
column
vector.
The
spin
operators
can
in
turn
be
represented
by
2
�
2
matrices.
Hence,
we
have
.
.
.
.
j".
=
1
0
,
j#.
=
0
1
(9.2.8)
Then,
the
matrix
representation
of
^#z
is
.
.
^#z
=
1
0
0
..1
(9.2.9)
1This
was
discovered
in
silver
atoms
by
the
famous
Stern-Gerlach
experiment.
Spin
97
such
that
#^z
j".
=
j".
;#^z
j#.
=
-
j#.
(9.2.10)
The
other
Pauli
matrices
can
be
found
to
be
.
.
.
.
^#x
=
0
1
1
0
,
^#y
=
0
i
..i
0
(9.2.11)
It
can
be
shown
that
10
#2
#2
#2
^=^=^=
I
=
(9.2.12)
xyz
01
Hence,
we
can
de
ne
a
^#2
operator
such
that
#2
#2
#2
#2
^=^+^+^=3I
(9.2.13)
xyz
By
the
same
token,
the
S^2
operator,
from
(9.2.6)
and
the
above,
can
be
evaluated
to
be
S^2
=
S^
x
2
+
S^
y
2
+
S^
z
2
=
~2
#^2
=
~I
(9.2.14)
44
In
the
above,
the
quantum
mechanics
of
spin
half
particle
such
as
an
electron
is
described
by
matrix
mechanics.
9.3
The
Bloch
Sphere
We
have
seen
that
the
eigenstates
of
^#z
are
10
j".
=
,
j#.
=
(9.3.1)
01
In
the
two
dimensional
space
in
which
spin
states
are
represented,
these
two
states
are
orthonormal
and
complete.
Hence,
the
eigenstates
of
the
^#x
and
^#y
operators
can
be
expanded
as
well
in
terms
of
j".
and
j#.
states.
Consequently,
a
general
spin
state
can
be
written
as
#.
js.
=
a.
j".
+
a.
j#.
=
cos
j".
+
e
if
sin
j#.
(9.3.2)
22
We
have
chosen
a.
and
a.
judiciously
so
that
the
wavefunction
is
clearly
normalized.
The
relative
phase
between
a.
and
a.
is
in
eif
as
absolute
phase
is
unimportant.
Let
s
=
{#^x
+
|#^y
+
k#^z
(9.3.3)
be
an
operator
that
represents
a
vector
of
the
spin
angular
momentum,
where
{,
|,
and
k
are
unit
vectors
in
the
x,
y,
and
z
directions.
Then
the
expectation
value
of
this
operator
for
a
given
quantum
state
js.
in
(9:3:2)
should
point
in
a
vectorial
direction.
This
is
a
basic
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
tenet
of
quantum
mechanics
since
s
represents
angular
momentum,
which
is
an
observable.
Consequently,
we
nd
the
vector
Ps
=
hs|
s
js.
=
i
hs|
#^x
js.
+
j
hs|
#^y
js.
+
k
hs|
#^z
js.
(9.3.4)
After
substituting
js.
from
(9:3:2)
into
the
above,
we
can
show
that
Ps
=
i
sin
.
cos
f
+
j
sin
.
sin
f
+
k
cos
f
(9.3.5)
The
vector
Ps
maps
out
a
sphere
called
the
Bloch
sphere
with
corresponding
.
and
f
values
as
shown
in
Figure
9.1.
Figure
9.1:
The
Bloch
sphere
showing
the
vector
Ps.
9.4
Spinor
In
general,
we
need
a
two
component
vector
to
describe
both
the
wavefunction
and
the
spin
state
of
an
electron,
namely,
j up.
10
j .
==
j up.
+
j down.
(9.4.1)
j down.
01
These
wave
fucntions
with
two
components
are
known
as
spinors.
The
vector
space
for
spinors
consists
of
the
vector
space
for
the
electron
wavefunction
multiplying
with
the
two-dimensional
vector
space
for
the
spin.
This
is
known
as
a
direct
product
space.
Spin
99
9.5
Pauli
Equation
The
classical
angular
momentum
of
a
particle
moving
in
a
circle
is
L
=
m0vr
(9.5.1)
which
can
also
be
written
as
a
vector
L
=
r
�
p
=
r
�
m0v
(9.5.2)
If
this
particle
is
an
electron,
it
will
complete
an
orbit
in
2#r=v
time,
and
we
can
denote
the
current
due
to
this
orbiting
electron
as
ev
I
=
-
(9.5.3)
2#r
A
circulating
current
loop
produces
a
magnetic
dipole
moment
#d
=
Ia
(9.5.4)
where
ja|
is
the
area
of
the
current
loop,
the
vector
a
points
in
the
direction
normal
to
the
surface
jaj.
For
circulating
electron,
this
moment
is
j#d|
=
-
ev
2#r
#r2
=
-
evr
2
(9.5.5)
We
can
then
write
#d
=
-
er
�
v
2
=
-
eL
2m0
(9.5.6)
The
interaction
energy
of
a
magnetic
dipole
and
a
background
magnetic
eld
B
is
given
by
Eu
=
..#d
�
B
(9.5.7)
Assume
that
B
=
^,
then
zBz
ee
Eu
=
BzLz
=
Bzm.
(9.5.8)
2m0
2m0
since
the
eigenvalue
of
L^
z
is
m~and
the
expectation
value
of
L^
z
can
be
precisely
m~.
Equation
(9.5.8)
can
also
be
written
as
Eu
=
m#BBz
(9.5.9)
where
#B
is
a
Bohr
magneton
de
ned
to
be
e.
#B
=
(9.5.10)
2m0
The
Hamiltonian
of
quantum
mechanics
is
inspired
by
the
classical
Hamiltonian
mechanics.
The
Hamiltonian
represents
the
total
energy
of
the
system.
If
an
applied
external
magnetic
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
eld
contribution
to
a
small
change
in
the
total
energy,
we
can
add
a
perturbation
Hamiltonian
in
accordance
to
(9.5.8)
and
let
H^
eBz
L^
(9.5.11)
2m0
Originally,
for
angular
momentum
with
number
l,
the
z
component
of
the
angular
momentum
is
m.
with
(2l
+
1)
values
for
m
that
are
degenerate.
The
applied
B
eld
will
split
this
degeneracy
into
2l
+
1
distinct
energy
values.
This
is
known
as
the
Zeeman
e#ect.
Equation
(9.5.11)
can
be
written
as
H^
p
=
L^
�
B
(9.5.12)
2m0
When
the
spin
angular
momentum
is
added,
the
perturbing
Hamiltonian
becomes
^^
Hp
=(L^
+
gS)
�
B
(9.5.13)
2m0
where
g
is
the
gyromagnetic
factor
found
to
be
approximately
2
experimentally.
In
general,
the
Hamiltonian
for
an
electron
in
the
presence
of
an
electromagnetic
eld
is
1
e
H^
p
=(p^-
eA)2
+
V
+(L^
+
gS^
)
�
B
(9.5.14)
2m0
2m0
The
above
Hamiltonian
is
again
motivated
by
the
Hamiltonian
for
classical
mechanics
for
an
electron
in
the
presence
of
an
electromagnetic
eld,
which
is
H^
p
=[p
-
eA(r)]+
V
(r)
(9.5.15)
2m0
One
can
show,
using
the
classical
equation
of
motion
for
Hamiltonian
mechanics,
that
Lorentz
force
law
emerges
from
the
above.
Equation
(9.5.14)
is
motivated
by
(9.5.15)
where
the
momentum
p
in
(9.5.15)
is
elevated
to
be
an
operator
p^in
(9.5.14).
The
vector
potential
A(r),
however
remains
as
a
classical
variable.
As
a
result,
(9.5.14)
is
a
semi-classical
Hamiltonian.
Chapter
10
Identical
Particles
10.1
Introduction
The
physics
of
identical
particles
is
another
triumph
in
quantum
mechanics
where
the
phenomenon
is
not
observed
in
the
classical
world.
When
particles
are
identical
or
indistinguishable,
their
wavefunctions
have
to
assume
a
certain
form
to
satisfy
a
certain
symmetry
when
the
positions
of
the
two
particles
are
swapped.
In
quantum
mechanics,
it
is
the
magnitude
square
of
a
wavefunction
that
has
physical
meaning.
If
the
particles
are
indistinguishable,
the
magnitude
square
of
a
wavefunction
does
not
change
when
the
two
particles
are
swapped.
In
general,
we
can
write
the
general
wavefunction
for
two
particles
as
tp(r1,
r2)=
c12 a(r1) b(r2)+
c21 a(r2) b(r1)
(10.1.1)
where
#(ri)
is
a
one-particle
wavefunction
for
a
particle
in
state
.
described
by
coordinate
ri.
But
when
r1
.
r2,
the
assumption
is
that
the
magnitude
square
of
the
wavefunction
remains
unchanged.
Namely,
j tp(r1,
r2)j2
=
j tp(r2,
r1)j2
(10.1.2)
which
means
that
tp(r1,
r2)=
tp(r2,
r1)
(10.1.3)
i#
where
.
=
e.
Using
(10.1.1)
in
(10.1.3),
we
have
From
the
above,
we
get
c21
=
c12;c12
=
c21
(10.1.5)
Consequently,
c12
=
c21
=
2
c12
(10.1.6)
101
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
or
2
=
1,
.
=
#1,
c21
=
#c12,
and
tp(r1,
r2)=
c12
[ a(r1) b(r2)
�
a(r2) b(r1)]
(10.1.7)
When
the
\+�
sign
is
chosen
in
(10.1.7),
it
corresponds
to
the
wavefunction
of
two
identical
bosons.
When
the
\..�
sign
is
chosen,
it
corresponds
to
the
wavefunction
of
two
identical
fermions.
10.2
Pauli
Exclusion
Principle
For
fermions,
the
two-particle
wavefunction
is
given
by
tp(r1,
r2)=
c
[ a(r1) b(r2)
-
a(r2) b(r1)]
(10.2.1)
when
a
=
b,
the
above
vanishes,
meaning
that
two
fermions
cannot
be
in
the
same
state.
The
above
vanishes
when
r1
=
r2,
meaning
that
two
fermions
cannot
be
in
the
same
position
simultaneously.
This
known
as
the
Pauli
exclusion
principle.
No
two
identical
electrons
can
be
in
the
same
state
nor
the
same
position
simultaneously.
However,
two
electrons
with
di#erent
spins,
up
spin
and
down
spin,
are
considered
di#erent,
and
they
can
be
in
the
same
state,
like
in
the
same
orbital
in
an
atom.
Also,
the
sign
of
the
total
wavefunction,
tp(r1,
r2),
changes
sign
when
the
positions
of
the
two
particles
are
swapped.
10.3
Exchange
Energy
When
we
have
two
electrons,
each
will
see
the
Coulomb
potential
of
the
other
electron.
Hence,
the
Hamiltonian
is
given
by
~2
...
e2
H^
=
..r2
1
+
r2
+
(10.3.1)
2me
4##0
jr1
-
r2|
The
two-particle
fermion
wavefunction
can
be
written
as
j tp.
=
v
[j1;aij2;bi..j2;aij1;bi]
(10.3.2)
where
v
ensures
that
j tp.
is
also
normalized.
In
the
above,
ji,
#.
is
the
Hilbert
space
representation
of
the
wavefunction
#(ri).
The
above
does
not
solve
the
Schrodinger
equation
corresponding
to
the
above
Hamiltonian,
but
it
can
be
used
to
estimate
the
eigenvalue
or
the
energy
of
the
Hamiltonian
in
the
spirit
of
the
variational
method
described
previously,
using
the
Rayleigh
quotient.
To
nd
the
corresponding
expectation
value
of
the
energy,
we
evaluate
hE.
=
h tp|
H^
j tp.
(10.3.3)
Identical
Particles
Since
the
function
is
normalized,
the
above
is
also
the
Rayleigh
quotient
for
the
energy.
When
expanded
to
four
terms,
gives
hE.
=
h1;ajh2;b|
H^
j1;aij2;b.
+
h2;ajh1;b|
H^
j2;aij1;b.
..h1;ajh2;b|
H^
j2;aij1;bi..h2;ajh1;b|
H^
j1;aij2;b.
(10.3.4)
The
rst
two
terms
above
are
equal
to
each
other.
Speci
cally,
h1;ajh2;b|
H^
j1;aij2;b.
..~2
..~2
=
h1;ajh2;bjr1
2
j1;aij2;b.
+
h1;ajh2;bjr2
2
j1;aij2;b.
2m0
2m0
2
+
h1;ajh2;bjj1;aij2;b.
4##0
jr1
-
r2j
..~2
..~2
=
h1;ajr1
2
j1;a.
+
h2;bjr2
2
j2;b.
2m0
2m0
2
+
h1;ajh2;bjj1;aij2;b.
4##0
jr1
-
r2|
=
EKE;a
+
EKE;b
+
EP
E;ab
(10.3.5)
EKE;a
is
the
kinetic
energy
of
particle
1
in
state
a,
while
EKE;b
is
the
kinetic
energy
of
particle
2
in
state
b.
The
EP
E;ab
term
can
be
derived
explicitly
to
yield
22
2
0.
j a
(r)jj b
(r0)j
EP
E;ab
=
edrdr
(10.3.6)
4##0
jr
-
r0|
This
is
exactly
the
same
as
the
potential
energy
from
the
second
term
on
the
right-hand
side
of
(10:3:4)
if
we
were
to
write
it
explicitly.
Consequently,
we
have
EKE;a
+
EKE;b
+
EP
E;ab
=
h1;ajh2;b|
H^
j1;aij2;b.
+
h2;ajh1;b|
H^
j2;aij1;b.
(10.3.7)
2
However,
the
third
and
fourth
terms
on
the
right-hand
side
of
(10:3:4)
have
no
classical
analog.
They
are
there
because
of
the
presence
of
the
second
term
in
(10:1:7)
be
it
for
bosons
or
fermions.
The
second
term
is
needed
because
the
particles
are
indistinguishable
or
identical
if
we
exchange
their
positions.
Due
to
the
Hermiticity
of
the
Hamiltonian
operator,
the
fourth
term
on
the
right-hand
side
of
(10:3:4)
is
the
complex
conjugate
of
the
third
term.
Consequently,
these
two
terms
can
be
written
as
EEX;ab
=
-
1
2
.
h1,
a|
h2,
b|
^H
j2,
a.
j1,
b.
+
.
h1,
a|
h2,
b|
^H
j2,
a.
j1,
b.
##.
#.
.
(10.3.8)
=
..<e
drdr
0.
*
a
(r)
.
*
b
(r
0)
^H
a
(r
0)
b
(r)
(10.3.9)
The
exchange
energy
is
proportional
to
the
overlap
between
the
wavefunctions
a
(r)
and
b
(r).
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
10.4
Extension
to
More
Than
Two
Particles
In
the
following,
we
will
discuss
methods
to
construct
basis
functions
for
di#erent
kinds
of
particles.
These
basis
functions
does
not
solve
the
Schrodinger
equation
yet,
but
they
have
to
satisfy
certain
symmetry
conditions
depending
on
the
kind
of
particles
they
represent.
1.
Non-identical
Particle
Case:
Let
us
assume
that
we
have
N
particles,
and
M
modes
to
t
this
N
particles.
We
can
construct
a
state
for
non-identical
particles
that
looks
like
j di#.
=
j1;aij2;bij3;c.
::.
jN,
n.
(10.4.1)
In
terms
of
basis
function,
we
may
express
the
above
as
j ab###n.
=
j1,
aij2,
bij3,
c.
�
�
�
jN,
n.
(10.4.2)
or
ab###n(r1,
r2,
�
�
�
,
rN
)
=
a(r1) b(r2)
�
�
�
n(rN
)
(10.4.3)
We
can
t
the
N
particles
in
n
modes,
and
these
n
modes
can
be
repeating
or
non-
repeating.
For
non-repeating
case,
it
is
necessary
for
M
.
N.
However,
the
above
wavefunction
cannot
be
used
for
bosons
and
fermions,
as
we
will
get
a
new
wavefunction
when
we
swap
the
positions
of
two
particles.
But
bosons
and
fermions
are
indistinguishable
particles.
We
will
consider
them
separately.
2.
Boson
Case:
For
the
N
boson
particle
case,
we
can
write
the
legitimate
wavefunction,
which
can
be
used
as
a
basis
function,
as
j identical-bosonsi.
P
j1;aij2;bij3;ci###jN,
n.
(10.4.4)
^
where
P
is
a
permutation
operator,
and
the
above
summation
is
over
all
possible
permutations
of
the
coordinate
ri
over
the
one-particle
eigenstates
a,
b,
c,
##�
;n.
The
above
wavefunction
remains
unchange
when
we
permute
the
positions
of
two
particles,
because
for
every
j1;ai###ji,
li###jj,
pi###jN,
ni,
there
is
a
j1;ai###jj,
li###ji,
pi###jN,
n.
in
the
above
summation.
Hence,
swapping
of
i
and
j
will
not
change
the
sign
of
the
above
wavefunction.
The
above
can
also
be
written
as
a
basis
function
as
j ab###ni.
P
j1;aij2;bij3;ci###jN,
n.
(10.4.5)
3.
Fermion
Case:
For
the
N
fermion
case,
we
can
write
the
wavefunction,
which
can
be
used
as
a
basis
function,
as
N!
1
j identical-fermion.
=
p#P^j1;aij2;bij3;ci###jN,
n.
(10.4.6)
N!
P
=1
Identical
Particles
where
the
\+�
sign
is
chosen
for
even
permutation
while
the
\..�
sign
is
chosen
for
odd
permutation.
A
permutation
involves
a
unique
pairwise
exchange
of
two
particles
.
The
permutation
is
even
or
odd
depending
on
the
number
of
pairwise
exchanges
that
have
taken
place.
Therefore,
given
a
term
j1;ai###ji,
li###jj,
pi###jN,
ni,
there
always
exists
another
term:
..j1;ai###jj,
li###ji,
pi###jN,
n.
in
the
above
summation
since
they
di#er
by
one
permutation.
If
i
=
j,
the
two
terms
cancel
each
other
implying
that
they
cannot
be
in
the
same
position.
Likewise
all
the
terms
in
the
sum
cancel
each
other
since
every
term
that
contains
i
and
j
can
be
paired
up
with
every
other
terms
in
the
sum.
Moreover,
If
l
=
p,
all
terms
in
the
summation
above
cancel
as
well
implying
that
they
cannot
be
in
the
same
mode
or
state.
Therefore,
the
above
is
a
legitimate
basis
function
that
represents
the
fermions
as
it
obeys
Pauli's
exclusion
principle.
Also,
there
is
a
sign
change
when
the
position
of
two
particles
are
swapped.
Another
way
of
writing
the
fermion
case
is
j1;aij2;a.
##�
jN,
a.
j1;bij2;b.
##�
jN,
bi)
..
.
.
...
.
j1;nij2;n.
##�
jN,
n.
..
.
(10.4.7)
1
j identical-fermion.
=
v
N!
The
above
is
known
as
the
Slater
determinant.
When
two
particles
are
in
the
same
position,
two
columns
are
the
same,
and
the
above
determinant
is
zero.
When
two
states
are
the
same,
two
rows
are
the
same,
and
the
determinant
of
the
above
is
again
zero,
implying
that
these
two
cases
are
not
allowed.
Also
when
two
columns
are
swapped,
the
sign
of
the
determinant
changes,
because
it
corresponds
to
two
particles
exchanging
positions.
In
terms
of
basis
function,
we
can
express
the
above
as
.
.
N!
N!
P
=1
#P^j1;aij2;bij3;ci
j ab###n.
=
v
###jN,
n.
j1;aij2;a.
##�
jN,
a.
j1;bij2;b.
##�
jN,
bi)
..
.
(10.4.8)
=
N!
.
...
.
j1;nij2;n.
##�
jN,
n.
..
.
10.5
Counting
the
Number
of
Basis
states
Usually,
the
one
particle
eigenfucntion
has
in
nitely
many
possible
states.
In
the
nite
basis
method,
we
may
want
to
choose
a
subset
of
this
eigenstates,
say
M
states.
At
this
point,
if
we
have
N
particles
and
M
states
to
put
this
N
particles
in,
it
may
be
prudent
to
count
how
many
possible
basis
states
there
are.
Such
counting
scheme
will
also
be
used
in
the
appendix
to
derive
the
thermal
distribution
functions.
1.
Non-identical
Particles:
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
The
rst
particle
has
M
state
to
choose
from
in
(10.4.2),
the
second
particle
also
has
M
states
to
choose
from,
and
eventually,
there
are
MN
states
possible
for
(10.4.2),
since
repetition
of
the
states
is
allowed.
Nbasis
=
MN
(10.5.1)
2.
Identical
Bosons:
In
this
case,
the
number
of
particles
that
can
be
put
into
one
state
is
not
limited.
Since
we
need
to
permute
the
state
(10.4.2)
to
arrive
at
new
states
to
be
linear
superposed
in
the
manner
of
(10.4.5),
the
ordering
of
the
particles
within
the
states
is
not
important.
We
will
rst
derive
the
number
of
permutations
when
ordering
is
important.
One
can
imaging
the
M
states
to
be
equivalent
to
M
bins.
The
rst
particle
has
M
possible
bins
to
t
into.
However,
once
the
particle
is
put
into
one
of
the
bins,
since
ordering
is
important,
repetition
is
allowed,
there
are
two
ways
to
put
in
the
second
particle
in
the
same
bin,
before
or
after
the
rst
particle.
In
other
words,
the
rst
particle
splits
the
bin
into
two
compartments,
allowing
two
ways
to
put
two
particles
in
the
same
bin.
Together
with
the
other
M
-
1
bins,
there
are
M
+
1
ways
to
insert
the
second
particle
into
the
bins.
In
other
words,
adding
a
new
particle
always
adds
a
new
compartment
for
the
next
particle
to
t
in.
By
the
same
token,
the
third
particle
has
M
+
2
ways
to
t
into
the
bins
etc.
Finally
the
number
of
possible
ways
is
M(M
+
1)(M
+
2):::(M
+
N
-
1)
(10.5.2)
One
can
verify
that
the
above
gives
the
correct
answer
of
N!
if
only
one
bin
is
available
for
N
particles.
Since
ordering
is
unimportant,
we
have
(M
+
N
-
1)!
Nbasis
=
(10.5.3)
N!(M
-
1)!
3.
Identical
Fermions:
For
fermions,
the
rst
particle
has
M
states
to
choose
from.
The
second
particle
has
M
-
1
states
to
choose
from,
since
repetition
is
not
allowed.
Also,
ordering
is
not
important
since
all
permutations
are
used
in
the
summation
(10.4.8).
Consequently,
M!
Nbasis
=
(10.5.4)
N!(M
-
N)!
10.6
Examples
1.
Non-identical
Particles:
Say
if
we
have
two
electrons
with
di#erent
spins,
the
distinct
states
are
j1;aij2;ai,
j1;bij2;bi,
j1;aij2;bi,
j1;bij2;a.
(10.6.1)
The
above
is
in
agreement
with
M
=
2,
N
=
2,
MN
=22
=
4.
Identical
Particles
2.
Identical
Bosons:
Consider
the
4He
(helium
four)
atoms
which
are
bosons.
Then
the
possible
boson
states
are
1
j1;aij2;ai,
j1;bij2;bi,
v
(j1;aij2;b.
+
j1;bij2;ai)
(10.6.2)
(M+N..1)!
3!
Again
this
is
in
agreement
with
M
=
2,
N
=2,
=
=3.
N!(M..1)!
2!1!
3.
Identical
Fermions:
If
we
have
two
identical
fermions,
the
only
state
is
1
v
(j1;aij2;bi..j1;bij2;ai)
(10.6.3)
M!
2!
Again
this
is
in
agreement
with
M
=
2,
N
=2,
=
=1.
N!(M..N)!
2!0!
In
the
above
simple
examples,
we
see
that
for
the
boson
case,
there
are
more
states
with
particles
in
the
same
state
compared
to
the
other
cases.
In
the
boson
case,
there
are
two
out
of
three
states
where
the
particles
are
in
the
same
state
(see
(10.6.2)).
In
the
non-identical
particle
case,
there
are
two
out
of
four
such
states.
In
the
fermion
case,
there
is
none.
This
is
indicative
of
the
fact
that
bosons
like
to
cluster
together.
10.7
Thermal
Distribution
Functions
There
are
some
important
thermal
distribution
functions
in
understanding
semiconductor
physics.
These
are
the
Maxwell-Boltzmann
distribution,
the
Fermi-Dirac
distribution,
and
the
Bose-Einstein
distribution.
These
distribution
functions
are
derived
via
statistical
mechanics,
and
the
results
will
just
quoted
here.
The
rst-principles
derivations
are
given
in
Appendix
B.
1.
Maxwell-Boltzmann
Distribution:
For
this
distribution,
the
number
of
particles
N(E)
in
a
given
energy
state
is
given
by
..(E..#)
N(E)=
e
kBT
(10.7.1)
where
�
is
the
chemical
potential,
kB
is
the
Boltzmann
constant,
and
T
is
temperature
in
Kelvin.
2.
Fermi-Dirac
Distribution:
This
is
given
by
1
N(E)=
E..�
(10.7.2)
kBT
1+
e
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
10.1:
Fermi-Dirac
Distribution
for
changing
temperature
T
.
This
is
the
most
important
distribution
function
for
semiconductors.
The
chemical
potential
�
is
loosely
called
the
Fermi
level.
To
be
precise,
�
is
the
same
as
the
Fermi
level
at
absolute
zero
temperature.
When
T
is
zero,
the
distribution
function
looks
like
as
shown
in
Figure
10.1.
The
electrons
are
frozen
into
the
ground
state
for
E<#.
When
T>
0,
some
of
the
electrons
from
the
states
where
E<�
are
dislodged
by
thermal
agitation
into
states
where
E>#.
This
phenomenon
is
more
pronounced
as
T
increases.
This
distribution
also
explains
the
physical
character
of
semiconductors.
In
semiconductors,
the
Fermi
level
is
midway
in
between
the
valence
band
and
the
conduction
band.
When
T
=
0,
all
the
electrons
are
frozen
in
the
valence
band,
and
the
semiconductor
cannot
conduct
electricity,
as
there
are
no
free
electrons
in
the
conduction
band.
When
T>
0,
some
electrons
in
the
valence
band
are
dislodged
into
the
conduction
band.
This
gives
rise
to
electrons
in
the
conduction
band,
and
holes
in
the
valence
band.
They
contribute
to
the
ow
of
electric
current
and
the
semiconductor
starts
to
conduct.
The
conductivity
of
the
semi-conductor
material
increases
with
increasing
temperature.
3.
Bose-Einstein
Distribution:
The
Bose-Einstein
distribution
is
for
bosons,
and
it
is
given
by
1
N(E)
=
(10.7.3)
e(E..#)=(kBT
)
-
1
This
distribution
has
a
divergence
when
E
=
#.
It
also
reects
the
fact
that
bosons
like
to
cluster
together.
When
the
temperature
is
low,
they
condense
to
around
the
chemical
potential
#.
Identical
Particles
Figure
10.2:
Comparison
of
di#erent
thermal
distribution
functions.
For
high
energy
states,
they
are
similar
to
each
other
(from
DAB
Miller).
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Chapter
11
Density
Matrix
11.1
Pure
and
Mixed
States
Given
a
quantum
state
described
by
j .
=
a1j 1.
+
a2j 2.
(11.1.1)
which
is
a
linear
superposition
of
two
states,
the
interpretation
of
quantum
mechanics
is
that
the
particle
is
in
a
linear
superposition
of
the
two
states,
and
one
does
not
know
what
state
the
particle
is
in
until
the
measurement
is
done.
The
measurement
collapses
the
particle
into
one
of
the
two
quantum
states.
For
instance,
the
two
states
could
be
the
spin
states
of
an
atom.
The
famous
Stern-Gerlach
experiment
separates
the
spin
states
into
the
up
state
and
the
down
state.
Such
a
state
indicated
in
(11.1.1)
is
known
as
a
pure
quantum
state.
The
phase
relationship
between
a1
and
a2
is
maintained
precisely.
When
the
quantum
state
is
in
such
a
state,
we
say
that
the
two
states
are
coherent.
However,
there
are
states
where
the
particle
has
already
collapsed
into
state
1
or
state
2
even
before
the
measurement.
Or
these
two
states
are
entirely
uncorrelated
or
incoherent.
The
particle
is
either
in
state
1
or
state
2.
The
probability
of
nding
the
particle
in
state
1
is
ja1j2
while
that
for
state
2
is
ja2j2
.
The
phase
relationship
between
a1
and
a2
is
completely
random.
States
for
which
there
is
no
coherence
between
a1
and
a2
are
known
as
mixed
states.
If
we
take
an
ensemble
average
of
the
measurement
outcomes
of
the
mixed
states,
they
satisfy
the
aforementioned
probability
property.
Nevertheless,
it
is
di#cult
for
a
particle
to
be
in
a
pure
quantum
state
if
it
involves
a
linear
superposition
of
many
quantum
states
unless
the
quantum
system
is
completely
isolated.
Coupling
to
the
thermal
bath
can
destroy
the
coherence
between
these
states.
Hence,
there
are
states
for
which
partial
coherence
still
exists,
and
the
linear
superposition
of
quantum
states
de-coheres
with
respect
to
each
other,
before
the
linear
superposition
of
states
becomes
entirely
a
mixed
state.
Coherence
lifetime
is
used
to
measure
when
a
linear
superposition
of
quantum
states,
which
starts
out
being
a
coherent
sum,
becomes
an
incoherent
superposition.
111
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
11.2
Density
Operator
An
elegant
way
to
represent
a
quantum
state
that
is
either
in
the
pure
state,
mixed
state,
or
partial
coherent
state,
is
via
the
density
operator
#^=
j ih |
(11.2.1)
^
We
can
easily
show
that
the
expectation
of
the
operator
A
in
this
state
is
^
hA^.
=
h jA^j .
=
tr
A#^(11.2.2)
This
has
been
shown
in
Section
5.2.3.
Therefore,
knowing
the
density
operator
is
equivalent
to
knowing
the
quantum
state
of
a
system
which
is
denoted
by
state
j i.
Say
if
we
start
with
(11.1.1)
for
a
quantum
state,
using
it
in
(11.2.1)
will
yield
#*
#^=
ja1j2j 1ih 1|
+
ja2j2j 2ih 2|
+
a1a2j 1ih 2|
+
a2a1j 2ih 1|
(11.2.3)
Notice
that
only
relative
phases
between
a1
and
a2
are
needed
to
form
the
above.
Absolute
phase
has
no
meaning
in
quantum
mechanics.
##
For
a
mixed
state,
we
assume
that
the
off
diagonal
terms
involving
a1a2
and
a2a1
will
either
time
average
or
ensemble
average
to
zero
since
they
are
incoherent.
Hence,
we
suppose
that
#^=
ja1j2j 1ih 1|
+
ja2j2j 2ih 2|
=
p1j 1ih 1|
+
p2j 2ih 2|
(11.2.4)
The
form
(11.2.4)
can
be
thought
of
as
having
been
ensemble
averaged
or
time
averaged.1
For
a
general
mixed
state
we
can
further
write
the
density
operator
as
#^=
pj
j j
ih j
|
(11.2.5)
where
j j
.
are
pure
quantum
states
but
not
necessarily
stationary
states,
and
pj
is
the
probability
of
nding
the
quantum
system
in
state
j ji.
When
we
nd
the
expectation
value
of
an
operator
A^with
a
mixed
state,
it
can
be
thought
of
as
having
been
ensemble
averaged.
For
example,
hA^.
=
tr(
A^#^)
=
pj
tr(A^j jih j
j)
=
pjh j
jA^j j.
(11.2.6)
The
trace
of
the
matrix
representation
of
an
operator
is
independent
of
the
basis
states
chosen
to
represent
the
operator
as
explained
in
Chapter
5.
It
will
be
interesting
to
see
how
the
density
operator
changes
under
the
change
of
basis
state.
To
this
end,
we
let
(j)
j j.
=
c(t)j#n.
(11.2.7)
n
n
1Statistical
processes
whose
time
average
and
ensemble
average
are
equivalent
to
each
other
are
known
as
ergodic
processes.
Density
Matrix
Using
this
in
(11.2.5),
we
have
j
(j))
*
#^=
pj
cnj#nih#mj(c
m
j
n;m
(j)(j)
=
j#nih#m|
pj
c(c)
*
(11.2.8)
nm
n;m
j
We
can
nd
the
uv
element
of
the
matrix
representation
of
^.
as
(j)(j)]
##
#uv
=
h#uj#^j#v.
=
pj
c[c=
cucv
(11.2.9)
uv
j
where
the
overbar
stands
for
ensemble
average.
From
the
above,
it
is
quite
clear
that
#uv
=
#vu
*
(11.2.10)
or
that
the
density
matrix
is
Hermitian.
The
Hermiticity
property
of
the
density
operator
is
obvious
from
(11.1.1)
and
(11.2.5).
Since
a
trace
of
an
operator
is
independent
of
the
basis
state
in
which
it
is
represented,
the
trace
of
the
density
operator
is
de
ned
as
tr(^#)=
h#uj#^j#u.
(11.2.11)
where
#u
constitutes
an
orthonormal
basis.
For
a
pure
quantum
state,
#^2
=
j ih j ih |
=
j ih |
=
#^(11.2.12)
Therefore,
tr(^#2)
=
tr(^#)
=
1
(11.2.13)
The
trace
of
the
above
is
1
is
obviated
by
setting
A
to
1
in
Equation
(11.2.6).
For
a
mixed
state
#^2
=
pipjj iih ij j
ih j|
(11.2.14)
ij
Taking
the
trace
of
the
above,
we
have
tr(^#2)=
h#nj#^2j#n.
=
pipjh#nj iih ij jih j
j#n.
n
nij
!2
=
pipj
jh ij j
ij2
=
pipj
=
pi
=
1
(11.2.15)
ij
iji
In
the
above,
we
did
not
assume
that
j j.
are
orthogonal,
but
they
are
normalized.
The
inequality
follows
from
that
jh ij jij2
=
1.
Hence,
the
trace
of
the
density
operator
has
the
property
that
tr(^#2)
<
1,
mixed
state
(11.2.16)
tr(^#2)=1,
pure
state
(11.2.17)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
11.3
Time
Evolution
of
the
Matrix
Element
of
an
Operator
The
matrix
representation
of
an
operator
is
given
by
Amn(t)=
h m(t)jA^j n(t).
(11.3.1)
Taking
the
time
derivative
of
the
above,we
have
@tAmn(t)=
h@t m(t)jA^j n(t).
+
h m(t)jA^j@t n(t).
(11.3.2)
^
assuming
that
A
is
time
independent,
using
the
fact
that
^
i~@tj m(t).
=
i~j@t m(t).
=
Hj m(t).
(11.3.3)
we
have
i
i
^|
�
A|
^
@tAmn(t)=
H m(t)
Aj n(t)
..h m(t)|
^H n(t).
i
i
=
h m(t)jH^
A^j n(t)i-
h m(t)jA^H^
j n(t).
=
h m(t)jH^
A^-
A^H^
j n(t).
(11.3.4)
or
i~@tAmn(t)=(
A^H^
-
H^
A^)mn
=
A,
H^(11.3.5)
mn
The
above
applies
to
expectation
value
of
A
as
well,
as
shown
in
Chapter
5,
where
hA^.
=
h (t)jA^j (t).
(11.3.6)
and
i~@thA^.
=
hA^H^-
H^
A^.
=
A,
H�
(11.3.7)
�
^
In
other
words,
if
A
commutes
with
H,
its
expectation
value
is
time
independent.
In
the
^
above
derivation,
we
have
assumed
that
A
is
independent
of
time.
The
time
evolution
of
the
density
operator
can
be
derived,
similar
to
the
time
evolution
of
the
expectation
value
of
an
operator.
However,
the
density
operator
is
in
general
time
dependent,
whereas
operators
considered
previously
are
time
indepFendent;
and
hence,
the
derivation
is
slightly
di#erent.
Given
#^=
j ih |
(11.3.8)
then
@t#^=
j@t ih |
+
j ih@t |
(11.3.9)
Density
Matrix
Using
(11.3.3),
we
have
iii
i
@t#^=
-
Hj ih |
+
j ih jH^
#^H^
H^
#^=
#;^H^
(11.3.10)
There
is
a
sign
di#erence
between
(11.3.7)
and
(11.3.10).
The
above
holds
if
^.
is
in
a
mixed
state
as
well
#^=
pj
j j
ih j
|
(11.3.11)
j
This
follows
from
the
linearity
of
the
above
equations
and
that
pj
is
time-independent.
Equation
(11.3.10)
can
be
easily
generalized
to
matrix
elements
when
the
basis
functions
used
for
seeking
the
matrix
representation
are
from
time-independent
basis.
Then,
@t#mn
=
i
#^H^
-
H^
#^=
i
#;^H^
(11.3.12)
.
mn
.
mn
where
Amn
=
h mjA^j ni,
and
i
is
from
a
time-independent
basis.
By
inserting
identity
operator
de
ned
using
the
same
basis
set,
we
can
convert
the
above
into
wholly
a
matrix
form:
i
#.
@t.
=
#,
H
(11.3.13)
where
.
and
H
are
the
matrix
representations
of
^.
and
H,
respectively.
We
often
do
not
^
distinguished
the
matrix
representations
.
and
H,
and
operator
representations
^.
and
H,
as
mathematically,
they
are
the
same.
The
above
equation
replaces
the
Schrodinger
equation
as
the
equation
of
motion
for
the
quantum
system.
11.4
Interaction
of
Light
with
Two-Level
Atomic
System
Two-level
systems
are
encountered
in
nuclear
magnetic
resonance
when
the
spin
states
of
a
particle
interact
with
a
magnetic
eld.
Many
more
complex
systems,
for
simplicity,
can
be
approximated
by
a
two-level
system.
When
an
electric
eld
(optical
eld)
interacts
with
an
atom
and
causes
an
atomic
transition
between
two
energy
levels,
while
the
other
energy
levels
are
far
away,
the
system
can
be
approximated
by
a
simpler
two-level
system.
Also,
approximate
two-level
systems
are
often
use
to
represent
the
value
\0�
and
\1�
in
quantum
computing
as
we
shall
see
later.
One
assumes
that
before
the
system
is
perturbed,
the
atom
is
described
by
a
simple
two-level
system
with
two
stationary
states
bearing
energies
E1
and
E2.
In
this
case,
the
perturbing
Hamiltonian
is
assumed
to
be
H^
p
=
ezE
=
..E#^(11.4.1)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
The
matrix
representation
of
the
dipole
moment
in
terms
of
two
stationary
states
before
perturbation
is
given
by2
#mn
=
..eh mjz^j n.
(11.4.2)
where
^z
is
the
position
operator,
and
H^
p
=
Hp;mn
=
..E#mn
(11.4.3)
mn
In
the
above
#11
=
#22
=
0,
so
are
Hp11
=
Hp22
=
0,
because
m
and
n
have
di#erent
parities.
In
other
words,
if
one
of
them
has
odd
parity,
the
other
one
has
even
parity.
Then
in
the
coordinate
representation,
the
function
j ij2z
will
have
odd
parity,
and
its
integral
evaluates
to
zero.
But
for
the
off
diagonal
elements,
the
integrands
will
have
even
parity,
and
their
integrals
evaluate
to
nonzero
values.
The
matrix
elements
above
are
formed
with
stationary
states,
and
#12
can
be
made
pure
real
so
that
#12
=
#21
=
#d.
Hence,
the
perturbing
Hamiltonian
becomes
0
..E#d
H^
p
=
(11.4.4)
..E#d
0
The
above
can
be
simpli
ed
to,
and
approximated
by
a
two-level
system
with
the
use
of
simple
matrix
mechanics.
This
is
also
very
much
in
the
spirit
of
a
nite-basis
method,
where
a
small
number
of
basis
can
form
a
good
approximation
of
the
quantum
system.
The
unperturbed
Hamiltonian,
H^
0
is
assumed
to
have
eigenvalues
E1
and
E2
with
respect
to
these
two
stationary
states.
The
total
Hamiltonian
is
then
E1
..E#d
^^
H
=
H0
+
H^
p
=
(11.4.5)
..E#d
E2
The
equation
of
motion
according
to
Schrodinger
equation
is
i~@tj .
=
Hj .
(11.4.6)
In
the
above,
the
perturbing
Hamiltonian
introduces
the
off
diagonal
terms.
They
are
responsible
for
causing
the
transition
of
eigenstates
between
state
1
and
state
2.
If
the
off
diagonal
terms
are
absent,
the
stationary
states
will
remain
in
their
respective
states
without
transition.
In
the
above
nite
basis
approximation
to
the
Hamiltonian,
the
basis
used
consists
of
the
two
eigenstates
of
the
original
unperturbed
problem.
This
is
a
subspace
approximation
method,
whereby
an
in
nite
dimensional
Hilbert
space
has
been
replaced
by
a
two-dimensional
subspace.
The
density
matrix
which
is
the
matrix
representation
of
the
density
operator
is
#11
#12
#^=
(11.4.7)
#21
#22
2This
is
an
approximation
since
after
perturbation,
the
quantum
state
is
not
necessarily
describable
by
just
two
stationary
states.
We
saw
that
in
the
time-dependent
perturbation
theory,
all
eigenstates
of
the
system
was
necessary
to
approximate
the
perturbed
system.
Density
Matrix
With
the
notation
of
(11.2.3),
the
density
matrix
is
ja1(t)j2
a1(t)a2(t)
#^=
(11.4.8)
a2(t)a1(t)
ja2(t)j2
In
(11.2.3),
we
assume
here
that
the
two
states
are
stationary
states
(they
need
not
be),
and
the
time
variations
of
the
states
have
been
put
into
a1(t)
and
a2(t).
Hence,
the
off
diagonal
terms
can
be
rapidly
varying
functions
of
time
due
to
the
interference
between
the
two
stationary
states.
The
expectation
value
of
the
dipole
moment
is
h#^.
=
tr(^##^)
(11.4.9)
where
.
.
.
.
.
.
^#^�
=
#11
#21
#12
#22
0
#d
#d
0
=
#12#d
#22#d
#11#d
#21#d
(11.4.10)
Hence
h#^.
=
#d(#12
+
#21)=2#d<e(#12)
(11.4.11)
because
#12
=
#*
21.
Next,
we
derive
the
equation
of
motion
for
the
density
matrix.
Since
d^#i
=
#^H^
-
H^
#^
dt
.
###.
#.
#.
#.
i
#11
#12
E1
..E#d
E1
..E#d
#11
#12
=
..
.
#21
#22
..E#d
E2
..E#d
E2
#21
#22
i
..E#d(#12
-
#21)
..E#d(#11
-
#22)+(E2
-
E1)#12
=
(11.4.12)
.
..E#d(#22
-
#11)+(E1
-
E2)#21
..E#d(#21
-
#12)
From
the
above
d#21
i#dE
=
[(#11
-
#22)E#d
-
(E2
-
E1)#21]=
..i!21#21
+
i
(#11
-
#22)
(11.4.13)
dt
~.
where
~!21
=
E2
-
E1.
We
need
not
write
down
the
equation
for
#12
since
#12
=
#*
21.
From
(11.4.12)
d#11
i
d#22
i
=
-
E#d(#12
-
#21),
=
-
E#d(#21
-
#12)
(11.4.14)
dt
~dt
~
From
them,
we
get
di
2i
..4
(#11
-
#22)=
-
E#d(#12
-
#21
-
#21
+
#12)=
E#d(#21
-
#21*
)=
E#d=m(#21)
dt
~~.
(11.4.15)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
since
#12
=
#*
The
above
equations,
(11.4.13)
and
(11.4.15),
form
two
coupled
equations
21.
from
which
the
unknowns,
#11
-
#22
and
#12
can
be
solved
for.
At
his
point,
we
are
going
to
add
phenomenological
terms
to
the
above
equations
to
make
them
agree
with
experimental
observations.
The
above
two
level
system,
so
far,
has
been
isolated
from
a
thermal
bath.
It
more
aptly
describes
the
two
level
system
of
a
single
atom
in
isolation.
In
actuality,
there
will
be
a
collection
of
atoms
that
will
be
similarly
excited
by
the
electric
eld.
These
atoms
will
be
coupled
to
other
thermal
sources
such
as
by
collision
with
other
atoms
or
with
the
wall
of
the
container.
The
density
matrix
can
be
used
to
represent
the
ensemble
averaged
state
of
the
collection
of
these
atoms.
Here,
for
a
collection
of
atoms,
#11
-
#22
is
the
fractional
population
di#erence
in
electrons
of
the
atoms
between
state
1
and
state
2.
But
when
coupled
to
a
thermal
bath,
there
will
be
some
electrons
excited
to
level
2
even
in
the
absence
of
an
external
electric
eld.
Hence,
we
modify
(11:4:15)
to
account
for
the
coupling
to
a
thermal
bath
to
become
d
2i
#.
-
##o
#.
=
E#d
(#21
-
.
*
(11.4.16)
21)
-
dt
.
T1
where
#.
=
#11
-
#22,##o
=(#11
-
#22)is
the
quiescent
steady
state
value
of
#.
in
the
absence
of
external
driving
eld.
The
transient
value
#.
is
assumed
to
relax
to
the
quiescent
value
##o
in
time
T1.
Also,
#21
=
Ce..i!21t
in
the
absence
of
external
driving
eld.
But
if
the
two
level
system
is
coupled
to
an
external
heat
bath
the
phase
coherence
between
the
two
energy
states
will
be
lost
and
average
to
zero.
We
can
describe
this
by
adding
a
term
to
(11:4:13)
to
account
for
dephasing,
or
d#21
#d
#21
=
..i!21#21
+
iE
#.
-
(11.4.17)
dt
.
T2
T2
is
the
dephasing
time
which
is
usually
shorter
than
T1.
At
this
point,
it
is
prudent
to
discuss
the
role
of
the
exciting
eld,
which
is
of
the
form
Eo
i!t
..i!t
E
(t)=
Eo
cos
!t
=
e
+
e
(11.4.18)
When
#.
is
slowly
varying
in
(11.4.17),
the
driving
term,
which
is
the
second
term
on
the
i!t
..i!t
right-hand
side
in
(11.4.17)
has
two
rotating
signals
eand
e.
The
response,
#21
will
have
two
rotating
signals
as
well.
Hence,
#21
=
Ce..i!t
+
c.c.3
when
driven
by
a
sinusoidal
source
(11:4:18).
Therefore,
we
de
ne
i!t
2i!t
21
(t)=
#21
(t)
e
=
C
+
C
*
e
(11.4.19)
where
C
is
slowly
varying
so
that
21
(t)
is
slowly
varying
when
we
ignore
the
rapid
term.
Using
this
in
(11:4:16),
we
have
d
dt
#.
=
i
~
Eo#d
(
21
-
�
*
12)
-
#.
-
##o
T1
(11.4.20)
3where
c.c.
stands
for
complex
conjugate.
Density
Matrix
In
the
above,
we
have
kept
only
the
slowest
varying
term
of
the
rst
term
on
the
right-hand
side.
The
rapid
term
is
assumed
to
only
result
in
a
small
response
in
##.
This
is
known
as
the
rotating
wave
approximation.
From
(11:4:18),
we
deduce
that
d#21
(t)
..i!t
=
d
21
(t)
e
..i!t
-
i!
21
(t)
e
(11.4.21)
dt
dt
Consequently,
(11:4:13)
becomes
d#dEo
21
21
=
i
#!
21
+
i
#.
-
(11.4.22)
dt
2.
T2
where
#.
=
.
-
!21,
and
we
have
kept
only
the
slowly
varying
terms.
Previously,
we
have
found
that
i!t
..i!t
h#^.
=
#d
(#12
+
#21)=
#d
12e
+
21e
(11.4.23)
after
using
(11:4:19).
Therefore
h#^.
=2#d
[<e
(
21)
cos
!t
+
=m
(
21)
sin
!t]
(11.4.24)
since
21
=
*
12.
In
steady
state,
d##=dt
=
0
in
(11:4:20).
Furthermore,
#.
in
(11:4:22)
is
a
constant
in
steady
state,
and
hence,
2,
must
tend
to
a
constant
in
steady
state
with
d
21=dt
=
0.
De
ning
O
=
#dEo/
(2~),
we
have
from
(11.4.20)
and
(11.4.22)
that
0=
i#!
21
+
i
#.
-
21=T2
(11.4.25)
0=
..#
=m
(
21)
-
(#.
-
##o)
=T1
(11.4.26)
Taking
the
real
and
imaginary
parts
of
(11:4:25),
we
arrive
at
0=
..#!=m
(
21)
..<e
(
21)
=T2
(11.4.27)
0=#!<e
(
21)
+
#.
..=m
(
21)
=T2
(11.4.28)
Equations
(11:4:26)-(11:4:28)
constitute
three
equations
with
three
unknowns
##,
=m
(
21),
<e
(
21),
from
which
they
can
be
solved
for.
Therefore
1+#!2T2
2
#.
=##o
(11.4.29)
1+#!2T
2
+
4
2T1T2
#!
T2
2##o
<e
(
21)=
-
(11.4.30)
1+#!2T2
2
+
4
2T1T2
T2##o
=m
(
21)=
-
(11.4.31)
1+#!2T2
2
+
4
2T1T2
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
If
there
are
N
atoms,
then
we
de
ne
#N
=
N##,
#No
=
N##o
(11.4.32)
and
1+#!2T2
2
#N
=#No
(11.4.33)
1+#!2T
2
+
4
2T1T2
In
electromagnetics,
we
have
P
=
#o#E
(11.4.34)
in
phasor
representation.
In
time
domain
..i!t
P
=
<e#o
(#.
+
i#00)
Eoe
=
#o
(#.
cos
!t
+
#0.
sin
!t)
Eo
(11.4.35)
But
P
=
N
h#^.
(11.4.36)
From
(11:4:24),
we
have
P
=2N#d
[<e
(
21)
cos
!t
+
=m
(
21)
sin
!t]
(11.4.37)
Comparing
(11:4:35)
and
(11:4:37),
we
have
2N#d
#.
=
<e
(
21)
#oEo
#dT2#No
#!T2
=
..(11.4.38)
#o.
1
+
(#!)T
2
+
4
2T1T2
2N#d
#0.
=
=m
(
21)
#oE
#T2#No
1
=
(11.4.39)
#o.
1
+
(#!)T
2
+
4
2T1T2
When
the
applied
electric
eld
is
small,
we
can
ignore
the
4
2T1T2
term
to
get
#T2#No
(!21
-
!)
T2
#.
(!)
=
(11.4.40)
#o.
1+(.
-
!21)T
2
#T2#No
1
#0.
(!)
=
(11.4.41)
#o.
1+(.
-
!21)T
2
Note
that
in
this
analysis,
the
perturbing
eld
need
not
be
small.
The
approximation
we
have
made
is
the
two-state
approximation.
This
is
a
decent
approximation
if
the
other
eigenstates
are
far
away
from
these
two
states
in
terms
of
energy
levels.
The
other
approximation
is
the
rotating
wave
approximation
which
is
good
if
the
exciting
frequency
of
the
electric
eld
is
high
and
is
much
faster
than
the
relaxation
times
T1
and
T2,
and
that
it
is
close
to
!21.
Density
Matrix
Figure
11.1:
Plots
of
#.
and
#0.
according
to
(11.4.40)
and
(11.4.41)
(from
DAB
Miller).
Also,
this
analysis
is
not
a
small
perturbation
analysis
since
the
exciting
eld
need
not
be
weak.
In
fact,
O
above,
which
is
proportional
to
the
exciting
electric
eld,
can
be
large.
When
it
is
large,
we
note
from
(11.4.29)
and
(11.4.33)
that
the
fractional
population
difference
approaches
zero,
or
that
#11
=
#22.
In
this
case,
the
absorption
transition
is
equal
to
the
stimulated
emission.
From
(11.4.39),
when
#.
=
0,
or
.
=
!21
we
can
express
the
denominator
as
1
+
4
2T1T2
=1+
I
(11.4.42)
Is
where
I
is
the
eld
intensity,
and
Is
is
the
saturation
intensity,
since
I
is
proportional
to
the
square
of
the
electric
eld.
The
saturation
intensity
is
de
ned
to
be
the
intensity
at
which
the
absorption
peak
of
#0.
will
drop
to
half
of
its
value
compared
to
the
weak
excitation
case
where
I
is
very
small.
Equations
(11.4.20)
and
(11.4.22)
are
also
known
as
the
optical
Bloch
equations.
These
equations
were
rst
used
to
analyze
another
two-state
system,
the
nuclear
magnetic
resonance
system.
With
a
magnetic
eld
pointing
in
the
z
direction,
when
the
nuclear
spins
are
pointing
upward
and
aligned
with
the
magnetic
eld,
they
are
in
the
lower
energy
state.
However,
when
they
are
pointing
anti-parallel
to
the
magnetic
eld,
they
are
in
a
higher
energy
state.
RF
(radio
frequency)
eld
can
be
used
to
ip
the
spin
states,
and
similar
equations
as
above
can
be
derived
to
describe
the
spin
dynamics.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Chapter
12
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
12.1
Introduction
The
quantum
harmonic
oscillator
is
extremely
important
for
the
quantization
of
classical
elds,
be
it
electromagnetic,
acoustic,
or
elastic
in
nature.
Classical
elds
can
be
thought
of
as
due
to
a
set
of
coupled
classical
harmonic
oscillators.
In
the
case
of
electromagnetics
eld,
these
classical
harmonic
oscillators
are
dipoles
in
space
polarized
by
the
electric
eld.
In
the
case
of
acoustic
or
elastic
eld,
they
are
due
to
coupled
atomic
or
molecular
vibration
in
a
medium.
Many
experimental
evidence
suggest
that
there
are
photon
particles
associated
with
electromagnetic
eld,
and
phonon
particles
associated
with
vibrations
of
atoms
or
molecules
in
crystalline
solids.
When
the
classical
harmonic
oscillators
are
replaced
by
quantum
harmonic
oscillators,
the
classical
eld
becomes
quantized
as
shall
be
seen.
The
energy
that
can
propagate
and
associated
with
the
eld
is
quantized,
as
in
the
case
of
the
quantum
harmonic
oscillator.
In
classical
electromagnetics
when
we
calculate
energy,
e.g.
as
stored
energies
11
22
We
=
.
jEj;Wh
=
�
jHj(12.1.1)
22
we
think
of
We
and
Wh
as
a
continuum,
capable
of
assuming
all
values
from
zero
to
a
large
value.
Also,
the
power
ow
by
a
plane
wave
1
S
=
jEj(12.1.2)
2#0
assumes
continuous
values
in
classical
electromagnetics.
As
shall
be
shown,
this
cannot
be
the
case
if
electromagnetic
eld
consists
is
due
to
a
set
of
coupled
quantum
harmonic
oscillators.
The
energy
carried
by
a
plane
wave
is
also
quantized
corresponding
to
packets
of
energy.
The
quantized
nature
of
electromagnetic
radiation
has
been
observed
historically.
This
was
rst
suggested
for
and
used
to
deriving
the
Planck
radiation
law.
Later,
it
was
used
by
Einstein
to
explain
experimental
ndings
in
the
photoelectric
e#ect.
From
the
experimental
data,
it
was
deduced
that
the
packet
of
energy
associated
with
electromagnetic
eld
is
Ephoton
=
~.
(12.1.3)
123
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
This
quantized
energy
is
very
small
when
.
is
small
but
sizeable
in
the
optical
regime.
The
grainy
nature
of
electromagnetic
eld
is
unimportant
at
radio
frequency
(RF),
and
microwave
frequencies,
but
is
important
at
optical
frequencies.
We
shall
show
that
this
is
the
case
when
electromagnetic
eld
is
quantized
when
the
classical
harmonic
oscillators
are
replaced
by
quantum
harmonic
oscillators.
To
introduce
the
quantized
nature
of
electromagnetic
eld,
one
way
is
to
regard
electromagnetic
eld
to
be
in
a
resonant
cavity
or
a
box
with
periodic
boundary
condition.
The
electromagnetic
eld
in
such
a
system
oscillates
harmonically.
We
can
replace
the
classical
harmonic
oscillators
associated
with
such
a
system
with
the
quantum
harmonic
oscillator;
and
hence,
quantize
the
amplitude
and
the
associated
energy
of
the
electromagnetic
eld.
A
prevailing
view
is
to
think
of
a
photon
as
a
particle,
but
is
associated
with
a
wave
eld
that
satis
es
Maxwell's
equations.
This
is
analogous
to
an
electron
being
a
particle
and
is
associated
with
a
wavefunction
as
its
\halo".
As
photons
are
bosons,
we
can
have
a
collection
of
photons
described
by
the
same
wave
eld,
with
di#erent
amplitudes,
since
this
wave
eld
is
now
endowed
with
more
energy.
As
shall
be
seen,
the
wave
eld
associated
with
photons
is
quite
di#erent
from
the
wave
eld
associated
with
electrons,
or
other
boson
particles
obeying
Schrodinger
equation.
We
will
rst
revisit
the
quantum
harmonic
oscillator
due
to
its
importance
here.
Next
we
study
the
wave
on
a
linear
atomic
chain,
rst
as
a
classical
wave,
and
then
as
a
set
of
coupled
quantum
harmonic
oscillators.
Then
we
study
the
quantization
of
electromagnetic
wave
eld
along
similar
spirit.
12.2
The
Quantum
Harmonic
Oscillator
Revisited
The
governing
equation
for
the
quantum
harmonic
oscillator
is
~2
d2
1
2
^
H.
=
-
+
m!2
z.
=
E.
(12.2.1)
2m
dz2
2
m!
Letting
.
=
.
z,
we
have
1
d2
E
-
+
#2
.
=
.
(12.2.2)
2
d#2
~.
The
above
looks
almost
like
A2
-
B2
with
the
exception
that
operators
are
involved
instead
of
scalars.
We
can
look
at
1
d
1
d
1
d2
1
dd
p-
+
.
v
+
.
=
-
+
#2
-
.
-
.
(12.2.3)
2
d.
2
d.
2
d#2
2
d.
d.
One
can
show
easily
that
dd
.
-
.
=
I
(12.2.4)
d.
d.
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
Hence,
1
d2
1
d
1
d
1
-
+
#2
=
p-
+
.
v
+
.
+
(12.2.5)
2
d#2
2
d.
2
d.
2
We
de
ne
1
d
a^=
p-
+
#,
creation
or
raising
operator
(12.2.6)
2
d.
1
d
a^=
v
+
#,
annihilation
or
lowering
operator
(12.2.7)
2
d.
It
can
easily
be
shown
by
integration
by
parts
that
^a�
is
in
fact
the
conjugate
transpose
operator
of
^a.
Consequently,
from
(12.2.1)
and
(12.2.2),
we
have
1
E
y^
2
~.
a^a
+
.
=
.
(12.2.8)
and
#.
1
^y^
H
=
~!a^a
+
(12.2.9)
Since
#.
1
En
=
n
+
~.
(12.2.10)
we
conclude
that
a^ya^j n.
=
n
j n.
(12.2.11)
In
other
words,
if
j n.
is
an
eigenstate
of
(12:2:1)
or
(12:2:8),
the
above
must
be
true.
We
can
de
ne
a
number
operator
n^=^a
ya^(12.2.12)
such
that
n^j n.
=
n
j n.
(12.2.13)
One
can
also
show
by
direct
substitution
using
(12:2:6)
and
(12:2:7)
that
�
-
^y^^
a;^a^y=^aa^aa
=
I
(12.2.14)
One
can
easily
show,
using
the
commutation
relation,
that
a^ya^a^j n.
=
a^a^�
-
1
a^j n.
=(n
-
1)
^a
j n.
(12.2.15)
Therefore
a^j n.
=
An
j n..1.
(12.2.16)
Similarly,
using
the
commutation
relation,
a^ya^a^�
j n.
=^a
1+^a
ya^j n.
=(n
+
1)^a
�
j n.
(12.2.17)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Therefore
a^�
j n.
=
Bn+1
j n+1.
(12.2.18)
Testing
(12:2:16)
with
h n..1j,
and
(12:2:18)
with
h n+1j,
we
have
h n..1|
a^j n.
=
An
,
h n+1|
a^�
j n.
=
Bn+1
(12.2.19)
By
comparing
the
two
equations
in
(12:2:19),
and
that
h n..1|
a^j n.
=
Bn
*
(12.2.20)
it
is
clear
that
An
=
Bn
*
(12.2.21)
Since
y^
a^a
j n.
=
Ana^�
j n..1.
=
AnBn
j n.
(12.2.22)
=
jAnjj n.
=
n
j n.
(12.2.23)
We
conclude
that
An
=
n
(12.2.24)
For
simplicity,
we
assume
that
An
and
Bn
are
both
real.
Therefore
a^j n.
=
n
j n..1.
(12.2.25)
v
a^�
j n.
=
n
+1
j n+1.
(12.2.26)
12.2.1
Eigenfunction
by
the
Ladder
Approach
With
the
raising
operators,
we
can
construct
the
requisite
eigenfunctions
if
we
only
know
the
ground
state
eigenfunction.
The
ground
state
eigenfunction
satis
es
a^j 0.
=
0
(12.2.27)
Written
explicitly
in
coordinate
space
representation
we
have
1
d
v
+
# 0
(#)
=
0
(12.2.28)
2
d.
We
can
solve
the
above
ordinary
di#erential
equation
to
get
1
..#2=2
0
(#)=
e
(12.2.29)
#1=4
(We
can
also
verify
that
0
(#)
satis
es
(12:2:28)
by
direct
substitution.)
Consequently,
one
can
show
that
..#n
v
a^j 0.
=
n!
j n.
(12.2.30)
or
that
the
n-th
eigenstate
is
1
.
y#n
j n.
=
v
a^j 0.
(12.2.31)
n!
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
12.3
Quantization
of
Waves
on
a
Linear
Atomic
Chain�
Phonons
When
a
particle
is
in
simple
harmonic
motion,
quantum
mechanics
allows
us
to
quantize
its
motion
using
Schrodinger
equation
for
the
harmonic
oscillator.
When
we
have
an
atomic
chain,
there
will
be
coupling
forces
between
the
atoms.
When
one
of
the
atoms
is
set
into
simple
harmonic
oscillation,
the
whole
chain
will
be
in
simple
harmonic
oscillation
due
to
coupling
between
them.
Since
the
energy
of
one
single
particle
is
quantized
in
the
quantum
realm,
we
expect
that
harmonic
oscillation
of
the
whole
chain
to
be
quantized
in
energy
as
well.
This
is
a
much
easier
notion
to
accept
if
we
accept
that
the
energy
of
one
particle
is
quantized.
Figure
12.1:
The
linear
atomic
chain
(from
Haken).
For
atoms
on
a
linear
atomic
chain,
assuming
only
nearest
neighbor
forces
between
the
particles,
the
equation
of
motion
is
m0q`(t)=
f
[q`+1(t)
-
q`(t)]
-
f
[q`(t)
-
q`..1(t)]
=
f
[q`+1(t)
-
2q`(t)+
q`..1(t)]
(12.3.1)
We
impose
the
periodic
boundary
condition
so
that
q.
=
q`+N
(12.3.2)
Assuming
that
1
ik.
`aBk(t)
q`(t)=
v
e
(12.3.3)
where
2#p
k.
=
(12.3.4)
Na
where
.
is
an
integer
ranging
from
..8
to
1.
Since
k.
is
countable,
we
will
drop
the
subscript
.
and
use
k
as
an
index.
Using
(12.3.3)
in
(12.3.1),
we
have
�
ika
..ika
-
2
Bk(t)=
g
e
+
eBk(t)
(12.3.5)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
with
g
=
(12.3.6)
m0
We
let
#i!kt
Bk(t)=
Bk(0)e
(12.3.7)
Using
(12.3.7)
in
(12.3.5)
yields
..!k
2
=2g
[cos
(ka)
-
1]
(12.3.8)
or
v
ka
!k
=
#2
g
sin
(12.3.9)
The
kinetic
energy
of
the
system
is
m0
T
=
q.
(12.3.10)
`=1
while
the
potential
energy
V
=
f
(q.
-
q`+1)
(12.3.11)
`=1
such
that
the
force
on
the
`-th
atom
is
F.
=
-
V
(12.3.12)
@q.
The
classical
Hamiltonian
of
the
system
is
then
N2
N
.
p
1
.
H
=+
f
(q.
-
q`+1)(12.3.13)
`=1
`=1
2m0
2
The
equation
of
motion
(12:3:1)
can
be
derived
from
the
above
using
Hamiltonian
equations
of
motion,
yielding
q_.
(t)=
p.
(t)
;p_.
(t)=
f
[q`+1
(t)
-
2q.
(t)+
q`..1
(t)]
m0
q.
(t)=
v
1
e
ik`aBk
(t)
+
c.c.
(12.3.14)
N
p.
(t)=
v
1
e
ik`aAk
(t)
+
c.c.
(12.3.15)
N
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
so
that
Bk
(t)=
Ak
(t)
(12.3.16)
m0
_ika
..ika
-
2
Ak
(t)=
fe
+
eBk
(t)
(12.3.17)
In
the
above,
\c.c.�
stands
for
\complex
conjugate".
Equation
(12:3:17)
can
be
written
as
A_
k
(t)=
..!k
2mBk
(t)
(12.3.18)
where
f
##
ika
..ika
-
2
!2
=
e
+
e
(12.3.19)
m0
Combining
(12:3:16)
and
(12:3:18),
we
have
�
Ak
(t)=
..!k
2Ak
(t)
(12.3.20)
�
Bk
(t)=
..!k
2Bk
(t)
(12.3.21)
To
have
a
travelling
wave,
we
let
..i!kt
Ak
(t)=
Ak
(0)
e
(12.3.22)
..i!kt
Bk
(t)=
Bk
(0)
e
(12.3.23)
From
the
above,
we
see
that
Ak
(t)=
..i!km0Bk
(t)
(12.3.24)
We
also
nd
that
21
22iklaA2
p.
(t)=
jAk(t)j2
+
e
k(t)
+
c.c.
(12.3.25)
NN
where
the
second
term
is
an
oscillatory
function
of
`.
Also
1
ik`a(1
-
e
(q.
-
q`+1)=
v
e
ika)Bk(t)
+
c.c.
N
1
ik`a2i
sin
ka
ik
a
=
..v
ee
2
Bk(t)
+
c.c.
(12.3.26)
N
2
Hence
8
ka
(q.
-
q`+1)2
=
sin2
jBk(t)j2
+
O.F.
(12.3.27)
N
2
where
\O.F.�
stands
for
\oscillatory
functions
of
`".
The
oscillatory
terms
sum
to
zero
over
.
when
we
plug
(12.3.25)
and
(12.3.27)
into
(12.3.13).
Therefore,
1
ka
H
=
jAk(t)j2
+4f
sin2
jBk(t)j2
m0
2
1
=
jAk(t)j2
+
m0!k
2jBk(t)j2
m0
=2m0!k
2jBk(t)j2
(12.3.28)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
after
using
(12.3.24).1
If
we
let
k(t)
4m0!kjBk(t)j2
=
pk(t)+
q
(12.3.29)
then
!k
H
=
k(t)
which
is
identical
to
the
Hamiltonian
of
a
classical
harmonic
oscillator.
The
reason
why
the
above
simple
form
ensues
is:
1.
By
imposing
periodic
boundary
condition
on
the
linear
atomic
chain,
only
countable,
discrete
modes
with
wavenumber
k
are
allowed
to
propagate
on
the
linear
atomic
chain;
2
2.
Only
a
single
mode
is
allowed
to
propagate
on
the
linear
atomic
chain
so
as
to
make
the
solution
and
the
corresponding
Hamiltonian
very
simple.
The
physical
picture
we
shall
have
of
the
above
is
that
because
only
one
mode
exists,
all
the
atoms
on
the
chain
are
oscillating
at
the
same
frequency
and
in
unison
except
for
a
phase
lag.
So
each
of
them
is
in
a
simple
harmonic
motion.
Since
we
have
learned
how
to
convert
a
classical
harmonic
oscillator
to
a
quantum
harmonic
oscillator,
the
same
principles
can
be
applied
to
turn
the
above
into
a
chain
of
coupled
quantum
harmonic
oscillators.
To
convert
the
above
into
a
quantum
harmonic
oscillator,
we
elevate
the
above
amplitudes
to
operators,
namely
pk(t)+
q
(12.3.30)
2
!k
H
=
22
p^k
+^q
(12.3.31)
2
where
p^k
=
..i~
;q^=
q
kk
dqk
(12.3.32)
22
in
coordinate
space
representation.
We
can
further
let
pv
#k
=
qk/
~,
#^
k
=
p^k/
.
=
..i
d
(12.3.33)
d#k
so
that
k
+
#k)
d2
~!k
~!k
(#^
+
#
(12.3.34)
=
2
d#
2
k
(12.3.35)
1It
is
to
be
noted
that
because
of
the
assumption
of
a
right
traveling
wave
in
(12.3.22)
and
(12.3.23),
jAk(t)j2
and
jBk(t)j2
in
the
above
are
constants.
What
this
means
is
that
both
the
kinetic
energy
and
the
potential
energy
parts
of
the
Hamiltonian
are
constants
of
motion.
However,
had
we
assumed
that
both
right
and
left
traveling
waves
exist
in
(12.3.22)
and
(12.3.23),
this
would
not
have
been
true:
both
jAk(t)j2
and
jBk(t)j2
are
time
varying.
However,
it
can
be
proved
that
their
sum
in
the
Hamiltonian
is
a
constant.
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
The
above
is
the
quantum
analogue
of
(12.3.30).
Furthermore,
we
can
show
that
a^
..i#^
#k
a^k
=
v
1
i#^
k
+
#k
(12.3.36)
Hence,
^~!k
H
=
a^k
+^aka^
(12.3.37)
a^
2
We
can
rewrite
(12.3.28)
more
suggestively
as
H
=
m0!k
2
(Bk*
(t)Bk(t)+
Bk(t)Bk*
(t))
(12.3.38)
The
quantum
analogue
of
the
above
is
H^
=
m0!2
B^
k
�
k
B^
k
+
B^
kB^
(12.3.39)
We
can
identify
that
Bk
=
a^k2m0!k
a^
(12.3.40)
=
2m0!k
Also,
the
above
analogue
is
in
the
spirit
of
the
Schrodinger
picture
where
the
time
dependence
is
relegated
to
the
state
vector
and
the
operators
are
time
independent.
An
arbitrary
phase
factor
can
be
added
to
the
above
but
this
result
in
a
time
shift
for
the
eld.
With
the
above
analogue,
we
can
elevate
the
eld
to
become
operators,
namely,
ik`a^
q^.
=
eak
+
c.c.
(12.3.41)
2m0!kN
~m0!k
ik`a^
p^.
=
..i
eak
+
c.c.
(12.3.42)
2N
These
eld
operators
are
time
independent
because
they
are
in
the
Schrodinger
picture.
Notice
that
it
is
the
Hamiltonian
of
the
total
system
involving
N
atoms,
or
the
total
energy
of
the
total
system,
that
is
quantized
with
with
energy
proportional
to
~!k.
This
quantized
energy
per
atom
is
then
proportional
to
~!k=N.
This
spread
of
the
quantized
energy
per
atom
becomes
smaller
as
N
becomes
larger,
which
becomes
unphysical,
unless
we
keep
N
nite.
Hence,
to
be
more
realistic,
one
will
have
to
consider
a
localized
wave
packet.
We
will
return
to
this
point
later.
If
we
had
assumed
that
the
solutions
are
summation
of
di#erent
k
modes,
then
(12.3.14)
and
(12.3.15)
become
q.
(t)=
v
1
e
ik`aBk
(t)
+
c.c.
(12.3.43)
N
k
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
p.
(t)=
v
1
e
ik`aAk
(t)
+
c.c.
(12.3.44)
N
Consequently,
(12.3.38),
after
using
Parseval's
theorem,
becomes
H
=
m0
!k
2
(Bk*
(t)Bk(t)+
Bk(t)Bk*
(t))
(12.3.45)
k
and
(12.3.41)
and
(12.3.42)
become
ik`a^
q^.
=
eak
+
c.c.
(12.3.46)
2m0!kN
~m0!k
ik`a^
p^.
=
..i
eak
+
c.c.
(12.3.47)
2N
The
above
represents
a
multitude
of
propagating
modes
with
di#erent
k
values.
They
can
come
together
to
form
a
wave
packet
that
more
realistically
represent
a
wave
that
propagates
on
an
in
nite
linear
atomic
chain.
12.4
Schrodinger
Picture
versus
Heisenberg
Picture
At
this
juncture,
it
is
prudent
to
discuss
the
di#erence
between
the
Schrodinger
picture
versus
the
Heisenberg
picture
of
quantum
mechanics.
In
the
Schrodinger
picture,
the
time
dependence
is
in
the
wavefunction
or
the
state
vector;
whereas
in
the
Heisenberg
picture,
the
time
dependence
is
in
the
operator
that
represents
an
observable.
The
Schrodinger
equation
is
given
by
Hj .
=
i~@tj .
(12.4.1)
The
formal
solution
to
the
above
can
be
written
as
j .
=
e
..
i
.
Htj 0.
(12.4.2)
where
j 0.
is
the
state
vector
at
t
=
0
and
is
independent
of
time.
The
expectation
value
of
^
an
operator
O
is
hO^
.
=
h jO^
j .
=
h 0je
i
.
Ht
^
Oe..
i
.
Htj 0.
(12.4.3)
Hence,
in
general,
the
relationship
between
an
operator
in
the
Schrodinger
picture
and
in
the
Heisenberg
picture
is
given
by
OH
=
e
i
.
Ht
^
OSe
..
i
.
Ht
(12.4.4)
where
the
subscripts
\H�
and
\S�
mean
the
Heisenberg
picture
and
the
Schrodinger
picture
respectively.
It
can
be
shown
easily
that
d
^O
H
dt
=
i
.
.
^H
,
^O
H
.
(12.4.5)
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
For
the
simple
quantum
harmonic
oscillator,
^y^
H
=
~!a^a
+
(12.4.6)
It
can
be
shown
easily
that
H,
a^=
..~!a^(12.4.7)
or
that
da^
=
..i!a^(12.4.8)
dt
Consequently,
solving
give
a^(t)=^a(0)e
..i!t
(12.4.9)
Similarly,
one
can
show
that
i!t
a^y(t)=^a
y(0)e
(12.4.10)
The
above
are
the
annihilation
and
creation
operators
in
the
Heisenberg
picture.
Using
the
above
in
(12.3.46)
and
(12.3.47),
we
have
ik`a..i!t^
q^`(t)=
eak
+
c.c.
(12.4.11)
2m0!kN
~m0!k
ik`a..i!t^
p^`(t)=
..i
eak
+
c.c.
(12.4.12)
2N
The
above
are
the
eld
operators
in
the
Heisenberg
picture.
They
are
time
dependent.
12.5
The
Continuum
Limit
In
the
continuum
limit,
we
let
m0
=
#a
(12.5.1)
Then
(12.3.1)
becomes
@2
#aq(x,
t)=
fa2
q(x,
t)
(12.5.2)
@x2
or
@2
#q(t)=
gq(x,
t)
(12.5.3)
@x2
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
where
g
=
fa.
Assume
a
traveling
wave
q(x,
t)=
v
1
e
ikxBk(t)
+
c.c.
(12.5.4)
with
periodic
boundary
condition;
then
2#.
k.
=
(12.5.5)
We
de
ne
the
momentum
density
to
be
#(x)=
#q_(x)
(12.5.6)
Then
a
Hamiltonian
that
will
lead
to
(12.5.3)
is
.
L
.
L
##2
1
g
@q(x)
H
=
#2(x)dx
+
dx
(12.5.7)
2.
2
@x
00
We
let
q(x,
t)=
v
1
e
ikxBk(t)
+
c.c.
(12.5.8)
L
#(x,
t)
=
1
v
L
e
ikxAk(t)
+
c.c.
(12.5.9)
Then
_B
k(t)
=
1
.
Ak(t)
(12.5.10)
_A
k(t)
=
..gk2Bk(t)
(12.5.11)
From
the
above,
we
have
�
Bk(t)
=
..
gk2
.
Bk(t)
=
..!2
kBk(t)
(12.5.12)
where
!2
k
=
gk2=#,
or
Bk(t)
=
Bk(0)e
..i!kt
(12.5.13)
Ak(t)
=
..i!k#Bk(t)
(12.5.14)
From
(12.5.9),
we
obtain
that
#2(x,
t)
=
2
L
jAk(t)j2
+
O.T.
(12.5.15)
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
##2
@q(x,
t)2k2
=
jBk(t)j2
+
O.T.
(12.5.16)
@x
L
where
O.T.
stands
for
oscillatory
term.
When
substituted
into
(12.5.7),
the
oscillatory
terms
integrate
to
zero,
and
H
=
jAk(t)j2
+
k2
gjBk(t)j2
=2#!k
2jBk(t)j2
=
#!k
2
[Bk*
(t)Bk(t)+
Bk(t)Bk*
(t)]
(12.5.17)
De
ning
22
4#!kjBk(t)j2
=
pk(t)+
qk(t)
(12.5.18)
the
above
becomes
!k
22
H
=
pk(t)+
qk(t)
(12.5.19)
2
which
is
the
classical
Hamiltonian
of
a
simple
harmonic
oscillator.
The
above
can
be
quantized
to
yield
^~!k
.
y�
.
H
=
a^a^k
+^aka^(12.5.20)
kk
2
and
(12.5.17)
can
be
elevated
to
quantized
form
giving
yy
H^
=
#!2
B^
B^
k
+
B^
kB^
(12.5.21)
kk
k
Hence,
we
conclude
that
Bk
=
a^k
(12.5.22)
2#!k
up
to
an
arbitrary
phase.
With
this,
we
can
elevate
the
elds
to
operators,
namely,
ikx..i!kt^
q^(x,
t)=
eak
+
c.c.
(12.5.23)
2#!kL
~!k.
ikx..i!kt^
#^(x,
t)=
..ieak
+
c.c.
(12.5.24)
2L
The
above
are
in
Heisenberg
picture
where
operators
are
functions
of
time.
With
multi-mode
eld,
the
above
generalize
to
ikx..i!kt^
q^(x,
t)=
eak
+
c.c.
(12.5.25)
2#!kL
~!k.
ikx..i!kt^
#^(x,
t)=
..i
eak
+
c.c.
(12.5.26)
2L
k
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
12.6
Quantization
of
Electromagnetic
Field
For
electromagnetic
eld,
the
harmonic
oscillators
are
dipoles
in
a
medium
that
are
polarized
by
an
electric
eld.
In
general,
the
electric
ux
in
a
medium
is
given
by
D
=
#0E
+
P
(12.6.1)
The
rst
term
is
the
contribution
to
the
electric
ux
D
due
to
vacuum,
while
the
second
term
is
the
polarization
density
contributed
from
dipoles
polarized
in
a
material
medium
by
an
electric
eld.
It
is
customary
to
write
P
=
#0#E
to
indicate
that
the
polarization
density
is
proportional
to
the
electric
eld.
The
time
variation
of
the
electric
ux,
@tD,
is
instrumental
in
giving
rise
to
displacement
current,
and
hence,
yielding
a
propagating
wave.
This
electric
ux
exists
even
in
vacuum.
Hence,
we
can
imagine
that
even
vacuum
is
polarized
by
an
electric
eld
to
produce
dipole
density.2
In
other
words,
the
oscillating
electric
dipole
will
produce
a
magnetic
eld
creating
an
inductive
e#ect.
Together,
they
can
form
a
resonating
system
behaving
like
a
harmonic
oscillator.
They
resemble
a
tiny
LC
tank
circuit.
As
seen
previously,
the
quantization
of
electromagnetic
eld
is
most
easily
described
by
the
quantization
of
a
modal
eld.
A
mode
can
be
formed
by
a
periodic
boundary
condition
or
a
metallic
perfect
electric/magnetic
conductor
boundary
condition.
In
this
manner,
the
number
of
modes
is
countably
in
nite.
In
view
of
this,
we
can
write
=
#(t)Deikx
Ez
+
c.c.
(12.6.2)
By
using
periodic
boundary
condition,
we
get
2#p
k.
=
(12.6.3)
making
it
countably
in
nite.
(We
will
drop
the
subscript
.
subsequently.)
The
associated
B
eld
is
ikx
By
=
(t)
e
+
c.c.
(12.6.4)
where
c
is
the
velocity
of
light.
The
relation
between
#(t)
and
(t)
can
be
derived
from
Maxwell's
equations.
From
.
�
E
=
..@tB
(12.6.5)
we
have
@xEz
=
@tBy
(12.6.6)
Using
(12.6.2)
and
(12.6.4)
in
the
above,
we
have
ik#(t)Deikx
+
c.c.
=
_
D
e
ikx
+
c.c.
(12.6.7)
2It
is
debatable
as
to
what
gives
rise
to
these
dipoles
in
vacuum.
In
my
opinion,
it
could
be
electron-
positron
pairs
that
are
embedded
in
vacuum.
When
vacuum
is
bombarded
with
an
energetic
photon,
it
is
known
to
produce
an
electron-position
pair.
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
From
the
above,
we
gather
that
_
�
=
i!a
(12.6.8)
using
r�
B
=
#0#0@tE
(12.6.9)
or
more
speci
cally
@xBy
=
#0#0@tEz
(12.6.10)
Finally,
we
nd
that
#_=
i!�
(12.6.11)
or
that
#=
..!2a
(12.6.12)
�
�
=
..!2�
(12.6.13)
..i!t
A
traveling
wave
solution
is
that
a
=
#0e..i!t;�
=
0e.
From
(12.6.8)
and
(12.6.11),
we
deduce
that
#0
=
0
12.6.1
Hamiltonian
The
Hamiltonian
of
the
electromagnetic
system
is
given
by
the
total
energy
of
the
system
which
is
.
L
H
=
W
(x)dx
(12.6.14)
0
where
.
.
W
(x)
=
1
2
#0jEj2
+
1
#0
jBj2
(12.6.15)
From
(12.6.2),
we
derive
that
for
a
propagating
mode,
E2
=2j#(t)j2jDj2
+
O.T.
(12.6.16)
jDj2
B2
=2j
(t)j2
+
O.T.
(12.6.17)
y
c2
where
\O.T.�
stands
for
\oscillatory
terms".
When
substituted
into
(12.6.14)
and
integrated,
the
oscillatory
terms
disappear;
we
have
LjDj2
H
=
LjDj2#0j#(t)j2
+
j
(t)j2
#0c2
=
LjDj2#0[j#(t)j2
+
j
(t)j2]
(12.6.18)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
De
ning
D
=
(12.6.19)
4L#0
the
above
can
be
written
as
!.
H
=[j#j2
+
j
j2]=
j#j2
(12.6.20)
42
By
letting
a
=
p
�
iq,
it
becomes
H
=
.
(p
+
q
2)
(12.6.21)
The
above
resembles
the
Hamiltonian
for
a
classical
harmonic
oscillator.
Again,
the
reason
for
its
simplicity
is
that
we
have
assumed
a
single
propagating
mode.
This
single
propagating
mode
is
causing
all
the
dipoles
in
the
system
to
be
oscillating
time-harmonically
in
unison,
but
with
a
phase
lag
between
them.3
But
p
and
q
are
observables
with
Hermitian
operators.
Therefore,
the
quantum
analogue
is
^.
2)
H
=
(^p
2
+^q
(12.6.22)
2
In
coordinate
space
representation,
p^=
..i.
;q^=
q
(12.6.23)
dq
As
in
the
linear
atomic
chain
case,
we
can
show
that
^~.
.
y^y.
�
1
H
=
a^a
+^aa^=
~!a^^(12.6.24)
kak
+
22
12.6.2
Field
Operators
Alternatively,
we
can
rewrite
(12.6.20)
as
H
=
.
[#(t)a
*
(t)+
#(t)a
*
(t)]
(12.6.25)
4
The
above
can
be
elevated
to
be
quantum
mechanical
operators
so
that
.
#.
H^
=
#^#^�
+^##^y(12.6.26)
Comparing
the
above
with
(12.6.24),
we
infer
that
#^=
2~a^(12.6.27)
3Notice
that
there
is
no
radiation
damping
in
these
dipoles
as
the
periodic
boundary
condition
wraps
the
wave
around,
and
energy
is
never
lost
from
the
system.
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
to
within
an
arbitrary
phase.
Hence,
a
in
(12.6.2)
can
be
elevated
to
be
a
eld
operator
to
yield,
in
the
Heisenberg
picture,
~!k
ikx..i!kt
Ez
=
a^ke
+
c.c.
(12.6.28)
2L#0
~!k
1
ikx..i!kt
B^
y
=
a^ke
+
c.c.
(12.6.29)
2L#0
c
The
above
can
be
generalized
to
a
plane
wave
mode
propagating
in
arbitrary
direction,
namely,
^.
~!kik#r..i!kt
E
=
esa^k;se
+
c.c.
(12.6.30)
2V#0
k;s
~!k
1
ik#r..i!kt
^^
B
=
k
�
esa^k;se
+
c.c.
(12.6.31)
2V#0
c
k;s
where
es
is
a
unit
vector
denoting
the
polarization
of
the
electric
eld.
It
is
orthogonal
to
the
k
vector.
It
can
be
either
linearly
polarized
or
circularly
polarized.
In
the
linearly
polarized
case,
es
is
either
vertical
or
horizontal.
In
the
circularly
polarized
case,
es
is
either
right-hand
or
left-hand
circularly
polarized.
In
the
above,
we
have
de
ned
the
Hamiltonian
as
an
integral
over
a
volume
V
,
and
hence,
the
normalization
above
is
with
respect
to
V
.
A
photon
is
a
packet
of
energy
that
propagates
due
to
coupled
quantum
harmonic
oscillators.
This
is
similar
to
the
phonon
case
which
is
a
packet
of
energy
due
to
coupled
quantum
harmonic
oscillators
of
mechanical
origin.
A
photon
can
also
propagate
in
a
dielectric
medium,
and
it
is
quite
clear
then
that
in
this
case,
the
photon
is
due
to
coupled
quantum
harmonic
oscillators
of
dipolar
origin
(or
electronic
origin).
The
quantization
of
energy
is
with
respect
to
the
entire
Hamiltonian
which
describes
a
set
of
coupled
quantum
harmonic
oscillators.
For
the
purely
monochromatic
photon,
as
is
seen
before,
if
the
quantization
energy
is
~!k,
it
will
be
shared
among
all
the
coupled
harmonic
oscillators.
This
is
untenable
physically
as
the
number
of
coupled
harmonic
oscillators
becomes
large.
Hence,
it
is
more
appropriate
to
think
of
a
photon
as
quasi-monochromatic
as
a
linear
superposition
of
wavenumbers
k,
allowing
a
localized
wave
packet
to
be
formed.
A
photon
can
be
thought
of
as
a
\particle�
possessing
a
packet
of
energy
~!e,
but
it
exists
as
a
linear
superposition
of
di#erent
modes
with
di#erent
k's.
Each
mode
can
have
a
energy
~!k
associated
with
it,
but
as
the
particle
is
a
linear
superposition
of
di#erent
modes,
~!e
is
the
expectation
value
of
the
photon
energy
when
the
photon
is
in
a
superposition
of
di#erent
quantum
states.4
12.6.3
Multimode
Case
and
Fock
State
When
polarization
is
considered,
we
may
write
the
Hamiltonian
for
a
single
mode
photon
as
H^
k
=
H^
k;s
=
~!k
a^k;sa^k;s
+
(12.6.32)
ss
4This
is
my
personal
opinion.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
where
s
stands
for
either
horizontal
or
vertical
polarization.
The
above
can
be
easily
derived
by
considering
the
electric
eld
with
both
polarizations
present.
In
the
above,
we
can
denote
eigenstate
of
the
Hamiltonian
as5
j .
=
jnvijnh.
(12.6.33)
where
v
stands
for
vertical
polarization
and
h
stands
for
horizontal
polarization.
In
the
above,
there
are
nv
photons
in
the
vertical
polarization
state
and
there
are
nh
photons
in
the
horizontal
polarization
state.
When
many
modes
are
considered
simultaneously,
it
can
be
shown
that
the
corresponding
Hamiltonian
is
H^
=
H^
k;s
=
~!k
a^k;s
a^k;s
+
(12.6.34)
k;s
k;s
The
eigenstate
of
the
above
Hamiltonian
can
be
written
as
j .
=
jnk;s.
(12.6.35)
k;s
The
above
can
be
written
alternatively
as
j .
=
jnk1;sijnk2;sijnk3;si##�
=
jnk1;s;nk2;s;nk3;snk4;s
�
�
#.
=
jfnk;sg.
(12.6.36)
ss
s
The
above
state
is
known
as
a
Fock
state
or
the
occupational
number
state.
It
is
customary
to
leave
out
the
states
where
the
occupational
number
is
zero,
listing
only
the
states
with
non-zero
number
of
photons.
For
example
j .
=
j3k1;v,
2k2;h,
1k3;v.
(12.6.37)
indicates
a
quantum
state
with
three
V
(vertical)
polarized
photons
in
k1
mode,
two
H
(horizontal)
polarized
photons
in
k2
mode,
and
one
V
polarized
photon
in
k3
mode.
12.6.4
One-Photon
State
The
understanding
of
the
one-photon
state
is
important
because
of
its
usefulness
in
quantum
information,
quantum
communication,
and
quantum
cryptography.
It
is
prudent
to
elaborate
on
it
further.
For
example,
when
only
one
k
mode
is
present,
to
denote
a
photon
in
the
vertical
polarization
state,
and
no
photons
in
the
horizontal
polarization
state,
the
state
vector
should
be
j .
=
j1vij0h.
(12.6.38)
Often,
this
is
just
written
as
j .
=
j1v.
(12.6.39)
5When
the
Hamiltonian
consists
of
sum
of
the
Hamiltonians
of
two
quantum
systems,
the
states
of
the
Hamiltonian
operator
can
be
represented
by
the
product
space
of
the
states
of
the
individual
quantum
system.
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
where
the
second
part
is
understood.
For
a
photon
in
arbitrary
polarization,
it
is
written
as
j .
=
avj1v.
+
ahj1h.
(12.6.40)
The
above
denotes
a
one-photon
state
where
the
photon
is
in
the
linear
superposition
of
two
orthonormal
one-photon
states.
Hence,
javj2
+
jahj2
=
1
(12.6.41)
Often,
photons
are
generated
by
atomic
transitions
whereby
the
electron
changes
from
a
high
energy
state
to
a
low
energy
state
giving
rise
to
one
or
more
photons.
Since
this
is
a
causal
event,
the
wave
eld
associated
with
a
photon
is
a
localized
wave
in
space
time.6
The
localized
wave
is
formed
by
linear
superposing
wave
eld
with
di#erent
k
values.
For
instance,
a
localized
one-photon,
vertically
polarized
state
is
a
linear
superposition
of
a
number
of
one-
photon
states
with
di#erent
k
values
as
follows:
j .
=
ak;vj1k;v.
(12.6.42)
The
wave
eld
associated
with
the
above
state
can
be
localized
in
space
time,
and
the
wave
eld
satis
es
causality.
It
is
to
be
noted
that
(12.6.34)
is
a
quantum
mechanical
Hamiltonian
involving
the
sum
over
individual
Hamiltonians
of
di#erent
quantum
systems.
The
quantum
system
arises
from
a
set
of
coupled
quantum
harmonic
oscillators.
The
choice
of
appropriate
modes
\diagonalizes�
the
system,
giving
rise
to
apparently
uncoupled
systems.
When
a
photon
is
in
a
quantum
state,
it
can
be
in
a
linear
superposition
of
di#erent
quantum
states
of
these
di#erent
quantum
systems.
Therefore,
one-photon
states
(12.6.40)
and
(12.6.42)
should
be
thought
of
as
a
linear
superposition
of
di#erent
quantum
states,
subject
to
the
quantum
interpretation
of
quantum
mechanics.
The
particle
is
in
a
linear
superposition
of
states
before
the
measurement,
and
it
collapses
to
one
of
the
states
after
the
measurement.
Even
though
a
photon
is
associated
with
a
packet
of
energy,
when
it
is
detected
with
a
polarizer
(that
detects
it
either
in
the
vertical
or
horizontal
polarized
state),
it
is
found
either
in
one
state
or
the
other.
The
packet
of
energy
is
never
split
between
the
two
states
indicated
by
(12.6.40).
Hence,
experiment
evidence
suggests
that
a
photon
is
a
quantum
particle
in
the
sense
that
an
electron
is
a
quantum
particle
at
the
quantum
level.
The
same
interpretation
applies
to
(12.6.42).
The
subject
of
quantum
interpretation
will
be
discussed
later.
12.6.5
Coherent
State
Revisited
The
expectation
value
of
the
annihilation
and
creation
operators
with
respect
to
the
photon
number
states
is
always
zero.
Therefore,
the
expectation
value
of
the
eld
operators,
which
are
proportional
to
the
annihilation
and
creation
operators,
is
always
zero.
Hence,
the
number
states
are
non-classical.
To
arrive
at
an
expectation
value
of
eld
operators
that
are
non-zero,
and
resemble
a
classical
eld,
one
has
to
work
with
the
coherent
states.
6See
the
appendix
for
a
discussion
on
localized
wave
packets.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
We
have
studied
the
coherent
state
previously.
It
is
de
ned
to
be
the
eigenstate
of
the
annihilation
operator.
Namely,
if
j#.
represents
a
coherent
state,
then
a^j#.
=
#j#.
(12.6.43)
where
we
have
used
the
eigenvalue
a
to
index
the
coherent
state.
Since
the
number
state
jn.
is
complete,
we
can
expand
the
coherent
state
in
terms
of
the
number
state,
or
1
j#.
=
Cnjn.
(12.6.44)
n=0
When
the
annihilation
operator
is
applied
to
both
sides,
we
obtain
111.
jiEquatingtheabovewith
##,wehave
a^j#.
=
Cna^jn.
=
Cn
n
-
1jn
-
1.
=
Cn+1
njn.
(12.6.45)
n=0
n=0
n=0
11
Cn+1
njn.
=
#Cnjn.
(12.6.46)
n=0
n=0
By
the
orthogonality
of
the
number
states,
matching
the
coe#cients,
we
have
Cn+1
=
#Cn=n
+
1,
or
n
=
Cn..2#2/
(n(n
-
1))
=
C0#n/
n!
(12.6.47)
Cn
=
Cn..1#/
Consequently,
j#.
=
C0
n=0
#n
jn.
(12.6.48)
n!
The
above
can
be
normalized
to
show
that
C0
=
exp(..j#j2=2).
The
photon
number
operator
is
^n
=
a^ya^.
It
can
be
shown
that
the
average
number
of
photons
associated
with
a
coherent
state
is
given
by
hn^.
=
n#=
h#jn^j#.
=
h#ja^aj#.
=
j#j2
(12.6.49)
y^
Moreover
hn^2.
=
h#jn^2j#.
=
h#ja^aa^aj#.
=
h#ja^a
�
a^a^+^aaj#.
=
j#j4
+
j#j2
=
n#2
+#n
(12.6.50)
y^y^y^y^
Then
#n
=
hn^2i..hn^i2
=
n#1=2
(12.6.51)
The
above
is
characteristic
of
a
Poisson
process.
The
probability
of
detecting
n
photons
in
a
coherent
state
is
n#
Pn
=
jhnj#ij2
=
e..j#j2
j#j2n
=
e
..n#(12.6.52)
n!
n!
Quantization
of
Classical
Fields
typical
of
a
Poisson
distribution.7
The
fractional
uncertainty
in
the
photon
number
is
#n
1
=
v
(12.6.53)
n#n#
Figure
12.2:
Two
typical
Poisson
distributions.
Case
(a)
has
n#=
50
while
case
(b)
has
n#=
200
(from
Haus).
Time
Evolution
of
the
Coherent
State
In
the
Schrodinger
picture,
the
time
dependence
is
with
the
eigenfunctions;
hence,
the
time
dependence
of
the
coherent
state
is
i(n+1=2)!t
#n
..
j#j
j#,
t.
=
e
jn.
(12.6.54)
n!
n=0
The
above
can
be
written
as
n!
n=0
(#ei!t)n
..
j#,
t.
=
e
i!t=2
j#|
jn.
=
e
i!t=2j#ei!t.
(12.6.55)
In
the
Heisenberg
picture,
the
coherent
state
is
time
independent,
and
time-dependent
eigenstate
can
be
obtained
by
applying
the
operator
#n
..i
^
Ht=~j#.
=
..i
^
Ht=~jni
j#,
t.
=
e
n!
n=0
n=0
(#ei!t)n
n!
jn.
=
e
i!t=2j#ei!t.
(12.6.56)
#n
..i(n+1=2)!tjn.
=
v
e
n!
n=0
7An
example
of
a
Poisson
distribution
is
a
shot
noise
source,
producing
n#photons
in
interval
#.
The
probability
of
nd
n
photons
in
this
time
interval
follows
the
Poisson
distribution.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
It
can
be
further
shown
that
the
above
can
be
summed
in
terms
of
a
\Gaussian
pulse"8
indicating
that
this
pulse
evolves
in
time
without
shape
distortion.
Figure
12.3:
The
time
evolution
of
the
coherent
state.
It
follows
the
motion
of
a
classical
pendulum
or
harmonic
oscillator
(From
Gerry
and
Knight).
The
expectation
value
of
the
eld
operator
in
the
Heisenberg
picture
with
respect
to
the
coherent
state
is
then
E
=
h#jE^
j#.
=
.
~!k
esh#ja^k;sj#ie
ik#r..i!kt
+
c.c.
=
.
~!k
es#k;se
ik#r..i!kt
+
c.c.
2V#0
2V#0
k;s
k;s
(12.6.57)
Similarly,
~!k
1
^ik#r..i!kt
B
=
h#jB^
j#.
=
k
�
es#k;se
+
c.c.
(12.6.58)
2V#0
c
k;s
The
above
certainly
look
like
a
classical
eld
where
#k;s
are
complex
numbers.
8It
is
to
be
noted
that
the
Gaussian
pulse
we
refer
to
is
with
respect
to
the
displacement
of
the
quantum
harmonic
oscillator,
not
with
respect
to
the
direction
of
propagation
of
the
photon.
Chapter
13
Schrodinger
Wave
Fields
13.1
Introduction
We
notice
that
electromagnetic
eld
can
be
viewed
as
a
collection
of
photons
each
with
an
eld
attached.
These
photons
collectively
form
the
coherent
state
that
produces
a
wave
eld
that
is
analogous
to
the
classical
electromagnetic
wave
eld.
Photons
are
bosons
whose
wave
eld
satis
es
Maxwell's
equations.
Similarly,
if
a
boson
wavefunction
satis
es
Schrodinger
equation,
a
collection
of
bosons
gives
rise
to
a
wave
eld
that
satis
es
Schrodinger
equation.
Similarly,
a
collection
of
fermions
gives
rise
to
a
wave
eld
that
satis
es
Schrodinger
equation
if
each
individual
particle
wave-
function
satis
es
the
same
equation.
We
will
call
such
elds
Schrodinger
wave
elds.
We
have
seen
that
the
number
of
bosons
in
an
electromagnetic
wave
eld
can
be
tracked
by
the
annihilation
and
creation
operators;
similar
operators
are
needed
for
tracking
the
particle
of
a
Schrodinger
wave
eld.
The
wave
eld
can
be
a
collection
of
bosons
or
a
collection
of
fermions.
Eventually,
the
bookkeeping
of
the
many-particle
system
becomes
simpler.
For
Schrodinger
equation,
this
is
the
second
quantization.
The
rst
quantization
was
the
discovery
that
electrons
can
be
associated
with
a
wavefunction,
and
the
trapped
modes
in
potential
well
are
quantized.
The
second
quantization
refers
to
the
fact
that
the
Schrodinger
wave
eld,
which
can
be
treated
as
a
continuum,
can
be
made
granular
or
quantized.
This
is
the
advanced
way
of
expressing
the
wave-particle
duality
concept
inherent
in
a
wave
eld.1
13.2
Fock
Space
for
Fermions
For
fermions,
each
eigenmode
or
eigenstate
is
either
occupied
or
unoccupied.
In
general,
there
will
be
in
nitely
many
modes
that
the
fermions
can
occupy.
We
could
denote
a
two-particle
state
as
j 2p.
=
j##�
,
0,
1m,
0,
##�
,
0,
1v,
0,
###.
(13.2.1)
1The
quantization
of
classical
elds
is
also
known
as
rst
quantization
for
them.
145
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
where
only
the
m
and
v
modes
are
occupied
and
the
rest
of
the
modes
are
unoccupied.
The
notation
above
is
cumbersome,
and
it
is
common
to
denote
the
two-particle
fermion
Fock
state
as
j 2p.
=
jm,
v.
where
for
fermions,
it
is
necessary
that
(13.2.2)
jm,
v.
=
..jv,
m.
We
de
ne
a
fermion
creation
operator
such
that
(13.2.3)
jm,
n.
=
jk,
m,
n.
(13.2.4)
The
newly
created
particle
always
occupies
the
rst
space
in
the
Fock
state
vector.
By
de
nition
then
j###.
=
jl,
k,
###.
(13.2.5)
^
.
=
..^b
y
^
b
j###.
=
jk,
l,
###.
=
..jl,
k,
(13.2.6)
##�
Therefore
+^b
l
k
=
0
(13.2.7)
Similarly,
we
can
show
that
^b
k
^b
l
+^b
l
^b
k
=
0
(13.2.8)
or
that
the
above
is
the
Hermitian
conjugate
of
(13.2.7).
To
show
(13.2.8)
more
rigorously,
we
start
with
a
fermion
Fock
state
j .
=
j##�
,
l,
k,
###.
(13.2.9)
This
state
acquires
a
minus
sign
when
we
permute
two
of
the
particles.
Finally,
we
can
have
a
state
such
that
j F
.
=
jl,
k,
###.
=
..jk,
l,
###.
(13.2.10)
An
annihilation
operator
can
be
de
ned
such
that
^
bljl,
k,
###.
=
jk,
###.
(13.2.11)
It
can
be
shown
that
^^^^^
bkblj F
.
=
bkbljl,
k,
###.
=
bkjk,
###.
=
j###.
(13.2.12)
Similarly,
..^b
l
^b
kj F
.
=^b
l
^b
kjk,
l,
###.
=^b
ljl,
###.
=
j###.
(13.2.13)
Schrodinger
Wave
Fields
147
Therefore,
^b
^b
^b
^b
The
above
equations
(13.2.7)
and
(13.2.14)
imply
that
if
k
=
l,
(13.2.14)
=
0
(13.2.15)
^^
bkbk
=
0
(13.2.16)
It
means
that
no
two
particles
can
be
created
in
the
same
mode
k
or
no
two
particles
can
be
annihilated
from
the
same
mode
k.
By
the
same
token,
we
can
show
that
for
k
6
=
l,
^b
l
+^b
l
^
=
0
(13.2.17)
When
k
=
l,
we
have
a
state
jk,
###.
and
then
(^b
^b
k
+^b
k
�
k
y
b
k
jk,
bkjk,
###.
+^b
k
)jk,
###.
=
##�
j###.
+0jk,
###.
=
j###.
=
jk,
###i
Ijk,
###.
(13.2.18)
In
conclusion,
^b
l
+^b
l
=
#kl
(13.2.19)
In
summary,
k,
bl
y
^b
l
+^b
l
=
#kl
(13.2.20)
=
k,
^
b
+^b
l
=
0
(13.2.21)
^b
k,
^b
l
=^b
k
^b
l
+^b
l
^b
k
=
0
(13.2.22)
where
[A,
B]=
AB
+
BA.
13.3
Field
Operators
Just
as
in
the
case
of
electromagnetic
eld
operators
that
represent
many
photons
which
are
bosons,
we
can
de
ne
eld
operators
for
fermions
and
bosons
in
general.
A
one-particle
Schrodinger
eld
operator
is
de
ned
such
that
^(r)=
^b
j
#j(r)
(13.3.1)
j
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
where
#j
is
an
eigenmode
from
a
complete
set
of
orthonormal
functions.
It
may
or
may
not
be
the
j-th
eigenstate
of
the
quantum
system
governed
by
the
one-particle
Schrodinger
equation.
The
above
eld
operator
acts
on
a
state
vector
in
the
Fock
space.
For
instance,
^^by
(r)jm.
=
(r)^j0i
^b
�
=
#j
(r)^b
jmj0.
j
=
b�
^b
j)j0i
#j
(r)(#jm
-
^
m
j
=
#m(r)j0.
(13.3.2)
Notice
that
the
above
eld
operator,
when
operating
on
a
Fock
vector
with
a
m-th
mode
occupied,
produces
a
vector
tagged
with
the
spatial
dependence
of
the
m-th
eigenmode.
After
using
the
completeness
property
of
the
orthonormal
basis,
plus
the
use
of
commutation
relations
for
the
annihilation
and
creation
operators,
the
eld
operator
can
be
shown
to
satisfy
the
following
commutation
relations:
^y(r); ^(r
0)=
^y(r) ^(r
0)+
^(r
0) ^y(r)=
#(r
-
r
0)
(13.3.3)
^y(r); ^y(r
0)=
^y(r) ^y(r
0)+
^y(r
0) ^y(r)
=
0
(13.3.4)
^(r); ^(r
0)=
^(r) ^(r
0)+
^(r
0) ^(r)
=
0
(13.3.5)
As
an
extension,
one
can
de
ne
two-particle
eld
operator
^^^
.
(r1,
r2)=
v
bn2
bn1
#n1
(r1)
#n2
(r2)
(13.3.6)
2
n1;n2
where
the
factor
1/
2
is
needed
for
normalization.
Here,
#n1
(r1)
and
#n2
(r2)
may
or
may
not
be
one-particle
eigenstates
of
the
Schrodinger
equation.
The
requirements
on
them
are
that
they
are
complete
and
orthonormal.
In
the
above,
the
n1
=
n2
terms
vanish
because
^^
bnbn
=
0.
It
can
be
shown
easily
that
^^^
.
(r1,
r2)
jl,
m.
=
.
(r1,
r2)^b
b�
j0.
=
v
[#l
(r1)
#m
(r2)
-
#l
(r2)
#m
(r1)]
j0.
(13.3.7)
lm
It
is
to
be
noted
that
the
above
is
zero
when
r1
=
r2.
It
is
a
consequence
of
the
eld
operator
operating
on
the
two-particle
Fock
state,
and
not
the
property
of
the
eld
operator.
A
three-particle
eld
operator
is
de
ned
to
be
^^^^
.
(r1,
r2,
r3)=
v
bn3
bn2
bn1
#n1
(r1)
#n2
(r2)
#n3
(r3)
(13.3.8)
3!
n1;n2;n3
In
the
above,
none
of
the
n1,
n2,
n3
can
be
repeated
for
the
reasons
of
(13.2.15)
and
(13.2.16).
Schr�
149
odinger
Wave
Fields
Then,
it
can
be
shown
that
�
^^^
.
(r1,
r2,
r3)
jl,
m,
n.
=
.
(r1,
r2,
r3)^b
b�
b�
j0i
l
mn
=
v
[#l
(r1)
#m
(r2)
#n
(r3)+
#l
(r2)
#m
(r3)
#n
(r1)
3!
+
#l
(r3)
#m
(r1)
#n
(r2)
-
#l
(r1)
#m
(r3)
#n
(r2)
..#l
(r2)
#m
(r1)
#n
(r3)
-
#l
(r3)
#m
(r2)
#n
(r1)]
j0.
(13.3.9)
In
general,
an
N-particle
eld
operator
is
�
^^^
.
(r1,
r2,
##�
,
rN
)=
v
bnN
##�
bn2
bn1
#n1
(r1)
#n2
(r2)
##�
#nN
(rN
)
(13.3.10)
N!
n1;n2;##�
;nN
In
the
above
sum,
only
terms
where
n1;n2,
##�
;nN
are
distinct
are
contributing
for
the
same
reason
given
in
(13.3.8).
It
is
seen
that
^NP
(r1,
r2,
##�
,
rN
)=
v
1
^1P
(rN
)
##�
^1P
(r2)
^1P
(r1)
(13.3.11)
N!
where
^1P
is
a
one-particle
eld
operator
while
^NP
is
the
N-particle
eld
operator.
However,
the
used
of
such
factorized
form
has
to
be
handled
with
caution,
as
each
one-particle
operator
has
to
operate
on
distinct
modes
in
order
for
the
product
of
factors
to
be
non-zero.
A
general
Fock
state
for
N
fermion
particles
can
be
written
as
j#N
.
=^b
�
^b
�
^b
�
##�
^b
�
j0.
=
jn1;n2;n3,
##�
;nN
.
(13.3.12)
n1
n2
n3
nN
In
the
above,
the
state
vector
changes
sign
when
any
two
of
the
annihilation
operators
swap
position,
and
that
the
state
vector
is
zero
if
any
two
of
the
modes
are
identical.
When
the
Fock
state
is
operated
on
by
the
N-particle
annihilation
operator,
the
coordinate
space
representation
of
the
N-particle
fermion
state
is
obtained
as
shown
by
(13.3.7).
This
approach
avoids
the
cumbersome
use
of
Slater
determinant
in
the
book-keeping
of
the
N-
particle
fermion
states.
13.4
Similarity
Transform
It
is
prudent
to
note
from
the
above
that
one
can
change
between
coordinate
space
basis
and
Fock
space
basis
via
the
algebra
shown.
This
allows
us
to
e#ect
a
change
of
basis
for
a
complex
quantum
system.
Some
quantum
systems,
when
expressed
in
the
Fock
space
basis,
is
a
lot
simpler
than
the
coordinate
space
basis.
This
was
rst
shown
for
electromagnetic
eld.
It
can
be
shown
for
other
quantum
elds.
Hence,
it
is
worthwhile
to
review
the
mathematics
of
similarity
transform
next.
We
can
view
the
change
of
basis
as
a
similarity
transform
when
we
change
from
eigenfunction
space
or
coordinate
space
representation
to
Fock
space
representation.
Given
a
matrix
equation
A
�
x
=
#x
(13.4.1)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
we
can
de
ne
a
new
representation
for
the
unknowns
as
x
=
S
�
y
(13.4.2)
In
the
above,
S
is
unitary
since
the
length
of
the
vectors
does
not
change.
The
above
equation
becomes
A
�
S
�
y
=
#S
�
y
(13.4.3)
Multiplying
the
above
by
S
,
we
have
y�
S
�
A
�
S
�
y
=
#S
�
S
�
y
=
#y
(13.4.4)
where
the
unitary
property
of
the
S
operator
has
been
used.
Hence,
As
�
y
=
#y
(13.4.5)
where
�
As
=
S
�
A
�
S
(13.4.6)
Equation
(13.4.6)
is
in
the
form
of
a
similarity
transform.
13.5
Additive
One-Particle
Operator
We
can
consider
a
simple
identical
many
particle
Hamiltonian
where
the
particles
do
not
interact
with
each
other,
say
via
the
Coulomb
potential.
For
instance,
for
fermions,
the
only
way
they
interact
is
via
Pauli's
exclusion
principle.
An
example
of
such
a
Hamiltonian
for
N
particles,
in
coordinate
space
representation,
is
N
^^
Hr
=
Hri
(13.5.1)
i=1
where
^r2
Hri
=
-
i
+
V
(ri)
(13.5.2)
2m
As
an
example,
consider
the
three
particle
case.
The
three-particle
wavefunction
in
coordinate
space
representation
is
1
3P
(r1,
r2,
r3)=
v
[#l
(r1)
#m
(r2)
#n
(r3)+
#l
(r2)
#m
(r3)
#n
(r1)
3!
+
#l
(r3)
#m
(r1)
#n
(r2)
-
#l
(r1)
#m
(r3)
#n
(r2)
..#l
(r2)
#m
(r1)
#n
(r3)
-
#l
(r3)
#m
(r2)
#n
(r1)]
(13.5.3)
If
the
eigenmodes
above
are
the
eigenmodes
of
the
Hri
operator,
then
^^
Hr 3P
(r1,
r2,
r3)=
Hri 3P
(r1,
r2,
r3)=(El
+
Em
+
En) 3P
(r1,
r2,
r3)
(13.5.4)
i=1
Schr151
odinger
Wave
Fields
The
above
approach
gets
unwieldy
as
the
number
of
particles
increases.
For
a
simpler
approach,
we
can
perform
a
change
of
basis
or
similarity
transform
on
the
original
Hamiltonian.
The
new
Hamiltonian
is
.
N
^
�
NP
(r1,
r2,
#�
�
,
rN
)
H^
ri
NP
(r1,
r2,
#�
�
,
rN
)
dr1dr2
##�
drN
(13.5.5)
i=1
The
operator
above
now
acts
on
a
vector
in
the
Fock
space,
and
transforms
it
to
another
vector
in
the
same
space.
Equation
(13.5.5)
can
be
written,
after
using
(13:3:11),
as
.
N.
(r1)
dri
1P
(ri)
(ri)
H^
ri
1P
(rN
)
#�
##�
#�
1P
1P
N!
i=1
^^
1P
(r1)
##�
~
�
#�
1P
(rN
)
dr1
##�
~
�
#�
drN
(13.5.6)
where
the
~
sign
implies
that
ri
is
excluded
from
the
sequence.
13.5.1
Three-Particle
Case
It
is
quite
complex
to
sort
out
the
algebra
of
the
above
system.
Much
insight,
however,
can
be
gotten
by
studying
a
simpler
three-particle
case.
In
this
case,
a
typical
term
of
the
transformed
Hamiltonian
is
(r2)
dr1
(r1)
H^
r1
1P
(r1)
(r3)
^
1P
1P
1P
3!
^1P
(r2)
^1P
(r3)
dr2dr3
+
##�
(13.5.7)
where
the
+
##�
above
refers
to
other
two
terms
where
ri
=
r2
and
ri
=
r3,
and
ri
here
refers
to
the
coordinates
for
the
term
inside
the
square
brackets.
The
space-dependent
parts
involving
#ni
(ri)
in
the
eld
operators
can
be
grouped
together
and
the
spatial
integrations
can
be
performed
rst.
These
modes
are
orthonormal
giving
rise
to
#n2n
and
#n3n
which
can
be
used
to
reduce
double
summations
into
single
summations.
y�
Finally,
one
obtains
2.
(1)
^5^^
bn1
bn2
bn3
^
H
+
##�
(13.5.8)
=
n3
n2
n1
;n1
n2;n3
n
;n1
The
general
case
where
#n1
(r1)
is
not
an
eigenstate
of
the
Hamiltonian
Hr1
is
assumed
here.
Hence,
(1)
jH^
r1j#n1
=
h#n
(13.5.9)
n
;n1
In
the
event
that
#n1
(r1)
is
an
eigenstate,
the
above
becomes
(1)
H
=
En1
#n
(13.5.10)
n1
n
;n1
1
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
..
..1 ..
..2 ..
..
m
n
Figure
13.1:
The
three
annihilation
operators
^b
n1
^b
n2
^b
n3
acting
on
the
three-particle
state
jl,
m,
n.
produces
six
threads
that
eventually
gives
rise
to
six
terms.
To
evaluate
the
action
of
the
above
operator
on
the
three-fermion-particle
state
jl,
m,
n.
=
^b
^b
�
^b
�
j0i,
one
needs
to
show
l
mn
^^^^^^^^b
�
^b
y
bn1
bn2
bn3
jl,
m,
n.
=
bn1
bn2
bn3
bmnj0i
=(#ln3
#mn2
#nn1
-
#ln3
#mn1
#nn2
-
#ln2
#mn3
#nn1
+#ln1
#mn3
#nn2
+
#ln2
#mn1
#nn3
-
#ln1
#mn2
#nn3
)
j0.
(13.5.11)
A
total
of
six
terms
is
found.
In
the
above
^b
n3
,
operating
on
the
three-particle
state,
produces
three
terms
each
of
which
is
a
two-particle
state
as
shown
in
Figure
13.1.
Next,
^b
n2
operating
on
them
will
produce
two
terms
per
each
term
of
the
two-particle
state,
producing
a
net
of
six
terms
of
one-particle
states.
The
nal
operation
^b
n1
produces
one
term
for
each
particle.
In
general,
if
we
start
with
an
N-particle
state,
the
operation
of
^b
n1
##�
^b
nN
on
it
will
produce
N!
terms.
The
^b
�
operators
in
(13.5.8)
anti-commute
with
each
other.
Hence,
^b
�
^b
�
can
be
moved
n3
n2
(1)
to
the
right
of
the
Helement,
together
with
the
summations.
Therefore,
we
nally
need
;n1
to
evaluate
^^^^^
b�
n3
b�
n2
bn1
bn2
bn3
jl,
m,
n.
(13.5.12)
n2;n3
The
above
can
be
shown
to
evaluate
to
yy
^b
�
^b
�
^^^^^b
�
^b
�
^b
�
^b
�
^
n3
n2
bn1
bn2
bn3
jl,
m,
n.
=2
#nn1
blm
+
#ln1
mn
+
#mn1
nbl
j0.
n2;n3
^^b
�
^b
y
=
2^bj0.
=
2^jl,
m,
n.
(13.5.13)
bn1
l
mnbn1
The
rst
equality
above
can
be
obtained
by
using
(13.5.11).
The
second
equality
follows
from
^^b
�
^b
y
working
backward
by
expanding
^bj0i.
Consequently,
bn1
l
mn
�
(1)
^^^
Hjl,
m,
n.
=
bHbn1
jl,
m,
n.
+
�
#�
(13.5.14)
n
n
;n1
;n1
1
Schr153
odinger
Wave
Fields
The
other
two
terms
indicated
by
the
+
##�
would
contribute
to
exactly
the
same
expression
as
they
are
from
indistinguishable
particles.
Finally,
we
have
�
(1)
^^^
Hjl,
m,
n.
=
bHbn1
jl,
m,
n.
(13.5.15)
n
;n1
1
1
;n1
In
general,
the
additive
one-particle
operator
in
Fock
space
is
�
(1)
^^^
H
=
bn.
Hbn.
(13.5.16)
n0;n
n;n
The
above
can
be
used
for
the
N-particle
case
as
long
as
they
are
indistinguishable.
For
the
^
case
when
the
one-particle
eigenstates
are
also
the
eigenstates
of
the
Hri
operator,
the
above
matrix
becomes
diagonal
yielding,
^^b
�
^
H
=
Ennbn
(13.5.17)
n
The
above
means
that
if
we
have
an
N-particle
fermion
eld,
it
can
be
represented
by
the
physics
of
one-particle
Hamiltonian
if
the
eigenstates
chosen
for
the
similarity
transform
are
also
the
eigenstates
of
the
one-particle
Hamiltonian.
Also,
the
above
Hamiltonian
is
very
similar
to
the
Hamiltonian
for
photons
derived
in
the
previous
chapter,
except
that
photons
are
bosons
and
the
above
derivation
is
for
fermions.
A
similar
derivation
for
bosons
shows
that
the
Hamiltonian
is
similar
to
the
above.
The
above
Hamiltonian
does
not
distinguish
between
one
particle
or
N
particles.
This
di#erence
of
the
quantum
systems
is
expressed
by
the
Fock
states
of
the
particles.
13.6
Additive
Two-Particle
Operator
In
general,
the
N
particles
in
a
Schrodinger
wave
eld
will
interact
with
each
other.
They
may
interact
pair-wise,
for
instance,
via
Coulomb
potential
other
than
just
the
Pauli's
exclusion
principle.
An
example
of
an
additive
two
particle
operator
in
coordinate
space
is
V
(r1,
r2)
=
(13.6.1)
4##0
jr1
-
r2|
This
will
be
part
of
a
two-particle
Hamiltonian
H^
r(r1,
r2)=
..r2
1
+
r2
+
V
(r1,
r2)
(13.6.2)
2m
When
N-particle
Hamiltonian
is
considered,
the
Coulomb
interaction
appears
as
V
=
V
(ri,
rj
)=
V
(ri,
rj)
(13.6.3)
i<j
i=6
j
154
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
For
N
particles,
there
are
N(N
..1)
terms
in
the
above
summations.
Again,
we
can
transform
the
above
from
coordinate
space
representation
to
Fock-space
representation
as
before
arriving
at
NN.
11
yy
^^^
V
=
(rN
)
##�
~
�
#�
(r1)
1P
1P
2
N!
i=1
j=1;j=6
i
yy
1P
1P
^^
1P
(r1)
##�
~
�
#�
1P
(rN
)
dr1
##�
~
�
#�
drN
(13.6.4)
where
the
~
indicates
that
ri
and
rj
are
excluded
from
the
sequence.
Without
loss
of
generality,
we
can
focus
on
the
term
where
ri
=
r1
and
rj
=
r2.
Then,
the
above
becomes
y�
yy
V^=
1
^(rN
)
##�
^(r3)
dr1dr2 ^(r2) ^(r1)V
(r1,
r2) ^1P
(r1) ^1P
(r2)
1P
1P
1P
1P
2N!
^�
1P
(r3)
##�
1P
(rN
)
dr1
##�
drN
+
##�
(13.6.5)
where
+
##�
above
implies
the
rest
of
the
terms;
there
are
altogether
N(N
-
1)
terms.
Performing
the
dr1
##�
drN
integrations
rst,
making
use
of
mode
orthonormality,
we
arrive
at
^^b
�
^b
y
V
=
##�
nN
n3
2N!
n3;##�
;nN
2.
(1;2)
.
^b
�
^b
�
^
n2
n1
Vbn1
bn2
bnN
5^^
##�
+
##�
(13.6.6)
n
;n
;n1;n2
;n1;n
;n2
where
(1;2)
dr1dr2f
*
(r1)f
*
(r2)V
(r1,
r2)#n1
(r1)#n2
(r2)
(13.6.7)
;n
;n1;n2
1
The
above
needs
to
operate
on
an
N-particle
Fock
state,
namely,
V^jl1,
##�
;lN
.
=^b�
##�
^b
�
nN
n3
2N!
n3;##�
;nN
2.
(1;2)
.
^b
�
^b
�
^5^^
V
##�
n2
n1
bn1
bn2
bnN
jl1,
##�
;lN
.
+
�
#�
(13.6.8)
n
;n
;n1;n2
;n1;n
;n2
The
right-most
term
that
acts
on
the
Fock
state
is
of
the
form
^^^
bn1
bn2
##�
bnN
jl1,
##�
;lN
.
(13.6.9)
Schr155odinger
Wave
Fields
The
above
yields
N!
terms
similar
to
(13.5.11).
But
^b
##�
^b
commutes
with
^b
^b
in
nN
n3
n2
n1
(1;2)
b�
^b
y
We
can
then
move
^
nN
n3
(13.6.6)
above.
to
the
right
of
V
Then
we
need
to
##�
.
;n
;n1;n2
evaluate
^b
�
^b
�
^^^^
nN
##�
n3
bn1
bn2
##�
bnN
jl1,
##�
;lN
.
=(N
-
2)!^b
n1
bn2
jl1,
##�
;lN
.
(13.6.10)
n3;##�
;nN
The
above
equality
can
be
proved
by
induction
from
the
three-particle
case
or
Equation
(13.5.13).
As
a
result,
(1;2)
V^jl1,
##�
;lN
.
=^b
�
n2
^b
�
n1
V
^b
n1
^b
n2
#�
(13.6.11)
jl1,
##�
;lN
.
+
�
;n
;n1;n2
2N(N
-
1)
n
;n1;n
;n2
There
are
N(N
-
1)
terms
of
the
similar
kind
in
the
+
##�
above.
Summing
them
up,
we
have
(1;2)
V^jl1,
#�
^b
�
n2
^b
�
n1
V
^b
n1
^b
n2
�
;lN
.
=
jl1,
##�
;lN
.
(13.6.12)
n
;n
;n1;n2
;n1;n
;n2
In
general,
the
additive
two-particle
operator
in
an
N-particle
fermion
eld
is
given
by
(1;2)
^^b
�
^b
y
V
=
V
n2
n1
bn1
bn2
^^
(13.6.13)
n
;n
;n1;n2
;n1;n
;n2
The
above
derivations
for
fermions
can
be
repeated
for
the
boson
case.
In
this
case,
we
will
have
a
eld
of
bosons.
It
is
pleasing
that
by
starting
out
with
the
N-particle
coordinate
space
representation
of
the
Schrodinger
equation,
one
arrives
at
a
much
simpler
Fock
space
representation
of
the
same
equation.
It
allows
one
to
treat
N-particle
problems
more
succinctly
using
such
a
representation.
13.7
More
on
Field
Operators
The
above
shows
that
the
one-particle
additive
operator
is
independent
of
the
number
of
particles.
So
what
distinguishes
one-particle
quantum
system
from
a
two-particle
one
is
in
the
Fock
state:
the
rst
one
will
have
a
Fock
state
for
one
particle
while
the
latter
will
have
a
Fock
state
for
two
particles.
A
general
one-particle
Fock
state
is
j .
=
c�
^b
�
j0.
(13.7.1)
#
�
When
the
one-particle
eld
operator
acts
on
the
above,
it
projects
the
coordinate
space
representation
of
the
one-particle
wavefunction.
Namely,
(r)j .
=
c##m(r)j0.
=
(r)j0.
(13.7.2)
�
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
The
above
one-particle
state
is
in
a
linear
superposition
of
di#erent
eigenstates.
Hence,
it
can
constitute
a
wave
packet.2
Also,
from
(13.3.1),
we
can
easily
show
that
^b
�
�
=
##(r) ^y(r)dr
(13.7.3)
On
combining
with
(13.7.3),
we
have
j .
=
c�
##(r) ^y(r)drj0.
�
=
c###(r)
^y(r)drj0.
=
f(r) ^y(r)drj0.
(13.7.4)
Therefore,
a
general
one-particle
state
can
be
written
as
a
linear
superposition
of
the
one-
particle
eld
operator
^y(r)
weighted
by
f(r).
It
is
clear
that
f(r)
satis
es
the
one-particle
Schrodinger
equation.
For
a
general
two-particle
state
in
Fock
space,
j .
=
c#1;#2
^b
�
^b
#�
2
j0.
(13.7.5)
#1
#1;#2
upon
substituting
(13.7.3)
into
the
above,
we
have
j .
=
##1
(r1)##2
(r2)c#1;#2
y(r1) ^y(r2)dr1dr2j0.
#1#2
=
f(r1,
r2) ^y(r1) ^y(r2)dr1dr2j0.
(13.7.6)
where
f(r1,
r2)=
##1
(r1)##2
(r2)c#1;#2
.
(13.7.7)
#1;#2
For
fermions,
it
can
be
easily
shown,
using
the
commutation
relations
for
the
eld
operators,
that
f
(r1,
r2)=
..f
(r2,
r1)
(13.7.8)
The
above
implies
that
c#1;#2
=
..c#2;#1
.
The
above
satis
es
the
two-particle
Schrodinger
equation.
It
can
be
generalized
to
N
particles,
yielding
j .
=
f
(r1,
r2,
##�
,
rN
)
^�
(r1)
^�
(r2)
##�
^�
(rN
)
dr1dr2
##�
drN
j0.
(13.7.9)
2See
the
appendix
for
a
discussion
of
wave
packets.
Schr157
odinger
Wave
Fields
13.8
Boson
Wave
Field
The
results
for
fermion
wave
eld
in
the
previous
section
can
also
be
derived
for
boson
wave
eld.
The
di#erence
is
that
more
than
one
boson
can
occupy
a
given
state:
The
Pauli
exclusion
principle
does
not
apply
to
bosons.
A
boson
state
involving
two
modes
can
be
denoted
as:
j .
=
jnm;nv.
(13.8.1)
where
there
are
nm
particles
in
mode
m,
and
nv
particles
in
mode
v.
Since
ordering
is
unimportant,
it
is
necessary
that
jnm;nv.
=
jnv;nm.
(13.8.2)
A
boson
creation
operator
can
be
de
ned
such
that
a^jnk;nm;nv.
=
Cnk+1jnk
+1;nm;nv.
(13.8.3)
It
raises
the
number
of
bosons
in
state
k
by
one.
By
de
nition,
y�
a^a^jnk;nl,
###.
=
Cnk+1Cnl+1jnk
+1;nl
+1,
###.
(13.8.4)
lk
y�
y�
a^a^jnl;nk,
###.
=
Cnl+1Cnk+1jnl
+1;nk
+1,
###.
=^aa^jnk;nl,
###.
(13.8.5)
kl
lk
The
last
equality
follows
since
ordering
is
unimportant.
Consequently,
y�
y�
a^a^-
a^a^=
0
(13.8.6)
kl
lk
Similarly,
one
can
de
ne
annihilation
operators
for
bosons
that
have
the
opposite
e#ect
as
the
creation
operators.
Hence,
going
through
a
similar
process,
one
also
has
a^ka^l
-
a^la^k
=
0
(13.8.7)
From
de
nition,
a^yjn.
=
Cn+1jn
+1.
(13.8.8)
a^jn.
=
Bnjn
-
1.
(13.8.9)
Furthermore,
from
(13.8.9),
we
have
hn
+1ja^yjn.
=
Cn+1;Cn*
+1
=
hnja^jn
+1.
=
Bn+1
(13.8.10)
Then,
we
can
show
that
a^a^kjnk;nl,
###.
=
C
*
Cnl+1jnk
-
1;nl
+1,
###.
(13.8.11)
lnk
a^ka^l
jnl;nk,
###.
=
Cn*
l+1Cnk
jnl
+1;nk
-
1,
###.
(13.8.12)
If
Cn
is
a
real
number,
then
when
l
=6k,
y�
a^ka^l
-
a^l
a^k
=
0
(13.8.13)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
For
the
case
when
l
=
k,
we
can
drop
the
subscripts
k
and
l
and
look
at
y^
a^ajn.
=
C2jn.
(13.8.14)
a^a^yjn.
=
Cn2
+1jn.
(13.8.15)
If
Cn2
+1
-
Cn
2
=
1,
then
�
-
^y^^
a^a^aa
=
I
(13.8.16)
v
Then
above
implies
that
C2
=
n,
since
C0
=0.
Also,
Cn
=
n.
In
summary,
for
bosons,
y�
y�
a^a^-
a^a^=
0
(13.8.17)
kl
lk
a^ka^l
-
a^la^k
=
0
(13.8.18)
y�
^a
-
a^^=
(13.8.19)
ak^ll
ak
I#kl
The
above
is
derived
without
resorting
to
the
use
of
the
quantum
harmonic
oscillator,
but
the
assumption
that
Cn
is
real
and
that
C2
=
n.
One
can
further
conclude
that
a^ya^jn.
=
njn.
(13.8.20)
which
is
the
number
operator,
which
has
been
derived
using
a
di#erent
approach.
13.9
Boson
Field
Operators
Similar
to
fermions,
we
can
de
ne
eld
operators
for
bosons,
so
that
^(r)=
a^j#j
(r)
(13.9.1)
In
gereral,
for
N
particles,
^(r1,
r2,
##�
,
rN
)=
v
1
a^nN
##�
a^n1
#n1
(r1)#n2
(r2)
##�
#nN
(rN
)
(13.9.2)
N!
n1;n2;##�
;nN
We
can
illustrate
with
a
three-particle
eld
operator:
�
^
(r1,
r2,
r3)=
v
a^n3
a^n3
a^n1
#(r1)#(r1)#(r2)#(r3)
(13.9.3)
3!
n1;n2;n3
When
this
operates
on
j1l,
1m,
1n.
where
the
three
particles
are
in
di#erent
modes,
we
get
(13.3.9)
except
that
-
signs
are
now
replaced
by
+
signs.
If
we
have
a
state
denoted
by
##2
j2l,
1m.
=
v
a^amj0.
(13.9.4)
2!
Schr159odinger
Wave
Fields
then
(r1,
r2,
r3)j2l,
1m.
1
=
v
[2#l(r1)#m(r2)#l(r3)+2#l(r2)#m(r3)#l(r1)+2#l(r3)#m(r1)#l(r2)]
j0.
(13.9.5)
2!3!
It
can
be
shown
that
the
above
is
the
correctly
normalized
wavefunction.
If
the
state
is
##3
j3l.
=
v
3!
a^
j0.
(13.9.6)
l
then
6
(r1,
r2,
r3)j3l.
=
#l(r1)#l(r2)#l(r3)j0.
(13.9.7)
3!
The
above
is
in
fact
normalized.
13.10
Additive
One-Particle
Operator
In
this
case,
we
can
illustrate
with
the
three-particle
case
for
bosons,
arriving
at
an
expression
similar
to
(13.5.8)
2.
1
(1)
y
.
^
an2
a^
a^
a^
a^n1
a^n3
+
##�
(13.10.1)
n3
n2
;n1
1
n2;n3
n
;n1
where
(1)
|
^
Hr1
=
h#n
j#n1
i
(13.10.2)
n
;n1
When
the
three
particles
are
in
the
j1l,
1m,
1n.
state,
(13.5.11)
follows
for
bosons
except
that
we
replace
-
signs
with
+
signs.
Equation
(13.5.13)
follows
similarly
for
bosons,
so
does
(13.5.14)
and
(13.5.15).
When
two
of
the
particles
are
in
the
same
state
as
(13.9.4),
we
have
v
a^n1
a^n2
a^n3
j2l,
1m.
=
2!(#ln3
#mn2
#ln1
+
#ln3
#mn1
#ln2
+
#ln2
#mn3
#ln1
)j0.
(13.10.3)
Similar
to
(13.5.13),
we
need
to
evaluate
y
a^n1
a^n2
a^n3
j2l,
1mi
a^
a^
n3
n2
n2;n3
a^
+
#mn1
a^
�
a^
j0i
�
m
2!
2#ln1
a^
v
#2
2!^an1
a^
j0.
=
(2!)^an1
j2l,
1mi
a^
(13.10.4)
=
The
rst
equality
is
established
using
(13.10.3),
while
the
second
equality
is
obtained
by
##2
working
backward
using
commutation
relations
to
expand
^an1
a^
a^
j0i.
When
the
three
particles
are
in
the
same
state
as
indicated
by
(13.9.6),
we
have
a^n1
a^n2
a^n3
j3l.
=
(3!)3=2#ln3
#ln2
#ln1
j0.
(13.10.5)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
and
a^n1
a^n2
a^n3
j3li
a^
a^
n3
n2
n2n3
##2
##3
3=2
(3!)3=2a^n1
j0.
=
j0.
=
(2!)^an1
j3li
=
(3!)
#ln1
a^
a^
(13.10.6)
l
In
general,
n2;n3
j 3p.
=
(2!)
^an1
j 3pi
a^
a^
a^n1
a^n2
a^n3
(13.10.7)
n3
n2
where
j 3p.
is
the
three-particle
Fock
state
of
either
j1l,
1m,
1n.
,
j2l,
1m.
,
j3l.
(13.10.8)
or
other
combinations.
The
proof
for
the
rest
follows
that
of
fermion
particles
of
(13.5.14)
to
(13.5.17).
In
general,
the
Hamiltonian
for
N
bosons
is
given
by
H
=
Hn0;na^
(13.10.9)
n.
a^n
n;n
For
the
diagonal
case,
it
becomes
H
=
Ena^
a^n
(13.10.10)
13.11
The
Di#erence
between
Boson
Field
and
Photon
Field
The
above
is
the
Hamiltonian
for
a
boson
eld
or
gas
in
Fock
space.
It
looks
strikingly
similar
to
the
Hamiltonian
for
photon
eld
or
electromagnetic
eld.
However,
it
is
to
be
noted
that
a
boson
eld
is
quite
di#erent
from
the
eld
of
N
photons.
1.
A
coordinate
ri
can
be
associated
with
every
boson
particle,
but
not
with
every
photon;
2.
All
photons
share
the
same
electromagnetics
eld
function
in
its
eld
operator
representation,
but
N
bosons
will
have
product
of
N
one-particle
eld
operator;
3.
The
Hamiltonian
of
a
boson
gas
has
no
zero-point
energy,
but
for
photons,
there
exists
the
zero-point
energy
of
1
~!.
2
A
photon
should
be
thought
of
as
a
quantized
energy
packet
due
to
coupled
quantum
harmonic
oscillation
of
\space�
or
\vacuum",
similar
to
the
case
of
a
phonon,
which
is
coupled
quantum
harmonic
oscillation
of
crystalline
lattice.
Chapter
14
Interaction
of
Di#erent
Particles
14.1
Introduction
In
the
previous
chapter,
it
was
shown
that
the
Hamiltonian
of
a
many
particle
system
can
be
written
succinctly
using
Fock
space
representation.
This
opens
up
the
study
of
complex
systems,
such
as
excitons
that
involve
the
interaction
of
electron-hole
pair,
as
well
as
superconductivity
that
involves
the
interaction
of
electrons
with
phonons.
In
this
chapter,
we
will
study
the
interaction
of
the
electron
of
an
atom
with
photons
of
a
cavity
using
the
many-particle
formalism.
14.2
Interaction
of
Particles
Say
if
we
have
two
quantum
systems
that
are
initially
non-interacting,
their
individual
quantum
systems
can
be
described
by
eigenstates
that
satisfy
^
H1
j 1.
=
E1
j 1.
(14.2.1)
^
H2
j 2.
=
E2
j 2.
(14.2.2)
Even
though
the
two
systems
are
entirely
non-interacting
with
each
other,
nevertheless,
we
can
combine
the
two
systems
together
and
write
H^
0
j .
=
H^1
+
H^
2
j 1ij 2.
=(E1
+
E2)
j 1ij 2.
=
E
j .
(14.2.3)
where
j 1ij 2.
represents
a
state
in
the
direct
product
space.
It
can
be
used
to
represent
the
eigenstates
of
the
combined
system.
Equation
(14.2.3)
is
entirely
equivalent
to
(14.2.1)
^^
and
(14.2.2).
In
the
above,
H1
acts
only
on
j 1.
and
H2
acts
on
j 2i.
The
above
allows
us
to
add
an
interaction
term
between
system
1
and
system
2,
and
the
same
direct
product
space
can
be
used
to
span
the
solution
space.
By
using
Fock
space
representation,
the
above
Hamiltonians
can
be
written
in
terms
of
annihilation
and
creation
opeartors
for
a
system
161
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
consisting
of
fermions
and
bosons,
^b
H2
=
~!#a^
a^.
(14.2.4)
H1
Ej
^
j.
^^
where
H1
can
be
the
Hamiltonian
for
electrons,
and
H2
can
be
the
Hamiltonian
for
photons
where
the
1
~!.
term
or
the
zero-point
energy
has
been
ignored.
This
term
will
just
introduce
a
phase
shift
in
the
solution.
When
electric
dipole
interaction
exists
between
the
electron
of
an
atom
and
the
electromagnetic
eld,
the
interaction
Hamiltonian
may
be
written
as
Hed;r
=
eE
�
r
(14.2.5)
The
above
has
been
added
as
a
perturbation
to
the
unperturbed
equation
(14.2.3)
where
the
electric
eld
is
treated
classically
in
a
previous
chapter.
We
have
enough
knowledge
now
to
treat
both
E
and
r
quantum
mechanically.
For
the
electron
in
the
i-th
atom,
the
above
becomes
~!
H^
ed;ri
=
ie
a^.
-
a^
u.
(ri)
�
ri
(14.2.6)
.
2#0
We
have
used
a
quantized
cavity
mode
electric
eld
in
(14.2.5)
to
arrive
at
the
above.
Also,
r
in
coordinate
space
representation
remains
unchanged.
When
N
atoms
are
present,
N.
#.
~!
H^
ed;r
=
ie
a^.
-
a^
u.
(ri)
�
ri
(14.2.7)
.
2#0
i=1
.
A
similarity
transform
of
the
above
Hamiltonian
can
be
performed
with
the
N
particle
eld
operator
to
yield
Hed
NP
(r1,
#�
�
,
rN
)H^
ed;r
NP
(r1,
#�
�
,
rN
)dr1
##�
drN
(14.2.8)
As
mentioned
in
the
previous
chapter,
since
only
one-particle
interaction
is
involved,
the
above
can
be
transformed
with
the
one-particle
eld
operator
yielding
bk
a^.
-
a^
(14.2.9)
^
Hed
Hed;#;j;k
^b
j;k;.
where
Hed;#;j;k
=
ie
~!
dr#j
*
(r)u#(r)
�
r#k(r)
(14.2.10)
2#0
14.3
Time-Dependent
Perturbation
Theory
In
the
time-dependent
perturbation
theory,
we
rst
seek
the
solution
of
the
unperturbed
system.
The
eigenstate
of
the
unperturbed
system
is
de
ned
as
H0
jNfm;
Nbm.
=
Em
jNfm;
Nbm.
(14.3.1)
Interaction
of
Different
Particles
where
jNfm;
Nbm.
stands
for
a
vector
in
the
direct
product
space
of
fermions
and
bosons:
Nfm
stands
for
the
m-th
state
of
the
fermions,
while
Nbm
stands
for
the
m-th
state
of
the
bosons.
When
the
system
is
perturbed,
we
denote
the
solution
j .
as
a
linear
superposition
of
the
eigenstates
of
the
unperturbed
solution.
That
is
j .
=
cm
(t)
e
..i!mt
jNfm;
Nbm.
(14.3.2)
m
where
~!m
=
Em.
The
state
j .
evolves
in
time
according
to
the
equation
i.
j .
=
H^
0
+
H^
p
j .
(14.3.3)
@t
Applying
the
time-dependent
perturbation
method
as
we
have
done
previously,
and
testing
the
equation
with
hNfq;
Nbq|
gives
(1)
(0)
..i(!m..!q
c_q
(t)=
cm
e
)t
hNfq;
Nbq|
H^
p
jNfm;
Nbm.
(14.3.4)
i.
(0)
If
the
starting
state
is
assumed
such
that
cs
=
1,
and
all
other
states
are
zero,
then
the
above
becomes
(1)
i(!q..!s
c_q
(t)=
e
)t
hNfq;
Nbq|
H^
p
jNfs;
Nbs.
(14.3.5)
i~
with
bk
a^.
-
a^
(14.3.6)
H^
p
=
H^
ed
Hed;#;j;k
^b
j
j;k;.
14.3.1
Absorption
The
electron
in
an
atom
is
assumed
to
have
two
states:
a
lower
energy
state
E1,
and
an
upper
energy
state
E2.
We
assume
a
photon
in
mode
#1
in
the
cavity.
Then
the
starting
state
can
be
written
as
jNfs;
Nbs.
=
b
1
a^
#1
j0.
(14.3.7)
with
energy
Es
=
E1
+
~!#1
(14.3.8)
Consequently,
.
.
.
a^.
-
a^
#1
j0i
Hp
jNfs;
Nbs.
=
Hed;#;j;k
^b
^
bk
a^
(14.3.9)
j
j;k;.
It
can
be
shown
that
bk
a^.
-
a^
a^
#1
j0.
=
#k1###1
a^
#1
j0i
j0i-
#k1
a^
(14.3.10)
1
j
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
In
order
for
hNfq;
Nbq|
H^
jNfs;
Nbs.
to
be
nonzero,
it
is
necessary
that
jNfq;
Nbq.
contains
^^
yyy
j0.
or
a^
a^
#1
j0i.
If
jNfq;
Nbq.
=
j0.
(14.3.11)
then
Eq
=
Ej,
and
i(!j
..!1..!#1
)t
eHed;#;j;k#k1###1
h0|
^b
j
i~
(1)
c_
(t)=
^
ybj
j0.
(14.3.12)
q
k;.
1
i(!j
..!1..!#1
)t
=
eHed;#1;j;1
(14.3.13)
i~
where
~!j
=
Ej.
The
above
is
an
oscillatory
function
of
t
unless
!j
-
!1
-
!#1
=
0.
When
(1)
this
happens,
_cq
(t)
will
integrate
to
a
large
value,
indicating
the
high
likelihood
of
transition
to
his
eigenstate.
Therefore,
for
this
to
happen,
we
need
E2
-
E1
=
~!#1
(14.3.14)
In
this
process,
we
start
with
the
electron
in
E1
and
a
photon
in
the
cavity,
and
end
up
with
the
electron
in
E2
and
no
photon
as
indicated
by
(14.3.11).
If
we
integrate
the
above
equation,
a
sinc
function
results,
which
can
be
approximated
by
a
delta
function
for
long
integration
time,
as
was
done
previously.
One
can
show
that
2#
(1)
2
jcq
j2
=
t0
jHed#1;j;1j#(E2
-
E1
-
~!#1
)
(14.3.15)
One
can
derive
the
transition
rate
as
before
to
arrive
at
2p
wq
=
|
Hed#1;j;1
j2
#(E2
-
E1
-
~!#1
)
(14.3.16)
In
the
above,
the
other
possibility
is
for
the
nal
state
to
be
jNfq;
Nbq.
=
a^
a^
#1
j0.
(14.3.17)
with
energy
Eq
=
Ej
+
~!.
+
~!#1
(14.3.18)
Hence
Eq
-
Es
=
Ej
-
E1
+
~!.
(14.3.19)
(1)
and
Eq
..Es
=
0
in
order
for
transition
to
occur
or
cq
to
be
large.
However,
(14.3.19)
cannot
be
zero.
If
Ej
=
E2;Eq
-
Es
>
0
always.
If
Ej
=
E1,
then
~!.
>
0.
What
this
means
is
that
it
is
not
possible
to
start
with
an
electron
in
the
ground
state
and
a
photon
in
the
cavity
to
end
up
with
the
electron
in
the
excited
state
with
the
emission
of
a
photon.
Interaction
of
Different
Particles
14.4
Spontaneous
Emission
In
the
case
of
spontaneous
emission,
we
assume
that
the
starting
state
of
the
electron
is
in
the
excited
state
with
energy
E2.
Then,
Es
=
E2
initially
and
jNfs;
Nbs.
=
j0.
(14.4.1)
Then
H^
p
jNfs;
Nbs.
=
Hed;#;j;k
^b
bk
a^.
-
a^
j0.
(14.4.2)
j
j;k;.
The
above
can
be
reduced
to
^
HpjNfs;
Nbs.
=
..
Hed;#;j;k
#2k
^b
a^
j0.
(14.4.3)
j
j;k;.
Therefore,
for
hNfq;
NbqjH^
pjNfs;
Nbs.
to
be
nonzero,
we
need
jNfq;
Nbq.
=
a^
�
#
j0.
(14.4.4)
with
Eq
=
Ej
+
~!.
(14.4.5)
Therefore
Eq
-
Es
=
Ej
-
E2
+
~!.
(14.4.6)
In
order
for
a
sizeable
c(1)
q
,
we
need
Ej
=
E1,
and
then
E2
-
E1
=
~!.
(14.4.7)
Then
electron
starts
with
the
excited
state
E2,
spontaneously
emits
a
photon,
and
drops
to
lower
state
E1.
Then
energy
of
the
emitted
photon
satis
es
(14.4.7)
by
energy
conservation.
14.5
Stimulated
Emission
In
this
case,
the
electron
in
an
atom
is
in
the
excited
state.
The
presence
of
a
photon
in
the
cavity
stimulates
the
emission
of
another
photon
from
the
electron.
The
initial
state
is
jNfs;
Nbs.
=
2
a^
#1
j0.
(14.5.1)
with
Es
=
E2
+
~!#1
(14.5.2)
166
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
We
can
show
that
.
.
.
#1
Hed;#;j;k
^b
bk
a^.
-
a^
HpjNfs;
Nbs.
=
j0i
a^
(14.5.3)
2
j;k;.
a^
a^
#1
Hed;#;j;k
#k2
###1
^b
j0i
-
^b
(14.5.4)
=
j;k;.
In
order
for
the
above
to
transition
to
the
nal
state,
or
one
requires
a
non-zero
result
for
hNfq;
NbqjH^
pjNfs;
Nbs.
it
is
necessary
that
jNfq;
Nbq.
=
a^
a^
#1
j0.
(14.5.5)
withenergy
�
Eq
=
Ej
+
~!.
+
~!#1
(14.5.6)
or
Eq
-
Es
=
Ej
-
E2
+
~!.
=
0
(14.5.7)
In
other
words,
the
only
possibility
is
for
Ej
=
E1,
yielding
E2
-
E1
=
~!.
(14.5.8)
The
above
is
just
the
spontaneous
emission
of
a
photon
with
the
above
energy,
regardless
if
we
already
have
a
photon
with
energy
~!#1
in
the
cavity.
Next
we
consider
the
case
when
.
=
#1.
Then
##2
jNfq;
Nbq.
=
v
2!
a^
j0.
(14.5.9)
#1
�
with
Eq
=
Ej
+2~!#1
(14.5.10)
Consequently,
##2
(^a#)2^b
j
hNfq;
NbqjH^
p
jNfs;
Nbs.
=
Hed;#1;j;2h0jv
2!
j0i
a^
#1
##2
v
11
(^a#)2^b
j
2!Hed;#1;j;2h0j
j0i
a^
#1
2!
2!
=2Hed;#1;j;2
(14.5.11)
The
2
factor
is
important
implying
that
the
transition
is
two
times
more
likely
to
occur
compared
to
the
previous
case.
This
is
peculiar
to
stimulated
emission
where
the
emission
of
a
photon
is
enhanced
by
the
presence
of
a
photon
of
the
same
frequency.
Interaction
of
Different
Particles
14.6
Multi-photon
Case
In
the
multi-photon
case,
the
transition
rate
for
stimulated
emission
can
be
shown
to
be
2p
wq
=(n#1
+
1)jHed;#1;1;2j2#(E1
-
E2
+
~!#1
)
(14.6.1)
implying
that
the
presence
of
n#1
photons
in
the
cavity
enhances
the
emission
by
(n#1
+
1)
times.
The
spontaneous
emission,
however,
is
not
a#ected
by
the
presence
of
photons
of
other
frequencies
in
the
cavity.
For
the
absorption
case,
it
can
be
shown
that
the
formula
is
2p
wq
=
n#1
jHed;#1;1;2j2#(E2
-
E1
-
~!#1
)
(14.6.2)
14.7
Total
Spontaneous
Emission
Rate
When
an
electron
emits
a
photon
into
the
cavity,
there
are
many
modes
with
the
same
frequency
that
the
emission
can
occur.
In
general,
the
total
spontaneous
emission
rate
is
2p
Wspon
=
wq
=
jHed;#;1;2j2#(E1
-
E2
+
~!#)
(14.7.1)
q.
In
the
above
~!#
Hed;#;1;2
=
ie
f
*
j
(r)[u#(r)
�
r]#k(r)dr
2#0
~!#
.
ie
u#(r0)
�
rjk
(14.7.2)
2#0
where
rjk
=
#j
*
(r)r#k(r)dr
(14.7.3)
We
have
assumed
here
that
u#(r0)
is
slowly
varying
compared
to
#l(r),
l
=
j,
k,
and
that
#l(r)
is
highly
localized
around
an
atom.
The
modes
in
the
cavity
can
be
made
countable
by
imposing
a
periodic
boundary
condition
arriving
at
ik#r
u#(r)=
ev
e
(14.7.4)
Vb
The
summation
over
di#erent
electromagnetic
modes
then
becomes
Vb
Vb
!.
#k
=
dk
(14.7.5)
(2#)3
(2#)3
.
pol
k
pol
k
pol
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
14.1:
The
vectors
in
the
polarization
of
the
emitted
photon
are
aligned
to
simplify
the
calculation
(from
DAB
Miller).
We
can
also
pick
the
polarization
such
that
one
of
them
is
always
orthogonal
to
r12,
so
that
u(r0)
�
r12
=
u#(r0)r12
sin
.
(14.7.6)
Consequently,
r12
sin
.
#(E1
-
E2
+
~!k)dk
r~!k
2p
Vb
.
(2#)3
1
ik#r0
Wspon
ie
(14.7.7)
e
2#0
Vb
or
Wspon
=
e2jr12j2
8#2#0
!k
sin2
##(E1
-
E2
+
~!k)dk
.
8
.
p
e2jr12j2
=
!k#(E1
-
E2
+
~!k)2p
sin3
#k2d#dk
(14.7.8)
8#2#0
k=0
#=0
In
the
above,
!k
=
ck,
or
~ck
=
~!k.
Then
.
8
.
p
e2jr12j2
Wspon
=(~!k)#(E1
-
E2
+
~!k)
sin3
#d#(~!k)2d(~!k)
(14.7.9)
4##0c3~4
k=0
#=0
Since
.
p
.
1
sin3
#d.
=
-
(1
-
cos
2
#)d
cos
.
=
4
(14.7.10)
3
then,
#=0
..1
e2jr12j2!3
12
Wspon
=
(14.7.11)
3##0~c3
where
~!12
=
E2
-
E1.
The
life
time
of
a
state
is
then
t
=
W
..1
.
spon
Chapter
15
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
15.1
Introduction
One
important
tenet
of
quantum
mechanics
is
that
one
does
not
know
what
the
state
of
the
system
is
until
one
performs
a
measurement.
After
the
measurement,
the
system
collapses
to
the
state
that
is
\discovered�
by
the
measurement.
Before
the
measurement,
the
quantum
system
is
described
by
a
state
that
is
in
a
linear
superposition
of
di#erent
states.
It
is
the
existence
as
a
linear
superposition
of
states
that
greatly
enriches
the
information
content
of
a
quantum
system.
The
possibility
of
a
system
to
be
simultaneously
in
di#erent
states
is
peculiar
to
quantum
mechanics.
Objects
in
the
classical
world
cannot
be
in
such
a
state.
In
puts
quantum
systems
in
the
realm
of
\ghosts�
and
\angels�
where
in
fairy
tales
and
ghost
and
angel
stories
of
di#erent
cultures,
they
can
be
simultaneously
in
many
places
or
in
di#erent
states.
It
is
because
of
these
\ghost-angel�
states,
that
we
can
have
quantum
cryptography,
quantum
communication,
quantum
circuits,
and
quantum
computing.
15.2
Quantum
Cryptography
Quantum
cryptography
can
be
used
for
secure
quantum
communication.
It
is
secure
because
a
quantum
state
cannot
be
replicated
without
disturbing
the
quantum
state.
Hence,
whoever
wants
to
replicate
a
quantum
state
to
steal
the
data
will
be
easily
detected.
The
property
of
non-replication
follows
from
the
no-cloning
theorem.
15.2.1
No-cloning
Theorem
First
we
assume
that
a
quantum
operator
can
be
designed
such
that
it
can
clone
a
quantum
state
without
measuring
it.
But
such
a
capability
will
violate
the
principle
of
linear
superposition,
as
we
shall
show.
Therefore,
such
an
operator
cannot
be
designed.
This
is
a
proof
by
contradiction.
169
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
A
quantum
system
is
described
by
a
quantum
state
that
evolves
from
an
initial
state
to
a
nal
state
following
the
laws
of
quantum
mechanics.
An
example
of
such
an
evolutionary
operator
is
^..i
.
t
T
=
e
(15.2.1)
The
above
quantum
operator
is
a
unitary
operator
as
well
as
a
linear
operator.
First,
assume
that
it
has
the
capability
of
replicating
a
quantum
state
in
system
2
to
be
identical
to
the
state
in
system
1
after
acting
on
such
a
quantum
system.
It
does
so
without
altering
the
quantum
state
of
system
1,
e.g.,
by
a
measurement.
We
denote
this
by
T
j si2j ai1
=
j ai2j ai1
(15.2.2)
By
the
same
token,
it
should
replicate
^
T
j si2j bi1
=
j bi2j bi1
(15.2.3)
Now
if
the
state
to
be
replicated
is
j ci1
=
v
[j ai1
+
j bi1]
(15.2.4)
Then
^^
T
j si2j ci1
=
v
T
j si2j ai1
+
T^j si2j bi1
2
=
pi2j a6i2j c(15.2.5)
[j ai1
+
j bi2j bi1]=
j ci1
2
Clearly,
the
above
violates
the
principle
of
linear
superposition
if
the
last
equality
is
true.
Hence,
such
a
cloning
operator
is
impossible
due
to
the
violation
of
the
principle
of
linear
superpostion.
The
above
proves
the
no-cloning
theorem.
15.2.2
Entangled
States
A
multi-mode
photon
can
be
described
by
the
following
eld
operator
~!k
ik#r..i!t
E(r)=
esa^k;se
+
c.c
(15.2.6)
2V#0
k;s
The
single
photon
state
can
be
denoted
by
j .
=
j1k;v.
(15.2.7)
The
above
denotes
a
photon
in
a
pure
k
state
with
polarization
v.
It
has
a
packet
of
energy
E
=
~!k.
However,
a
photon
with
a
pure
k
state
is
not
localized.
But
a
photon
generated
by
a
source
like
an
atomic
transition
must
be
causal,
and
hence,
localized.
A
localized
wave
packet
describing
this
photon
eld
can
be
constructed
by
using
a
linear
superposition
of
wavenumber
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
k
or
frequencies.
For
high
frequency
photons,
this
localized
state
can
have
a
center
frequency
with
a
small
spread
of
frequencies
around
the
center
frequency.
The
single-photon
Fock
state
can
hence
be
written
as
j .
=
ckj1k;v.
(15.2.8)
For
quasi-monochromatic
photons,
the
above
will
be
dominated
by
one
term
and
we
can
denote
this
photon
approximately
with
the
state
vector
(15.2.7).
Figure
15.1:
Two
photons
traveling
in
di#erent
directions.
With
the
above
picture
in
mind,
we
can
think
of
two
localized
photons
traveling
in
di#erent
directions.
A
direct
product
space
can
be
used
to
represent
the
state
of
these
two
photons:
j iab
=
j1ka;viaj1kb;vib
(15.2.9)
where
we
have
assumed
quasi-mono-chromatic
photons.
For
simplicity,
we
denote
a
two-
photon
state
as
j i12
=
jV
i1jV
i2
(15.2.10)
If
the
two
photons
are
generated
from
the
same
source,
entangled
photon
states
may
result.
Entangled
two-particle
states
are
those
that
cannot
be
written
as
a
product
(outer
product
or
tensor
product)
of
simpler
states.
An
example
is
the
EPR
(Einstein,
Podolsky,
and
Rosen)
pair
1
...
j#+i12
=
pjHi1jHi2
+
jV
i1jV
i2
(15.2.11)
Other
entangled
states
are
1
...
j#..i12
=
pjHi1jHi2
..jV
i1jV
i2
(15.2.12)
2
1
...
j +i12
=
pjHi1jV
i2
+
jV
i1jHi2
(15.2.13)
2
1
...
j ..i12
=
pjHi1jV
i2
..jV
i1jHi2
(15.2.14)
The
above
four
states
are
also
called
the
Bell
states.
They
are
usually
generated
due
to
the
particle
pair
needing
to
satisfy
conservation
of
angular
momentum.
For
instance,
two
photons
are
generated
by
atomic
transitions
where
the
initial
angular
momentum
of
the
system
is
zero.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
An
angular
momentum
conserving
state
with
two
counter-propagating
photon
is
1
...
j#.
=
pjRi1jRi2
+
jLi1jLi2
(15.2.15)
where
R
and
L
stand
for
right-handed
and
left-handed
circular
polarizations,
respectively.
But
a
change
of
basis
allows
the
above
to
be
written
as
1
...
j#.
=
..v
jHi1jHi2
..jV
i1jV
i2
(15.2.16)
one
of
the
Bell
states.
The
entangled
states
are
bewildering
because
it
means
that
for
two
counter-propagating
photons,
if
one
measures
one
photon
is
in
jH.
state,
the
other
photon
immediately
collapses
to
an
jH.
state
as
well,
regardless
of
how
far
apart
the
two
photons
are.
Whereas
before
the
measurement,
the
photons
are
in
a
linear
superposition
of
a
jH.
and
jV
.
states.
15.2.3
A
Simple
Quantum
Encryption
Algorithm
Let
us
assume
that
Alice
and
Bob
communicate
by
the
use
of
simple
photon
polarizers.
When
Alice
sends
out
a
jV
.
state
photon,
it
represents
a
\1�
and
similarly,
an
jH.
state
photon
represents
a
\0".
If
Bob
receives
with
a
similarly
aligned
polarizer,
he
receives
the
information
correctly.
(We
call
this
the
VH
mode.)
If
Alice
aligns
her
polarizer
at
45.
and
Bob
follows
suit,
he
continues
to
receive
the
information
correctly.
However,
if
Alice
aligns
her
polarizer
vertically,
and
Bob
aligns
his
at
45#,
the
bit
information
received
by
him
is
only
correct
only
50%
of
the
time.
This
is
because
the
j+45.
state
and
j..45.
state
are
expressible
as
a
linear
superposition
of
the
jH.
and
jV
.
states.
Normally,
j+45.
=
v
(jH.
+
jV
i)
(15.2.17)
2
1
j..45.
=
v
(jHi..jV
i)
(15.2.18)
2
By
the
tenet
of
quantum
measurement,
these
states
are
measured
with
equal
likelihood
of
being
jH.
or
jV
i.
Similarly,
if
Alice
transmits
with
her
polarizer
aligned
in
the
45.
angle,
and
Bob
receives
with
polarizers
with
H
and
V
polarization,
he
receives
the
polarization
of
jH.
and
jV
.
with
equal
likelihood
(50%
chance)
regardless
of
what
polarization
Alice
sends.
This
is
because
jH.
=
v
(j+45.
+
j..45i)
(15.2.19)
2
1
jV
.
=
v
(j+45.
-
j..45i)
(15.2.20)
2
Now
if
Alice
decides
to
use
her
polarizer
randomly,
and
Bob
receives
with
the
polarizer
randomly
so
that
they
are
equally
likely
to
use
VH
mode
or
45.
mode.
The
probability
that
their
polarizers
are
aligned
is
correctly
50%.
During
this
time,
they
communicate
with
no
error.
The
other
50%
time,
when
their
polarizers
are
misaligned,
they
communicate
with
50%
error.
Hence,
25%
of
the
data
are
wrong.
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
Figure
15.2:
Communication
between
Alice
and
Bob
using
single-photon
source
and
simpli
ed
polarizer
measurement
schemes
(from
DAB
Miller).
After
a
preliminary
quantum
communication,
Alice
and
Bob
can
communicate
the
information
about
the
alignments
of
their
polarizers,
say,
by
a
phone
call.
Bob
will
retain
only
the
data
when
their
polarizers
are
correctly
aligned
and
discard
the
rest.
For
the
preliminary
communication,
they
can
compare
their
data
over
the
aligned
case,
and
there
should
be
error
free
in
principle.
If
an
eavesdropper,
Eve,
attempts
to
steal
the
information,
she
does
so
by
using
a
polarizer
to
intercept
the
photon.
If
Eve
knows
that
Alice
is
using
the
VH
mode,
Eve
aligns
her
polarizer
in
the
VH
mode.
After
Eve
has
received
the
data,
she
can
retransmit
the
data
to
Bob,
thus
stealing
the
data.
However,
if
the
polarization
used
by
Alice
is
random,
Eve's
polarizer
is
not
aligned
with
Alice's
half
the
time.
Eve
would
have
corrupted
her
data
making
the
wrong
transmission
50%
of
the
time.
This
would
increase
the
error
in
transmission
of
the
data
from
Alice
to
Bob
making
it
wrong
25%
of
the
time.
If
Alice
and
Bob
communicate
by
a
phone
call
to
check
the
security
of
their
data
transmission
and
found
that
it
is
wrong
approximately
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
25%
of
the
time,
they
would
have
suspected
an
eavesdropper.
Notice
that
Eve
has
to
collapse
the
state
of
the
photon
sent
out
by
Alice
into
one
of
the
two
states
of
Eve's
polarizer
before
she
can
duplicate
the
photon
and
send
it
to
Bob.
Because
of
the
no-cloning
theorem,
Eve
cannot
duplicate
the
state
of
the
photon
that
Alice
has
sent
without
measuring
it.
In
a
secure
communication
system,
Alice
and
Bob
do
not
send
the
real
message
in
preliminary
testing
of
the
security
of
time
channel.
Alice
will
rst
send
Bob
the
secret
key
and
test
if
the
channel
is
secure.
If
it
is
a
secure
channel,
then
she
would
send
the
rest
of
the
information.
The
above
is
known
as
the
BB84
protocol,
attributed
to
Bennett
and
Brassard's
work
in
1984.
Also,
notice
that
the
above
secure
communication
system
does
not
work
in
a
classical
optical
communication
channel
where
a
bunch
of
photons
is
sent.
If
a
bunch
of
photon
is
sent
by
Alice
to
denote
a
V
or
an
H
polarization
to
send
\1�
and
\0",
when
Eve
eavesdrops
with
her
misaligned
polarizer
by
45#,
she
would
have
noticed
that
equal
number
of
photons
are
emerging
from
her
two
orthogonal
polarizations.
By
checking
the
phase
of
the
two
streams
of
photons,
she
can
easily
duplicate
a
classical
photon
bunch
and
send
it
to
Bob,
meanwhile
stealing
the
data
off
the
communication
channel.
Hence,
the
security
of
the
quantum
communication
channel
comes
from
the
interpretation
of
quantum
mechanics:
a
particle
is
in
the
linear
superposition
of
quantum
states
before
the
measurement.
A
measurement
collapses
the
quantum
state
into
one
of
the
states
\discovered�
by
the
measurement.
The
above
discussion
of
a
secure
channel
is
based
on
ideal
single-photon
sources.
In
practice,
non-ideality
will
give
rise
to
communication
errors.
Quantum
error
correction
schemes
have
been
devised
to
minimize
the
errors
in
a
quantum
communication
channel.
15.3
Quantum
Computing
The
distinguishing
feature
of
quantum
computing
is
quantum
parallelism.
Again,
this
follows
from
the
tenet
of
quantum
measurement.
A
quantum
state
can
be
in
a
linear
superposition
of
many
states
before
the
measurement.
After
the
measurement,
the
quantum
state
collapses
to
one
of
the
quantum
states.
The
prowess
of
quantum
computing,
as
mentioned
before,
comes
from
the
\ghost-angel�
state
of
a
quantum
system.
15.3.1
Quantum
Bits
(Qubits)
A
quantum
bit
or
a
qubit
is
a
bit
in
a
quantum
state
that
is
in
the
linear
superposition
of
two
states
representing
the
j0.
bit
and
the
j1.
bit.
Namely,
j .
=
C0
j0.
+
C1
j1.
(15.3.1)
where
jC0j2
+
jC1j2
=
1.
The
two
states
j0.
and
j1.
can
be
the
vertical
and
horizontal
polarization
of
a
photon.
Alternatively,
it
can
be
the
up
and
down
state
of
a
spin,
or
any
two
energy
levels
of
a
multi-level
system.
The
richness
of
quantum
information
is
already
manifested
in
this
very
simple
example.
Unlike
classical
bits
in
classical
computers,
which
can
only
have
binary
values,
a
qubit
can
have
multitudes
of
possible
values
depending
on
the
values
of
C0
and
C1.
A
two-state
quantum
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
system,
as
has
been
shown
in
the
spin
case,
can
be
represented
by
a
Bloch
sphere.
Every
point
on
the
Bloch
sphere
represents
a
possible
quantum
state,
depending
on
C1
and
C2,
and
there
could
be
in
nitely
many
states.
15.3.2
Quantum
Gates
Analogous
to
classical
logic
gates,
there
are
quantum
gates
that
manipulate
the
j0.
and
j1.
states
of
a
qubit.
A
qubit
as
indicated
by
(15.3.1)
can
be
represented
by
a
column
vector
of
length
two.
For
example,
the
qubit
in
(15.3.1)
can
be
represented
by
[C0;C1].
A
quantum
tt
gate
transforms
the
quantum
state
[C0;C1]to
another
state
[C0.
;C1.
].
Such
a
matrix
##.
#.
.
C.
0
M11
M12
C0
=
(15.3.2)
C.
1
M21
M22
C1
has
to
be
unitary
since
all
quantum
gates
must
operate
by
the
time
evolution
according
to
^..i
.
t
M
=
e
(15.3.3)
Figure
15.3:
Single
qubit
gates
showing
their
input
and
output
states.
Examples
of
quantum
gates,
expressed
in
their
matrix
representations
with
a
slight
abuse
the
Hadamard
gate
that
is
almost
like
a
\square
root�
gate.
of
notation,
are
.
.
^X
=
0
1
1
0
(15.3.4)
.
.
^Z
=
1
0
0
..1
(15.3.5)
.
.
^H
=
1
v
2
1
1
1
..1
(15.3.6)
^X
represents
the
NOT
gate
while
^Z
represents
one
that
ips
the
sign
of
j1.
bit.
^H
is
called
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
When
these
quantum
gates
operate
on
the
qubit
denoted
by
(15.3.1),
the
results
are
as
follows:
Xj .
=
C1j0.
+
C0j1.
(15.3.7)
^
Zj .
=
C0j0i-
C1j1.
(15.3.8)
C0C1
Hj .
=
v
(j0.
+
j1i)+
v
(j0i..j1i)
(15.3.9)
22
Moreover,
one
can
show
that
H^
2
^
=
I
(15.3.10)
When
expressed
in
terms
of
matrix
algebra,
C0
C1
X
=
(15.3.11)
C1
C0
C0
C0
Z
=
(15.3.12)
C1
..C1
C0+C1
C0
v
^2
H
=
(15.3.13)
C0..C1
C1
v
In
addition
to
one
qubit
gate,
there
are
also
two
qubit
gates.
A
very
important
one
is
the
CNOT
gate
shown
in
Figure
15.4.
Its
transformation
matrix
is
given
by
2.
1000
67
0100
^67
U
U
CNOT
=
(15.3.14)
45
0001
0010
The
above
can
also
be
implemented
with
a
unitary
transform.
Figure
15.4:
A
quantum
circuit
of
a
two-qubit
gate
representing
the
CNOT
gate.
It
takes
two
input
streams,
and
has
two
output
streams.
The
.
symbol
represents
an
exclusive
or
operation,
or
addition
modulus
2.
15.3.3
Quantum
Computing
Algorithms
As
mentioned
before,
the
most
important
aspect
of
quantum
computing
algorithm
is
quantum
parallelism.
We
will
illustrate
this
with
the
Deutsch
algorithm.
It
can
be
implemented
with
the
quantum
circuit
shown
below:
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
Figure
15.5:
The
implementation
of
the
Deutsch
algorithm
with
quantum
gates
and
circuits.
We
start
with
a
state
j 0.
=
j0,
1.
(15.3.15)
At
stage
j 1i,
we
have
x
=
^H
�
q1
=
1
v
2
(j0.
+
j1i)
(15.3.16)
y
=
^H
�
q2
=
1
v
2
(j0.
-
j1i)
(15.3.17)
Hence,
11
j 1.
=(j0.
+
j1i)(j0i..j1i)=
(j0,
0i..j0,
1.
+
j1,
0i..j1,
1i)
(15.3.18)
22
The
unitary
operator
^uf
has
no
e#ect
on
the
x
qubit,
but
performs
the
operation
y
.
f(x)
on
the
y
qubit.
The
function
f(x)
takes
input
x
which
is
either
0
or
1.
It
produces
an
output
which
is
either
constant
or
balanced,
but
the
output
is
either
0
or
1.
Hence,
according
to
the
rules
above,
j 2.
=(j0;f(0)i..j0,
1
.
f(0).
+
j1;f(1)i..j1,
1
.
f(1)i)
(15.3.19)
2
If
f(x)
is
a
constant
function,
then
f(0)
=
f(1),
and
the
above
becomes
1
j 2iconst
=(j0;f(0)i..j0,
1
.
f(0).
+
j1;f(0)i..j1,
1
.
f(0)i)
2
1
=(j0.
+
j1i)(jf(0)i..j1
.
f(0)i)
(15.3.20)
2
With
the
Hadamard
operation
on
the
upper
qubit,
we
have
1
j 3iconst
=
j0iv
(jf(0)i..j1
.
f(0)i)
(15.3.21)
2
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
If
for
the
balanced
case,
f(0)
6
=
f(1),
hence
f(1)
=
1
.
f(0).
Then
j 2ibal
=(j0;f(0)i..j0,
1
.
f(0).
+
j1,
1
.
f(0)i..j1;f(0)i)
=(j0i..j1i)(jf(0)i..j1
.
f(0)i)
(15.3.22)
After
the
H
gate
operation,
we
have
j 3ibal
=
j1iv
(jf(0)i..j1
.
f(0)i)
(15.3.23)
The
above
shows
the
prowess
of
quantum
parallelism
with
just
one
operation,
one
can
determine
if
a
function
f(x)
is
balanced
or
constant.
More
sophisticated
algorithms
exploiting
quantum
parallelism,
such
as
the
Shor's
algorithm
and
the
Grover's
algorithm,
have
been
devised.
The
Shor's
algorithm
can
perform
a
Fourier
transform
in
(log
N)2
operations
rather
than
the
classical
N
log
N
operations.
The
Grover's
algorithm
can
search
a
data
base
with
N
data
in
N
operations
rather
than
the
classical
N
operations.
Because
of
quantum
parallelism,
quantum
computer
can
also
perform
quantum
simulation
of
quantum
system
which
is
not
possible
on
classical
computers.
15.4
Quantum
Teleportation
Quantum
teleportation
is
the
idea
of
Alice
being
able
to
send
a
photon
of
unknown
state
to
Bob,
without
having
to
perform
a
measurement
on
this
photon,
nor
disturb
its
state.
We
denote
the
photon,
called
photon
1,
in
the
unknown
state
by
j i=
C0
j0i+
C1
j1i(15.4.1)
1
11
In
the
beginning,
this
photon
is
only
accessible
to
Alice.
Alice,
however,
is
accessible
to
another
photon,
called
photon
2,
of
an
entangled
Bell
state.
The
other
photon
of
the
Bell
state,
photon
3,
is
not
accessible
to
Alice
but
is
accessible
to
Bob.
We
can
de
ne
the
state
of
the
three
photons
by
the
direct
product
state
j i=
v
(C0
j0i+
C1
j1i)(j0ij1i..j1ij0i)
(15.4.2)
123
1
12323
where
the
Bell
state
is
assumed
to
be
1
..=
v
(j0i2
j1i3
..j1i2
j0i3)
(15.4.3)
23
Expanding
(15.4.2)
gives
rise
to
j i=
v
(C0
j0ij0ij1i-
C0
j0ij1ij0i
123
123
123
2
+C1
j1i1
j0i2
j1i3
-
C1
j1i1
j1i2
j0i3)
(15.4.4)
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
Figure
15.6:
A
teleportation
experiment
setup
with
photons.
Alice
makes
measurement
on
the
two
photons
accessible
to
her
using
the
Bell
state
measurement
device,
and
communicate
the
outcome
to
Bob
via
a
classical
channel.
Bob
then
performs
a
unitary
transformation
on
his
photon
to
obtain
the
input
photon
state
(from
Fox).
The
four
Bell
states
are
complete
and
orthogonal,
and
the
states
of
photon
1
and
photon
2
can
be
expanded
in
the
four
Bell
states;
namely
#+
=
v
(j0ij0i+
j1ij1i)
(15.4.5)
12
1212
#..
=
v
(j0ij0i..j1ij1i)
(15.4.6)
12
1212
=
v
(j0ij1i+
j1ij0i)
(15.4.7)
12
1212
2
1
..
=
v
(j0ij1i..j1ij0i)
(15.4.8)
12
1212
Projecting
(15.4.4)
onto
the
four
Bell
states,
and
subsequently
expanding
(15.4.4)
in
terms
of
them,
we
have
1
#
#+
j i
123
(C0
j1i-
C1
j0i)
33
12
12
#..
(C0
j1i+
C1
j0i)
33
(..C0
j0i+
C1
j1i
12
(C0
j0i+
C1
j1i)
(15.4.9)
33
12
..
In
the
above,
the
rst
two
photons,
photon
1
and
photon
2,
are
grouped
into
di#erent
Bell
states.
Moreover,
the
state
of
photon
3
resembles
the
state
of
the
original
photon
1.
The
quantum
system
now
is
in
a
linear
superposition
of
di#erent
Bell
states.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
The
Bell
state
measurement
device
projects
the
rst
two
photons
onto
a
Bell
state.
The
Bell
state
measurement
device
collapses
the
quantum
system
into
one
of
the
four
Bell
states.
For
example,
when
Alice
nds
that
the
rst
two
photons
are
in
the
Bell
state
j#+i12,
then
the
third
photon
must
be
in
the
state
j i=
C0
j1i-
C1
j0i(15.4.10)
3
33
Bob
can
apply
a
unitary
operator,
similar
to
qubit
gate
operators
described
in
the
previous
section,
to
obtain
the
original
state
of
photon
1.
The
above
does
not
violate
the
no-cloning
theorem,
because
the
original
state
of
the
photon
1
is
destroyed,
and
its
semblance
is
reproduced
in
photon
3.
15.5
Interpretation
of
Quantum
Mechanics
Quantum
mechanics
has
the
basic
tenet
that
a
quantum
state
is
in
a
linear
superposition
of
states
before
a
measurement.
A
measurement
projects
a
quantum
state
into
one
of
the
states.
The
ability
of
a
quantum
state
to
be
in
a
linear
superposition
of
states
is
surreal,
and
it
has
bothered
a
great
many
physicists.
In
the
classical
world,
a
system
can
only
be
in
one
state
or
the
other,
but
not
in
a
linear
superposition
of
states.
Only
the
world
of
ghosts
and
angels
can
we
imagine
that
an
object
is
in
a
linear
superposition
of
states.
In
the
coordinate
space,
an
electron,
represented
by
its
wavefunction,
can
be
simultaneously
at
all
locations
where
the
wavefunction
is
non-zero.
In
the
Young's
double
slit
experiment,
the
electron,
represented
by
its
wavefunction,
can
go
through
both
slits
simultaneously
like
a
wave.1
When
the
ghost-angel
state
concept
is
extended
to
classical
objects,
such
as
a
cat,
it
gives
rise
to
the
ludicrous
result:
the
story
of
the
Schrodinger
cat.
The
Schrodinger
cat
is
a
linear
superposition
of
a
dead
cat
and
a
live
cat.
To
understand
why
the
Schrodinger
cat
does
not
exist,
we
need
to
understand
the
concept
of
quantum
coherence.
Two
states
are
in
quantum
coherence
if
the
phase
relationships
between
them
are
deterministic
and
not
random.
When
this
coherence
is
lost,
the
phase
relationship
between
them
is
lost.
The
quantum
system
has
already
collapsed
into
one
of
the
two
states.
Hence,
in
practice,
a
measurement
is
not
always
necessary
before
the
quantum
system
collapses
into
one
or
more
of
the
quantum
states.
The
interaction
of
quantum
system
with
its
environment
can
cause
such
a
collapse.
From
a
statistical
physics
viewpoint,
it
is
impossible
for
a
quantum
system
to
be
completely
isolated.
Almost
all
systems
are
in
a
thermal
bath
of
the
universe
with
which
they
are
seeking
equilibrium.
Macroscopic
objects
cannot
be
in
a
pure
quantum
state
which
has
the
characteristics
of
the
ghost-angel
state.
It
is
impossible
for
the
huge
number
of
atoms
in
the
Schrodinger
cat
to
be
coherent
with
respect
to
each
other.
The
density
matrix
is
a
nice
way
of
representing
a
state
of
a
quantum
system
where
the
physics
of
quantum
coherence
surfaces
explicitly.
This
concept
is
expressed
in
the
o#-
diagonal
terms
of
the
density
matrix.
If
one
allows
time
average
or
ensemble
average2
to
the
density
matrix,
when
the
system
is
expressed
by
quantum
states
that
are
not
coherent,
the
1Or
the
apparition
of
the
ghost-angel
state.
2Processes
for
which
time
average
is
the
same
as
ensemble
average
are
known
as
ergodic
processes.
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
o#-diagonal
elements
will
average
to
zero.
The
system
is
in
a
mixed
state
rather
than
a
pure
quantum
state.
The
system
is
similar
to
the
local
hidden
variable
theory:
the
state
of
the
quantum
system
is
already
predetermined
before
the
measurement.
Another
uneasiness
about
the
philosophical
interpretation
of
quantum
mechanics
is
that
one
does
not
know
what
state
the
quantum
system
is
in
before
the
measurement.
This
has
prompted
Einstein
to
ask,\Is
the
moon
there
if
you
don't
look
at
it?�
The
uncertainty
of
the
state
applied
to
quantum
mechanics
is
only
true
for
a
linear
superposition
of
coherent
quantum
states,
which
I
term
the
ghost-angel
state.
This
state
has
not
been
found
to
exist
for
macroscopic
objects.
However,
if
one
insists
that,
\One
does
not
know
if
the
moon
is
there
before
one
looks
at
it.�
as
a
true
statement,
it
cannot
be
refuted
nor
con
rmed
by
experiments.
The
mere
act
of
an
experiment
already
means
that
we
have
\looked�
at
the
moon.
The
same
claim
goes
that
\If
I
saw
a
fallen
tree
in
the
forest,
it
did
not
necessary
follow
from
the
act
of
falling
before
I
arrived
there.�
Alternatively,
\If
we
found
dinosaur
bones,
it
did
not
necessary
mean
that
dinosaurs
roamed
the
earth
over
200
million
years
ago.�
We
believe
that
the
moon
is
there
even
if
we
do
not
look
at
it,
the
tree
fell
because
it
went
through
the
act
of
falling,
and
that
dinosaur
bones
were
found
because
they
roamed
the
earth
200
million
years
ago,
because
we
believe
in
the
realism
of
the
world
we
live
in.
This
realism
cannot
be
proved
but
is
generally
accepted
by
those
who
live
in
this
world.
Hence,
it
is
this
surreal
interpretation
of
quantum
mechanics
that
causes
the
uneasiness
among
many
physicists.
But
the
interpretation
of
quantum
mechanics
is
slightly
better
than
the
above:
a
quantum
state
is
in
a
linear
superposition
of
states,
the
precise
one
of
which
we
are
not
sure
of
until
a
measurement
is
performed.
However,
this
surrealism
of
this
ghost-angel
state
exists
in
our
minds
in
fairy
tales
and
ghost
stories
of
many
cultures.
Experimental
e#ort
has
agreed
with
the
surreal
interpretation
of
quantum
mechanics
in
terms
of
the
Bell's
theorem,
that
will
be
discussed.
The
ghost-angel
state
of
a
quantum
system
is
what
enriches
the
information
in
it.
However,
for
a
quantum
system
to
be
in
such
a
state,
the
linear
superposition
of
states
must
be
coherent
with
each
other.
Quantum
coherence
is
the
largest
stumbling
block
to
the
construction
of
quantum
computers;
however,
rapid
advances
are
being
made,
and
one
day,
it
can
be
a
reality.
15.6
EPR
Paradox
The
interpretation
of
quantum
mechanics
went
through
di#cult
times.
The
fact
that
a
particle
can
be
in
a
superposition
of
many
states
before
a
quantum
measurement,
and
the
probabilistic
interpretation
of
a
quantum
measurement
behooves
the
challenge
by
many
great
physicists,
especially
Einstein.
The
most
severe
challenge
of
quantum
mechanics
and
its
interpretation
comes
from
the
EPR
(Einstein,
Podolsky
and
Rosen)
paradox.
To
describe
it
simply,
we
imagine
a
pi
meson
that
decays
into
an
electron-positron
pair:
#o
.
e
-
+
+
e
(15.6.1)
The
pi
meson
originally
has
spin
zero.
So
for
conservation
of
angular
momentum,
the
electron-
positron
pair
will
have
opposite
spins:
spin
up
and
spin
down.
Since
the
total
angular
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
momentum
is
zero,
they
are
in
the
singlet
state
which
has
total
spin
of
zero,
or
j .
=
v
(j"..#+.
-
j#.."+i)
(15.6.2)
The
electron-positron
pair
is
in
the
linear
superposition
of
two
states,
but
the
electron
and
positron
are
ying
in
opposite
directions.
According
to
the
interpretation
of
quantum
mechanics,
one
does
not
know
the
spin
state
of
the
electron
nor
the
positron
before
the
measurement.
After
one
measures
the
spin
state
of,
say
the
electron,
irrespective
of
how
far
the
positron
is
away
from
the
electron,
we
immediately
know
the
spin
state
of
the
positron
according
to
the
above
equation.
The
spins
of
the
two
particles
are
always
opposite
to
each
other.
This
notion
is
unpalatable
to
many
physicists,
and
hence,
is
called
\spooky
action
at
a
distance�
by
Einstein.
Information
cannot
travel
faster
than
the
speed
of
light.
How
could
the
state
of
one
particle
be
immediately
determined
after
a
measurement
is
made
at
another
particle
far
away?
This
paradox
attempts
to
prove
that
quantum
mechanics
is
incomplete
by
reductio
ad
absurdum.
15.7
Bell's
Theorem3
Quantum
measurements
are
known
to
be
random,
and
the
data
can
only
be
interpreted
probabilistically.
If
one
were
to
measure
the
spin
of
one
of
the
particle,
it
is
equally
likely
to
be
in
the
spin
up
or
spin
down
state
randomly
according
to
(15.6.2).
In
the
hidden
variable
theory,
it
is
suggested
that
the
outcome
of
the
experiment
is
already
predetermined
even
before
the
measurement.
The
outcome
is
determined
by
a
hidden
random
variable
#.
It
is
the
randomness
of
this
variable
that
gives
rise
to
the
randomness
of
the
outcome
in
quantum
measurements.
Many
hidden
variable
theories
were
proposed
shortly
after
the
EPR
paradox
was
published.
In
1964,
J.
S.
Bell,
in
the
spirit
of
proving
the
correctness
of
the
hidden
variable
theory,
came
up
with
an
inequality
that
showed
the
incompatibility
of
quantum
mechanics
and
the
hidden
variable
theory.
If
hidden
variable
theory
is
correct,
the
inequality
will
be
satis
ed,
but
if
quantum
mechanics
is
correct,
the
inequality
is
violated.
This
is
known
as
Bell's
theorem.
We
can
discuss
the
derivation
of
the
Bell's
theorem
in
the
context
of
the
two-photon
experiment,
since
the
experiment
that
veri
es
the
theorem
has
been
done
using
photons.
The
actual
experiment
is
quite
complex,
but
we
will
reduce
it
to
a
simpli
ed
case.
The
simpli
ed
experiment
involves
a
photon
source
that
produces
an
entangled
photon
pair,
each
of
which
is
traveling
in
opposite
directions.
The
photon
pair
is
in
one
of
the
Bell
state,
say
the
EPR
pair:
j .
=
v
(jV1V2.
+
jH1H2i)
(15.7.1)
In
the
above
state,
if
one
of
the
photons
is
measured
to
be
V
(vertical)
polarized,
the
other
photon
must
be
V
polarized.
However,
if
one
photon
is
measured
to
be
H
(horizontal)
polarized,
the
other
photon
must
be
H
polarized.
We
will
detect
the
photon
state
with
a
3This
section
is
written
with
important
input
from
Y.
H.
Lo
and
Q.
Dai.
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
simple
polarizer.
In
the
above
state,
which
is
a
linear
superposition
of
two
states,
the
photons
are
equally
likely
to
be
found
in
the
rst
state,
jV1V2i,
or
the
second
state,
jH1H2i.
The
polarizer
will
detect
an
H
or
a
V
polarization
with
equal
likelihood,
but
the
moment
that
one
photon
is
determined
to
be
H
polarized,
the
other
photon
is
immediately
know
to
be
H
polarized,
and
vice
versa.
This
is
the
\spookiness�
of
quantum
interpretation.
Imagine
an
atomic
source
that
generates
two
photons
propagating
in
opposite
directions.
The
atom
initially
has
zero
angular
momentum,
so
that
the
two
photons
are
either
both
horizontally
polarized
or
both
vertically
polarized.
Hence,
the
photon
can
be
described
in
one
of
the
Bell
states
or
an
entangled
state
as
shown
in
(15.7.1).
Figure
15.7:
Experimental
veri
cation
of
Bell's
theorem
15.7.1
Prediction
by
Quantum
Mechanics
Photon
1
is
measured
with
a
polarizer
P1
with
vertical
polarization
pointing
in
the
a
direction.
If
P1
measures
a
V
polarization,
we
set
A(a)=1,
and
if
P1
measures
an
H
polarization,
we
set
A(a)=
..1.
Here,
A(a)
denotes
the
measurement
outcome,
and
it
is
completely
random
according
to
quantum
mechanics.
Similarly,
polarizer
P2
has
its
vertical
polarization
oriented
in
the
b
direction.
When
it
measures
a
V
polarization,
we
set
B(b)
=
1,
and
when
it
measures
an
H
polarization,
it
sets
B(b)=
..1.
Again,
B(b)
is
completely
random.
In
the
above,
we
set
A
and
B
to
be
functions
of
a
and
b
respectively,
as
the
experimental
outcomes
are
expected
to
be
functions
of
the
orientation
of
the
polarizers.
If
a
=
b,
we
expect
that
hA(a)B(b).
=
E
(a,
b)=
AB
=
1
(15.7.2)
If
a?b,
if
P1
measures
a
V
polarization,
P2
will
measure
a
H
polarization,
we
expect
that
hA(a)B(b).
=
E
(a,
b)=
AB
=
..1
(15.7.3)
Even
though
A
and
B
are
random,
their
products
are
deterministic
in
the
above
two
cases.
An
interesting
case
ensues
if
a
and
b
are
at
an
incline
with
respect
to
each
other.
In
this
case,
we
know
by
quantum
mechanics
that
jV
ia
=
cos
#jV
ib
-
sin
#jHib
(15.7.4)
jHia
=
sin
#jV
ib
+
cos
#jHib
(15.7.5)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Figure
15.8:
The
case
when
the
two
polarizers
are
at
an
incline
with
respect
to
each
other
for
proving
the
Bell's
theorem.
If
P1
measures
an
outcome
with
A(a)
=
1,
then
the
photon
that
propagates
to
P2
must
be
polarized
in
the
a
direction.
However,
according
to
(15.7.4),
for
P2,
such
a
photon
has
the
probability
of
cos2
.
being
detected
in
the
V
polarization,
and
the
probability
of
sin2
.
being
detected
in
the
H
polarization.
Hence,
the
expectation
value
of
B,
or
hB.
=
cos2
.
-
sin2
#.
If
P1
nds
that
A
=
..1,
by
similar
arguments,
the
expectation
value
of
B
is
sin2
.
..cos2
#.
Then
E(a,
b)=
hA(a)B(b).
=
cos
2
.
-
sin2
.
=
cos(2#)
(15.7.6)
Notice
that
the
above
reduces
to
the
special
cases
of:
(i)
when
the
polarizers
P1
and
P2
are
aligned,
namely
when
.
=0#,
as
in
(15.7.2),
and
(ii)
when
the
polarizers
are
perpendicular
to
each
other,
with
.
=
90#,
as
in
(15.7.3).
15.7.2
Prediction
by
Hidden
Variable
Theory
In
the
hidden
variable
theory
derivation,
a
particle
is
assumed
to
be
already
in
a
polarization
state
even
before
a
measurement.
A
and
B
are
random,
but
they
are
predetermined
by
a
hidden
random
variable
#.
We
let
A(a;#)=
#1
(15.7.7)
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
B(b;#)=
#1
(15.7.8)
Here,
A
and
B
hence
ip-op
between
#1
entirely
due
to
randomness
of
the
variable
#.
This
theory
predicts
the
randomness
of
quantum
mechanics
experiments
nicely.
The
expectation
value
of
AB
then
is
E(a,
b)=
hAB.
=
#(#)A(a;#)B(b;#)d.
(15.7.9)
where
#(#)
is
the
probability
distribution
of
the
random
variable
#.
The
above
is
a
very
general
representation
of
the
hidden
variable
theory
where
we
have
not
explicitly
stated
the
functions
#(#),
A(a;#)
nor
B(b;#).
If
a
=
b,
then
A(a;#)=
B(a;#)
(15.7.10)
and
the
above
becomes
E(a,
a)=
#(#)A2(a;#)d.
=
#(#)d.
=
1
(15.7.11)
Same
as
we
would
have
found
in
(15.7.2).
If
a?b,
then
A(a;#)=
..B(b;#)
(15.7.12)
and
(15.7.9)
becomes
E(a,
b)=
-
#(#)A2(a;#)d.
=
#(#)d.
=
..1
(15.7.13)
as
would
have
been
found
in
(15.7.3).
Hence,
hidden
variable
theory
is
in
good
agreement
with
quantum
mechanics
interpretation
of
(15.7.2)
and
(15.7.3).
So
far,
everything
is
ne
and
dainty
until
when
a
and
b
do
not
belong
to
any
of
the
above
category,
but
in
general
are
inclined
with
respect
to
each
other.
If
a
6
=
b
in
general,
then
the
hidden
variable
generates
random
A
and
B
in
such
a
manner
that
E(a,
b)
=
1
(15.7.14)
Consequently,
we
have
.
E(a,
b)
-
E(a,
b0)
=
[A(a,
#)B(b,
#)
-
A(a,
#)B(b0,
#)]#(#)d.
(15.7.15)
The
above
can
be
rewritten
as
E(a,
b)
-
E(a,
b0)=
A(a;#)B(b;#)[1
�
A(a
0;#)B(b0;#)]#(#)d.
-
A(a;#)B(b0;#)[1
�
A(a
0;#)B(b0;#)]#(#)d.
(15.7.16)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
We
have
just
added
and
subtracted
identical
terms
in
the
above.
After
using
the
triangular
inequality
jE(a,
b)
-
E(a,
b0)j=
jA(a;#)B(b;#)jj1
�
A(a
0;#)B(b0;#)j#(#)d.
+
jA(a;#)B(b0;#)jj1
�
A(a
0;#)B(b;#)j#(#)d.
(15.7.17)
Using
the
fact
that
jAB|
=
1,
1
�
AB
=
0
(15.7.18)
we
have
.
jE(a,
b)
-
E(a,
b0)|
=
[1
�
A(a
0,
#)B(b0,
#)]#(#)d.
+
[1
�
A(a
0;#)B(b;#)]#(#)d.
(15.7.19)
The
above
is
the
same
as
jE(a,
b)
-
E(a,
b0)j=
2
�
[E(a
,
b0)+
E(a
,
b)]
(15.7.20)
It
is
of
the
form
jXj=
2
�
Y
(15.7.21)
which
implies
that
jXj�
Y
=
2
(15.7.22)
or
jX
+
Y
j#jX|
+
jY
j=
2
(15.7.23)
Consequently,
we
have
jE(a,
b)
-
E(a,
b0)+
E(a
,
b0)+
E(a
,
b)j=
2
(15.7.24)
which
is
the
Clauser-Horne-Shimony-Holt
(CHSH)
inequality.
In
(15.7.20),
if
a.
=
b.
=
c,
then
(15.7.20)
becomes
jE(a,
b)
-
E(a,
c)j=
2
�
[E(c,
c)+
E(b,
c)]
(15.7.25)
From
(15.7.11),
E(c,
c)
=
1.
We
pick
the
smaller
of
the
right-hand
side
of
(15.7.25)
and
arrive
at
jE(a,
b)
-
E(a,
c)j=
1
-
E(b,
c)
(15.7.26)
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
Figure
15.9:
The
case
for
a,
b,
and
c
where
the
quantum
mechanics
prediction
violates
the
Bell's
inequality.
The
above
is
the
Bell's
inequality.
It
can
be
easily
shown
that
it
cannot
be
satis
ed
by
quantum
mechanics
that
predicts
(15.7.6).
Say
if
we
pick
a,
b,
and
c
as
shown
in
the
Figure
15.9,
then
according
to
quantum
mechanics
or
(15.7.6),
E(a,
b)
=
cos(90#)
=
0
(15.7.27)
E(a,
c)
=
cos(45#)
=
1
v
2
(15.7.28)
E(b,
c)
=
cos(45#)
=
1
v
2
(15.7.29)
Then
in
(15.7.26),
we
have
0
-
=0:707
6
=
1
-
=0:293
(15.7.30)
In
experimental
tests
of
Bell's
theorem,
quantum
mechanics
triumphs
over
hidden
variable
theory
so
far.4
Hence,
the
spookiness
of
ghost-angel
states
will
prevail
in
quantum
mechanics.
15.8
A
Final
Word
on
Quantum
Parallelism
Quantum
interpretation
gives
rise
to
the
spookiness
of
quantum
mechanics,
in
a
way
giving
it
the
capability
that
empowers
ghosts
and
angels.
Quantum
parallelism
is
such
an
empowerment.
It
reminds
me
of
a
novel
that
I
have
read
when
I
was
young
on
the
Monkey
King.
This
4see
a
paper
by
A.
Aspect,
1982.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Monkey
King
is
of
Indian
origin,
but
has
permeated
Chinese
culture
to
take
on
a
di#erent
persona.
According
to
the
story
in
The
Journey
to
the
West,
this
Monkey
King
had
unusual
capabilities.
One
of
them
was
that
he
could
pull
a
strand
of
hair
from
his
body,
and
with
a
puff
of
air,
he
could
turn
it
into
many
duplicates
of
himself.
He
could
then
ght
his
enemies
from
all
angles
and
all
sides.
He
thus
made
himself
invincible.
He
was
arrogant,
mischievous,
and
wreaked
havoc
in
the
Heavenly
Palace
where
the
other
gods
lived.
Finally,
he
could
only
be
tamed
and
subdued
by
Lord
Buddha,
summoning
him
to
accompany
and
protect
the
monk
Xuan
Zang
in
his
treacherous
journey
to
collect
the
Buddhist
Sutra
from
the
West
(in
this
case
India).
Oh
Lord,
if
we
were
to
empower
ourselves
with
the
capabilities
of
ghosts
and
angels,
who
is
there
to
curb
our
power!
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
Figure
15.10:
The
Monkey
King
sending
replicas
of
himself
against
his
enemy,
defeating
everyone
in
his
path.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Appendix
A
Generators
of
Translator
and
Rotation
A.1
In
nitesimal
Translation
From
Taylor
series
expansion,
we
have
f(x
+
a)=
f(x)+
af(x)+
f2(x)+
##�
2!
2
d2
da
=
1+
a
++
##�
f(x)
dx
2!
dx2
=
e
dx
f(x)
(A.1.1)
The
exponential
to
an
operator
is
interpreted
as
a
Taylor
series
when
it
needs
to
be
evaluated.
The
above
can
be
written
with
a
momentum
operator
(assuming
that
.
=
1)
ia^
f(x
+
a)=
e
pf(x)
(A.1.2)
or
in
Dirac
notation
ia^
jfa.
=
e
pjf.
(A.1.3)
where
jfa.
is
the
state
vector
representation
of
the
function
f(x
+
a).
If
a
Hamiltonian
is
translational
invariant,
it
will
commute
with
the
translation
operator,
namely
^
iap^^
Heiap^jf.
=
eHjf.
(A.1.4)
or
h.
iap^
e
;H
=
0
(A.1.5)
For
example,
if
the
Hamiltonian
is
such
that
..1
d2=dx2,
then
it
is
quite
clear
that
the
left-hand
2
side
of
(A.1.4)
is
1
d2
1
d2
1
f00(x
+
a)
ia^
-
e
pf(x)=
-
f(x
+
a)=
-
(A.1.6)
2
dx2
2
dx2
2
191
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
The
right-hand
side
of
(A.1.4)
is
iap^1
d2
iap^1
f00(x)
1
f00(x
+
a)
e
-
f(x)=
e
-
=
-
(A.1.7)
2
dx2
22
which
is
the
same
as
the
left-hand
side.
ia^
By
assuming
that
ep
�
1+
iap^+
##�
,
the
above
also
means
that
^^
Hp^=
p^H,
[H,
^p^]
=
0
(A.1.8)
This
means
that
^p
is
a
constant
of
motion
as
shown
in
Section
5.8,
or
dhp^.
=
0
(A.1.9)
dt
In
other
words,
momentum
is
conserved
in
a
system
where
the
Hamiltonian
is
translational
invariant.
A.2
In
nitesimal
Rotation
Similarly,
the
Lz
operator
is
..i
.
which
is
a
generator
of
rotation,1
@f
a
d
i#L^
z
f(#)
f(f
+
#)=
e
df
f(#)=
e
(A.2.1)
Going
through
the
derivation
as
we
have
before,
for
a
Hamiltonian
that
is
rotationally
sym
i#L^
z
metric
about
the
z
axis,
then
it
commutes
with
e.
In
this
case
i#L^
z
^
[e
;H]
=
0
(A.2.2)
or
Taylor
series
expanding
the
above,
we
derive
that
[L^
z;H^
]
=
0
(A.2.3)
Hence,
the
^z
component
of
the
angular
momentum
is
conserved
for
a
system
that
is
rotation-
ally
symmetric
about
the
z
axis.
The
above
has
been
motivated
by
L^
z
that
follows
from
the
orbital
angular
momentum,
whose
form
has
been
motivated
by
the
classical
angular
momentum.
What
if
the
angular
momentum
has
no
classical
analogue
like
the
spin
angular
momentum?
Or
the
state
vector
may
not
be
written
using
wavefunctions
at
all.
In
this
case,
we
can
postulate
a
generalized
generator
of
rotation
of
the
form
ia
^
e
Jz
jj.
(A.2.4)
The
above
will
take
the
angular
momentum
state
jj.
and
generate
rotated
state
about
the
z
axis.
We
postulate
the
above
form
for
three
reasons:
1Assume
again
that
.
=
1.
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
193
1.
The
generator
of
rotation
for
orbital
angular
momentum
is
already
of
this
form.
It
must
be
the
special
case
of
the
above
form.
2.
If
the
above
generator
commutes
with
the
Hamiltonian
with
similar
rotational
symmetry,
this
component
of
angular
momentum
will
be
conserved.
3.
The
rotation
will
cause
the
expectation
value
of
the
angular
momentum
vector,
an
observable,
to
rotate
according
to
a
coordinate
rotation
about
the
z
axis.
^
It
is
easy
to
see
that
the
expectation
value
of
the
Jz
operator
remains
unchanged
under
this
rotation.
We
can
easily
show
that
..i#J^z
^ia
^
hjjeJze
Jz
jj.
=
hjjJ^zjj.
(A.2.5)
^
In
the
above,
functions
of
operator
Jz
commute
with
each
other,
a
fact
that
can
be
easily
i#J^z
proved
by
expanding
the
functions
as
a
power
series.
The
conjugate
transpose
of
eis
^
e..i#J^z
since
Jz
is
Hermitian
because
it
represents
an
observable.
Hence,
the
last
equality
in
(A.2.5)
follows.
A.3
Derivation
of
Commutation
Relations
In
general,
we
can
de
ne
the
angular
momentum
operator
to
be
J
=
iJ^x
+
jJ^y
+
kJ^z
(A.3.1)
The
above
is
an
observable
so
are
the
components
of
the
operator
in
the
x,
y,
z
directions.
Hence,
the
expectation
value
of
the
above
with
respect
to
the
state
jj.
gives
rise
to
hJ^
.
=
ihJ^x.
+
jhJ^y.
+
khJ^z.
=
iJx
+
jJy
+
kJz
=
J
(A.3.2)
where
we
denote
the
expectation
values
of
J^i
with
scalar
number
Ji,
and
that
of
J^
with
J.
We
will
test
point
3
above
with
respect
to
this
vector
J.
This
vector
will
have
to
rotate
according
to
coordinate
rotation
as
the
state
vector
is
rotated
according
to
(A.2.4).
i#J^z
If
eis
a
generator
of
rotation
about
the
z
axis,
it
will
leave
Jz
unchanged
as
shown
above.
But
it
will
not
leave
Jx
and
Jy
components
unchanged.
Now,
we
can
nd
the
expec^
tation
value
of
Jx
under
rotation
about
z
axis,
or
that
..i#J^z
ia
^
Jx
=
hjjJ^xjji;J.
=
hjjeJ^xe
Jz
jj.
(A.3.3)
Before
rotation,
this
would
have
represented
the
expectation
values
of
the
x
component
of
J,
the
angular
momentum.
After
rotation,
J
=
i0Jx
.
+
j0Jy
.
+
kJz
(A.3.4)
and
J.
will
contain
both
the
x
and
y
component
of
J.
When
we
rotate
the
state
vector
by
angle
#,
the
expectation
value
of
the
vector
J
will
rotate
by
a
in
the
same
direction.
But
from
the
Figure
A.1,
it
is
clear
that
J.
=
Jx
cos
a
+
Jy
sin
a
(A.3.5)
x
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
The
equivalence
of
rotations
in
(A.3.3)
and
(A.3.5)
can
be
proved
by
lengthy
algebra.
To
simplify
the
algebra,
we
can
show
the
equivalence
for
in
nitesimal
rotation.
To
this
end,
we
assume
that
a
is
small
so
that
we
keep
only
the
rst
two
terms
of
the
Taylor
expansion
for
i#J^z
i#J^z
eor
e�
1+
i#J^z.
Then,
J.
^^
=
hj|
^-
ia
^Jx
+
ia
^##jj.
(A.3.6)
x
Jx
Jz
JxJz
+
�
For
small
#,
(A.3.5)
becomes
J.
#
=
Jx
+
#Jy
(A.3.7)
But
(A.3.6)
can
be
written
as
J.
^^
=
hjjJ^xjji-
i#hjjJ^zJx
-
J^xJzjj.
(A.3.8)
Figure
A.1:
Coordinate
rotation
of
the
xy
plane
about
the
z
axis
by
angle
#.
Comparing
(A.3.7)
and
(A.3.8),
we
have
J^zJ^x
-
J^xJ^z
=
iJ^y
(A.3.9)
We
can
let
.
6
1
to
arrive
back
at
the
previously
postulated
commutator
relations.
=
The
above
is
arrived
at
using
only
rotational
symmetry
argument
that
the
angular
momentum
operator
is
a
generator
of
rotation.
The
other
commutation
relations
for
angular
operators
can
be
derived
by
similar
arguments.
In
general,
for
all
operators
that
represent
angular
momentum,
we
have
^^^^^^
Jx;Jy
=
i~J^z;Jy;Jz
=
i~J^x;Jz;Jx
=
i~J^y
(A.3.10)
From
the
above,
we
can
de
ne
raising
and
lowering
operators
and
use
the
ladder
approach
to
derive
the
properties
of
the
eigenstates
of
angular
momentum
operators.
Appendix
B
Quantum
Statistical
Mechanics
B.1
Introduction
We
would
like
to
derive
Maxwell-Boltzmann,
Fermi-Dirac,
and
Bose-Einstein
distributions.
It
is
based
on
statistical
mechanics
that
assumes
that
all
identical
energy
levels
have
equal
likelihood
of
being
occupied.
Only
the
counting
is
based
on
quantum
mechanics.
We
consider
a
quantum
system
with
energy
levels
E1,
E2,
E3,
##�
.
Each
level
Ei
could
have
degeneracy
of
di,
i
=
1,
2,
3,
##�
,
and
is
lled
by
Ni,
i
=
1,
2,
3,
##�
particles.
When
the
system
is
coupled
to
its
environment,
energy
will
be
exchanged
with
its
environment
via
collision,
vibration,
and
radiation.
At
thermal
equilibrium,
there
is
no
net
energy
owing
into
and
out
of
the
system.
We
expect
that
E
=
EnNn
(B.1.1)
n=1
to
be
a
constant
due
to
energy
conservation.
Also
we
expect
the
number
of
particles
to
remain
constant,
or
that
N
=
1.
n=1
Nn
(B.1.2)
due
to
particle
conservation.
The
particles
will
acquire
energy
from
their
environment
due
to
energy
exchange,
and
distribute
themselves
across
the
energy
levels
subject
to
the
above
constraints,
but
also
according
to
the
availability
of
energy
levels.
Energy
levels
with
higher
degeneracies
are
more
likely
to
be
lled.
We
will
consider
three
di#erent
cases:
(i)
when
the
particles
are
distinguishable,
(ii)
when
they
are
identical
fermions,
and
(iii)
when
they
are
identical
bosons.
B.1.1
Distinguishable
Particles
We
will
nd
the
function
Q(N1;N2;N3,
##�
)
whose
value
equals
the
number
of
ways
that
there
are
N1
particles
in
E1,
N2
particles
in
E2,
N3
particles
in
E3
and
so
on.
In
order
to
ll
195
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
energy
level
E1
with
N1
particles,
the
number
of
ways
is
NN!
=
(B.1.3)
N1
N1!(N
-
N1)!
If
E1
has
degeneracy
d1,
all
the
degenerate
levels
are
equally
likely
to
be
lled.
Then
there
are
dN1
ways
that
the
N1
particles
can
go
into
E1
level.
Hence,
the
number
of
ways
that
E1
can
be
lled
is
N!dN1
QE1
=
(B.1.4)
N1!(N
-
N1)!
The
number
of
ways
that
E2
can
be
lled
is
(N
-
N1)!dN2
QE2
=
(B.1.5)
N2!(N
-
N1
-
N2)!
Then
the
total
number
of
ways
Q(N1;N2;N3,
##�
)=
QE1
QE2
QE3
##�
N!dN1
(N
-
N1)!dN2
(N
-
N1
-
N2)!dN3
12
3
=
##�
N1!(N
-
N1)!
N2!(N
-
N1
-
N2)!
N3!(N
-
N1
-
N2
-
N3)!
dN1
dN2
dN3
.
dNn
##�
123
n
=
N!=
N!
(B.1.6)
N1!N2!N3!
##�
Nn!
n=1
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
197
Notice
that
the
above
is
independent
of
the
order
in
which
the
levels
are
lled,
as
expected.
The
above
can
also
be
interpreted
in
a
di#erent
light:
There
are
dNn
ways
that
Nn
particles
can
t
into
the
En
energy
level.
But
order
is
unimportant
and
a
division
by
Nn!
is
necessary.
But
there
are
N!
ways
that
these
distinguishable
particles
can
be
selected
in
an
ordered
way,
and
hence,
a
prefactor
of
N!
is
needed
in
the
above.
B.1.2
Identical
Fermions
Due
to
Pauli's
exclusion
principle,
each
energy
level
can
admit
only
one
particle.
In
this
case,
the
number
of
ways
energy
En
can
be
lled
is
dn!
QEn
=
;dn
=
Nn
(B.1.7)
Nn!(dn
-
Nn)!
(The
above
has
value
1
when
dn
=
1.)
The
total
number
of
ways
is
then
1dn!
Q
(N1;N2;N3,
:::)
=
(B.1.8)
n=1
Nn!(dn
-
Nn)!
B.1.3
Identical
Bosons
For
bosons,
repetition
for
lling
a
given
state
is
allowed,
but
the
particles
are
indistinguishable
from
each
other.
Then
when
Nn
particles
are
picked
to
ll
the
dn
degenerate
En
levels,
the
rst
particle
from
Nn
particles
has
dn
slots
to
ll
in,
while
the
second
particle
has
dn
+
1
slots
to
ll
in,
and
the
third
particle
has
dn
+
2
slots
to
ll
in
and
so
on,
since
repetition
is
allowed.
That
is
the
new
particle
can
take
the
position
of
the
old
particle
as
well.
So
the
number
of
ways
that
En
with
dn
degeneracy
can
be
lled
is
dn
(dn
+
1)(dn
+
2)
::.
(dn
+
Nn
-
1)
QEn
=
(B.1.9)
Nn!
(Nn
+
dn
-
1)!
=
(B.1.10)
Nn!(dn
-
1)!
Therefore
1(Nn
+
dn
-
1)!
Q
(N1;N2;N3,
:::)
=
(B.1.11)
n=1
Nn!(dn
-
1)!
Unlike
the
distinguishable
particle
case,
no
prefactor
of
N!
is
needed
for
the
identical
particle
case,
since
the
order
with
which
they
are
selected
is
unimportant.
B.2
Most
Probable
Con
guration
A
way
of
lling
the
energy
levels
fE1;E2;E3,
:::}
with
fN1;N2;N3,
:::}
is
called
a
con
guration.
The
most
likely
con
guration
to
be
lled
is
the
one
with
the
largest
Q
(N1;N2;N3,
:::).
At
statistical
equilibrium,
the
system
will
gravitate
toward
this
con
guration.
Hence,
to
nd
this
con
guration,
we
need
to
maximize
Q
with
respect
to
di#erent
fN1;N2;N3,
:::}
subject
to
the
energy
conservation
constraint
(B:1:1)
and
particle
conservation
constraint
(B:1:2).
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
We
use
the
Lagrange
multiplier
technique
to
nd
the
optimal
Q
subject
to
constraints
(B:1:1)
and
(B:1:2).
We
de
ne
a
function
G
=
ln
Q
+
#N
-
Nn
+
E
-
NnEn
(B.2.1)
n=1
n=1
The
optimal
Q
value
is
obtained
by
solving
@G
@G
@G
=0;n
=1,
2,
3,
##�
,
=0,
=
0
(B.2.2)
@Nn
@a
@�
In
this
case,
1
B.2.1DistinguishableParticles
G
=
ln
N!+
[Nn
ln
dn
-
ln
N!]
(B.2.3)
n=1
+
#N
-
Nn
+
E
-
NnEn
(B.2.4)
n=1
n=1
We
use
Stirling's
formula
that
ln
(z!)
�
z
ln
z
-
z
(B.2.5)
Consequently,
1.
G
=[Nn
ln
dn
-
Nn
ln
Nn
+
Nn
-
#Nn
-
EnNn]
(B.2.6)
n=1
+
ln
N!+
#N
+
E
(B.2.7)
From
the
above
@G
=
ln
dn
-
ln
Nn
-
a
-
En
=
0
(B.2.8)
@Nn
As
a
result,
we
have
..(#+
En)
Nn
=
dne
(B.2.9)
The
above
is
the
precursor
to
the
Maxwell-Boltzmann
distribution
from
rst
principles.
B.2.2
Identical
Fermions
In
this
case
G
=
[ln(d.
)
-
ln(N.
)
-
ln((dn
-
Nn)!)]
(B.2.10)
nn
n=1
+
#N
-
Nn
+
E
-
NnEn
(B.2.11)
n=1
n=1
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
After
applying
Stirling's
formula
to
Nn
dependent
terms,
we
have
1.
G
=
[ln
dn!
-
Nn
ln
Nn
+
Nn
-
(dn
-
Nn)
ln(dn
-
Nn)+(dn
-
Nn)
-
#Nn
-
NnEn]
n=1
(B.2.12)
+
#N
+
E
(B.2.13)
From
the
above,
@G
=
-
ln
Nn
+
ln(dn
-
Nn)
-
a
-
En
=
0
(B.2.14)
@Nn
or
dn
Nn
=
(B.2.15)
1+
e#+
En
In
the
above
derivation,
we
have
assumed
that
dn
is
large
so
that
Nn
is
large
since
Nn
=
dn
in
(B.1.7).
The
above
is
the
precursor
to
the
Fermi-Dirac
distribution.
B.2.3
Identical
Bosons
In
this
case
1.
G
=
[ln((Nn
+
dn
-
1)!)
-
ln(Nn!)
-
ln((dn
-
1)!)]
(B.2.16)
n=1
1X1.
+
#N
-
Nn
+
E
-
NnEn
(B.2.17)
n=1
n=1
With
Stirling's
approximation
to
the
Nn
dependent
terms,
1.
G
=
[(Nn
+
dn
-
1)
ln(Nn
+
dn
-
1)
-
(Nn
+
dn
-
1)
-
Nn
ln
Nn
+
Nn
(B.2.18)
n=1
-
ln((dn
-
1)!)
-
#Nn
-
NnEn]+
#N
+
E
(B.2.19)
Then
@G
=
ln(Nn
+
dn
-
1)
-
ln(Nn)
-
a
-
En
=
0
(B.2.20)
@Nn
yielding
dn
-
1
dn
Nn
=
.
(B.2.21)
e#+
En
e#+
En
-
1
-
1
where
we
assume
that
dn
.
1.
The
above
is
the
precursor
to
the
Bose-Einstein
distribution.
200
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
B.3
The
Meaning
of
a
and
�
We
will
apply
the
above
to
a
simple
quantum
system
in
order
to
infer
what
a
and
�
should
be.
We
consider
N
electrons
inside
a
bulk
material
describable
by
a
single
electron
in
an
e#ective
mass
approximation.
In
such
a
case,
the
kinetic
energy
of
the
electron
is
described
by
~2k2
Ek
=
(B.3.1)
2m
If
we
assume
periodic
boundary
conditions
on
a
box
of
lengths
Lx,
Ly,
and
Lz,
then
##2
.
###2
2nxp
2nyp
2nzp
k2
=++
t
(B.3.2)
Lx
Ly
Lz
In
the
k
space,
there
is
a
state
associated
with
a
unit
box
of
volume
(2#)3
8#3
#Vk
=
=
(B.3.3)
LxLyLz
V
where
V
is
the
volume
of
the
box
of
bulk
material.
In
k
space,
in
a
spherical
shell
of
thickness
#k,
the
number
of
states
in
the
neighborhood
of
k
is
4#k2#kV
dk
==
k2#k
(B.3.4)
#Vk
2#2
Then
the
total
number
of
particles
is,
using
(B.2.9)
for
Maxwell-Boltzmann,
..(#+
Ek)
..#
N
=
dke
=
V
e
k2#ke..
Ek
2p
kk
.
1
V
k2
..a
..
~2
=
ee
=(2m)k2dk
(B.3.5)
2#2
0
By
using
the
fact
that
.
8
.
8
.
v
dd
1
##
..Ak2
..Ak2
A-
3
I1
=
ek2dk
=
-
e
dk
=
-
=
(B.3.6)
dA
dA
2
A
4
00
the
above
integrates
to
##3
N
=
Ve..a
(B.3.7)
2#
~2
Similarly,
the
total
E
is
given
by
..(#+
Ek)
E
=
EkNk
=
Ekdke,
kk
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
After
using
(B.3.1)
and
(B.3.4),
we
have
.
1
V
~2
k2
..a
..
~2
E
=
ee
=2mk4dk
4#2m
0
##3
3Vm
2
3N
=
e
..a
=
(B.3.8)
2�
2#
~2
2�
where
we
have
made
use
of
.
8
v
d
3
#
..Ak2
A-
5
I2
=
ek4dk
=
-
I1
=
2
(B.3.9)
dA
8
and
(B.3.7)
in
getting
the
last
equality.
From
the
equipartition
theorem
of
energy
from
statistical
mechanics
we
know
that
E
3
=
kBT
(B.3.10)
N
2
Hence,
we
conclude
that
�
=
(B.3.11)
kBT
It
is
customary
to
write
#(T
)
a
=
..(B.3.12)
kBT
so
that
for
Maxwell-Boltzmann
distribution,
..(En..#)=(kBT
)
Nn
=
dne
(B.3.13)
where
#(T
)
is
the
chemical
potential.
When
normalized
with
respect
to
degeneracy,
we
have
..(En..#)=(kB
T
)
nmb
=
e,
Maxwell-Boltzmann
(B.3.14)
Fermi-Dirac
and
Bose-Einstein
distribution
become
Maxwell-Boltzmann
when
(
En
+
#)
.
1.
So
they
have
the
same
a
and
.
Therefore,
nfd
=
,
Fermi-Dirac
(B.3.15)
e(En
..#)=(kBT
)
+1
nbe
=
,
Bose-Einstein
(B.3.16)
e(En..#)=(kBT
)
-
1
When
(En
-
#)
.
kBT
the
above
distributions
resemble
the
Maxwell-Boltzmann
distribution.
This
is
because
n
becomes
small
per
energy
level,
and
the
indistinguishability
of
the
particles
plays
a
less
important
role.
When
(En
-
#)
<
0,
the
Fermi-Dirac
distribution
\freezes�
to
1
for
all
energy
levels
below
#,
since
the
Pauli's
exclusion
principle
only
allows
one
fermion
per
level.
When
(En
-
#)
.
kBT
,
the
Bose-Einstein
distribution
diverges,
implying
that
the
particles
condense
to
an
energy
level
close
to
#.
This
condensation
is
more
pronounced
if
kBT
is
small.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
Appendix
C
Gaussian
Wave
Packet
C.1
Introduction
In
order
to
relate
the
wave
nature
to
the
particle
nature
of
an
object,
it
is
necessary
to
obtain
a
wave
packet
picture
of
the
object.
Experimental
observation
has
indicated
that
electrons
are
highly
localized
objects,
so
are
photons.
A
wavefunction
with
a
pure
or
single
wavenumber
k
has
equal
amplitude
everywhere.
According
to
the
probabilistic
interpretation
of
quantum
mechanics,
it
is
untenable
physically
to
think
of
a
particle
as
all
pervasive
and
can
be
found
equally
likely
everywhere.
A
photon
wave
can
have
many
k
wavenumbers,
and
they
can
be
linearly
superposed
to
form
a
localized
photon
wave
packet.
Since
the
E-k
relationship
of
the
photon
wave
is
linear
(or
almost
linear
in
the
material-media
case),
the
formation
of
such
a
wave
packet
is
quite
straightforward.
It
is
less
clear
for
an
electron
wave,
since
the
E-k
relationship
is
nonlinear.
In
this
appendix,
we
will
explain
the
particle
nature
of
an
electron
in
the
classical
limit
when
the
momentum
of
the
electron
becomes
large.
One
expects
that
the
wavefunction
resembles
that
of
a
localized
particle
in
this
limit
so
that
the
electron
is
found
with
high
probability
only
in
a
con
ned
location.
This
understanding
can
be
achieved
by
studying
the
Gaussian
wave
packet
solution
of
Schrodinger
equation.
When
the
Schrodinger
equation
is
solved
in
vacuum
for
electron,
the
solution
is
ik#r
This
unlocalized
solution
means
that
the
electron
can
be
everywhere.
A
more
realistic
wave-
function
for
an
electron
is
a
wave
packet
which
is
localized.
This
is
more
akin
to
the
motion
that
an
electron
is
a
localized
particle.
A
wave
packet
can
be
constructed
by
linear
superposing
waves
of
di#erent
momenta
~k
or
di#erent
energies
~!.
We
will
derive
the
Gaussian
wave
packet
solution
to
Schrodinger
equation.
This
can
be
constructed
by
studying
the
solution
to
the
wave
equation.
203
204
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
C.2
Derivation
from
the
Wave
Equation
It
is
well
known
that
the
wave
equation
@2
@2
@2
+++
k2
f
(x,
y,
z)
=
0
(C.2.1)
@x2
@y2
@z2
admits
solution
of
the
form
e#ik
x2+y2+(z..ib)2
f
(x,
y,
z)=
C
.
(C.2.2)
x2
+
y2
+(z
-
ib)
for
x2
+
y2
+(z
-
ib)6(C.2.3)
=0
The
above
corresponds
to
a
spherical
wave
where
the
source
point
is
located
in
the
complex
coordinates
x
=
0,
y
=
0,
and
z
=
ib.
It
was
rst
suggested
by
G.
Deschamps.
From
the
above,
it
is
quite
clear
that,
after
letting
z
=
vt,
e#ik
x2+y2+(vt..ib)2
f
(x,
y,
vt)=
A.
(C.2.4)
x2
+
y2
+(vt
-
ib)
is
a
solution
to
@2
@2
1
@2
++
+
k2
f
(x,
y,
vt)
=
0
(C.2.5)
@x2
@y2
v2
@t2
The
above
equation
can
be
factored
#.
#.
.
.
v
..1@t
-
ik2
+
@2
+
@2
v
..1@t
+
ik2
+
@2
+
@y
2
f
(x,
y,
vt)
=
0
(C.2.6)
xy
x
where
@t
=
@=@t,
@2
=
@2=@x2
and
so
on.
In
the
above,
function
of
an
operator
has
meaning
only
when
the
function
is
Taylor
expanded
into
an
algebraic
series.
One
can
assume
that
k2
!1,
while
@2
and
@2
are
small.1
Taylor
expanding
the
above
and
keeping
leading
order
xy
terms
only,
we
have
.
#.
.
i
...
i
...
v
..1@t
-
ik
-
@2
+
@2
v
..1@t
+
ik
+
@2
+
@2
=
0
(C.2.7)
f
(x,
y,
vt)
#
xy
xy
2k
2k
In
(C.2.4),
we
can
let2
jvt
-
ibj2
.
x+
y2
to
arrive
at
the
approximation
22
�
ik(vt..ib)+ik
x
+y
vt..ib
f
(x,
y,
vt)
�
A
(C.2.8)
vt
-
ib
1This
is
known
as
the
paraxial
wave
approximation.
It
implies
that
the
variation
of
the
solution
is
mainly
in
the
vt
direction
with
slow
variation
in
the
x
and
y
directions.
2It
can
be
shown
that
when
this
is
valid,
the
paraxial
wave
approximation
used
in
(C.2.7)
is
good.
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
205
It
can
be
shown
that
when
we
pick
the
plus
sign
above
in
the
�
sign,
the
above
is
the
exact
solution
to
#.
i
..#v
..1@t
-
ik
-
@2
+
@2
#+
(x,
y,
vt)
=
0
(C.2.9)
xy
2k
where
22
x
+y
ik
2(vt..ib)
#+
(x,
y,
vt)=
Aeik(vt..ib)
e
=
e
ik(vt..ib).
(x,
y,
t)
(C.2.10)
2(vt
-
ib)
and
22
x
+y
ik
2(vt..ib)
ibe
.
(x,
y,
t)=
..A0
(C.2.11)
(vt
-
ib)
Furthermore,
.
(x,
y,
t)
is
an
exact
solution
to
i
...
v
..1@t
-
@x
2
+
@y
2
.
(x,
y,
t)
=
0
(C.2.12)
2k
If
we
multiply
the
above
by
i~v,
the
above
becomes
~v
...
i~@t
+
@2
+
@2
.
(x,
y,
t)
=
0
(C.2.13)
xy
2k
By
letting
v
=
~k=m,
the
above
becomes
~2
...
i~@t
+
@2
+
@2
.
(x,
y,
t)
=
0
(C.2.14)
xy
2m
which
is
just
Schrodinger
equation.
Equation
(C.2.11)
represents
the
Gaussian
wave
packet
solution
of
Schrodinger
equation.
It
can
be
studied
further
to
elucidate
its
physical
contents.
C.3
Physical
Interpretation
In
(C.2.11),
one
can
write
22
22
2222
kx+
ykx+
y(vt
+
ib)
kx+
yx+
y
=
=+
i
(C.3.1)
2(vt
-
ib)
2(v2t2
+
b2)2RW
2
where
v2t2
+
b2
2bv2t2
R
=
;W
2
=
1
+
(C.3.2)
vt
kb2
Then
Gaussian
wave
packet
can
be
more
suggestively
written
as
22
22
+y
+y
A0
-
x
ik
x
..i'(t)
W
22R
.
(x,
y,
t)=
.
eee
(C.3.3)
1+
v2t2=b2
where
'(t)
=
tan..1
(vt=b)
(C.3.4)
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple
The
above
reveals
a
wave
packet
which
is
Gaussian
tapered
with
width
W
and
modulated
by
oscillatory
function
of
space
and
time.
However,
the
width
of
this
packet
is
a
function
of
time
as
indicated
by
(C.3.2).
At
vt
=
0,
the
width
of
the
packet
is
given
by
W0
=
2b
,
or
b
=
1
kW
2
(C.3.5)
k
2
This
width
can
be
made
independent
of
k
if
b
is
made
proportional
to
k.
Nevertheless,
as
time
progresses
with
vt
>
0,
the
width
of
the
packet
grows
according
to
(C.3.2).
However,
to
maintain
a
xed-width
W0,
it
is
necessary
that
b
!8
as
k
!1.
Subsequently,
the
e#ect
of
vt2=b2
becomes
small
in
(C.3.2)
as
b
!1.
This
means
that
the
width
of
the
Gaussian
wave
packet
remains
almost
constant
for
the
time
when
vt
=
b,
but
b
is
a
large
number
proportional
to
k.
The
duration
over
which
the
Gaussian
wave
packet's
width
remains
unchange
becomes
increasingly
longer
as
k
becomes
larger.
In
the
above,
~k
represents
the
momentum
of
a
particle.
When
the
particle
carries
high
momentum,
it
can
be
represented
by
a
Gaussian
wave
packet
that
hardly
changes
in
shape
with
respect
to
time.
This
is
what
is
expected
of
a
classical
picture
of
a
moving
particle:
the
Gaussian
wave
packet
does
reproduce
the
classical
picture
of
a
high
momentum
particle.
It
is
quite
easy
to
design
a
wave
packet
for
a
photon
that
does
not
spread
with
time
by
linear
superposing
waves
with
di#erent
frequencies.
This
is
because
the
!-k
diagram
(or
E-k
diagram,
since
E
=
~!)
for
photons
is
a
straight
line.
It
implies
that
all
waves
with
di#erent
k's
travel
with
the
same
phase
velocity.
These
Fourier
modes
are
locked
in
phase,
and
the
pulse
shape
does
not
change
as
the
wave
packet
travels.
k
w
Figure
C.1:
.
-
k
diagram
for
a
photon
wave
which
is
a
straight
line.
But
for
electron
wave
in
a
vacuum,
the
!-k
diagram
is
quadratic.
It
implies
that
waves
with
di#erent
k
numbers
travel
with
di#erent
phase
velocity,
giving
rise
to
distortion
of
the
pulse
shape.
But
if
we
have
a
narrow
band
pulse
operating
in
the
high
k
regime,
the
!-k
diagram
is
quasi-linear
locally,
and
there
should
be
little
pulse
spreading.
Hence,
one
can
construct
a
quasi-distortionless
pulse
in
the
high
k
regime.
Quantum
Information
and
Quantum
Interpretation
k..k..
Figure
C.2:
.
-
k
diagram
of
an
electron
wave
in
vacuum.
C.4
Stability
of
the
Plane
Wave
Solution
It
is
quite
obvious
from
our
understanding
of
quantum
mechanics,
wave
packets,
and
coherence,
that
the
plane
wave
solution
eikx
is
not
stable
as
k
!1.
One
can
always
express
.
8
ikx
ikx.
0)
e
=
dx.
e#(x
-
x
(C.4.1)
..8
If
one
can
think
of
#(x
-
x0)
as
the
limiting
case
of
a
wave
packet,
the
above
implies
that
a
plane
wave
can
be
expanded
as
a
linear
superposition
of
wave
packets
at
each
location
x,
but
bearing
a
phase
exp(ikx).
As
k
!1,
this
phase
is
rapidly
varying
among
the
di#erent
wave
packets.
Hence,
their
coherence
is
extremely
di#cult
to
maintain,
and
upset
easily
by
coupling
to
other
quantum
systems
that
exists
in
the
environment.
In
other
words,
the
particle
cannot
be
stably
maintained
in
the
plane-wave
state
classically:
it
has
to
collapse
to
a
wave-packet
state.
Consequently,
classically,
particles
are
localized
when
its
momentum
k
becomes
large.
Quantum
Mechanics
Made
Simple